2 Technical Bid

MINISTRY OF EXTERNAL AFFAIRS,
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
TENDER DOCUMENTS
FOR
DEVELOPMENT OF INTEGRATED CHECK POST

AT
BIRATNAGAR, NEPAL
ALONG INDO-NEPAL BORDER
PART-I
TECHNICAL BID
TENDER NOTICE NO: RITES/AP/ICP/BIRATNAGAR/TENDER/2015/ 01
FEBRUARY, 2015
Consultants
(A Govt. of India Enterprise)

AIRPORTS DIVISION
RITES BHAWAN, Plot No. 144, SECTOR 44,
GURGAON 122 003
Phone: 0124-2728105, Fax 0124-2571633
web: www.rites.com
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
TENDER DOCUMENTS
FOR
DEVELOPMENT OF INTEGRATED CHECK POST

AT
BIRATNAGAR, NEPAL
ALONG INDO-NEPAL BORDER
PART-I
TECHNICAL BID
TENDER NOTICE NO: RITES/AP/ICP/ BIRATNAGAR/TENDER/2015/ 01
FEBRUARY, 2015
Tender Document issued to
_______________________________ (Name and Address of Tenderer)

_______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
Signature of Officer issuing the Document with Designation and Date of issue
_____________
Consultants
(A Govt. of India Enterprise)

AIRPORTS DIVISION
RITES BHAWAN, Plot No. 144, SECTOR 44,
GURGAON 122 003
Phone: 0124-2728105, Fax 0124-2571633
web: www.rites.com
Development of Integrated Check Post at Biratnagar, Nepal along Indo-Nepal Border :
RITES LTD.
TENDER AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT
CONTENTS
S. No. Details Page

PART 1 (Technical Bid)
SECTION No 1 Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions 001 to 064
to Bidders & Power of attorney
SECTION No 2 Tender and Contract Form 065 to 068
SECTION No 3 Special Conditions 069 to 076
SECTION No 4 Schedules A to F 077 to 084
SECTION No 5 Technical Specifications 085 to 246
SECTION No 6 Tender Drawings 247 to 248 and
33 nos. tender
drawings
PART 2 SCHEDULE A - BILL OF QUANTITIES

(Financial Bid)
Guidelines for filling up Bill of 001

Quantities
ABSTRACT OF COST 002
SCHEDULE NO. I (CPWD DSR items Civil Engg.) 003 to 042
SCHEDULE NO. II (Non-Schedule items Civil Engg.) 043 to 146
SCHEDULE NO. III (CPWD DSR items Elec. Engg.) 147 to 162
SCHEDULE NO. IV (Non-Schedule items Elec. Engg.) 163 to 220
SCHEDULE NO. V (Prime Cost items) 221
PART - 3 General Conditions of Contract *

SECTION No 7* Conditions of Contract
SECTION No 8* Clauses of Contract
SECTION No 9* RITES Safety Code
SECTION No 10* RITES Model Rules for Workers
SECTION No 11* RITES Contract Labour Regulations
*General Conditions of Contract 2011 (Compilation of Sections 7) to 11) is
available with all correction slips upto date, in RITES website :www.rites.com
Before Issue : After Receipt :

Insertions (I) : . NIL .. Insertions (I) : ..
Corrections(CR) : .. NIL ..... -i- Corrections (CR) : ...
Cuttings (CT) : ... NIL .. Cuttings (CT) : ......
Omissions(OM) : . NIL .. Omissions(OM) : ..
Over Writing (OW) : NIL . Over Writing (OW) : .....
PART 1
TECHNICAL BID
SECTION-1
NOTICE INVITING TENDER

AND
INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS
Development of Integrated Check Post at Biratnagar, Nepal along Indo-Nepal Border
SECTION 1
NOTICE INVITING TENDER AND INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Tender Notice
Tenders are invited in two packet system by RITES Ltd., a Public Sector
Enterprise under the Ministry of Railways, acting for and on behalf of
Ministry of External Affairs, Government of India (Employer) as an
Agent / Power of Attorney Holder, from working contractors (including
contractors who have executed works within the last five years reckoned
from the scheduled date of opening of tender) of Government
Organizations / Semi-Government Organizations of Central or State
Government; or of Public Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies of
Central / State Government; or of Public Ltd. Companies listed in stock
exchange in India or abroad, for the work of Development of Integrated
Check Post at Biratnagar, Nepal along Indo-Nepal International
Border -Main package-I.
(Note : Throughout these bidding documents, the terms bid and tender
and their derivatives are synonymous).
1.2 Estimated Cost of Work

The work is estimated to cost ` 104.33 Crore (Rupees One Hundred
Four Crore & Thirty three Lakhs Only). This Estimate, however, is
given merely as a rough guide.
1.3 Time for Completion

The time allowed for completion will be 24 (twenty four) months from the
date of start which is defined in Schedule F under Clause 5.1a of Clauses
of Contract.
1.4 Brief Scope of Work

Present constrained traffic conditions and lack of facilities also require that
expansion of integrated check-post is undertaken. The ICP project aims at
facilitating improved border trade and people contact by creating
appropriate facilities for cargo and passenger traffic.
Biratnagar, the second largest town in Nepal, is located about 6 km north
of the present check-post near Indo-Nepal border, on the Nepalese side.
This check-post falls under Morang district of Kosi circle, the area
adjoining the border is called Rani. The existing check-post, both in India
and Nepal are surrounded by extremely congested residential /
commercial built-up area. The proposed check-post is located about 2.5
km south of the existing check-post.

Corrections(CR) : .. NIL ..... -1- Corrections (CR) : ...
This tender package is a part of overall Integrated Check-Post (ICP)

development plan. The work will be carried out as explained in various
documents of the bidding documents, all read in conjunction.
The bidders should satisfy themselves before bidding about the
accessibility of the site. Any access road need to be constructed for
carriage of men/machinery/material etc. to the project site shall be sole
responsibility of the contractor and nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.Bidders are encouraged to acertain the local conditions
before Pre-bid meeting/ submission of bids.RITES representative
(Manager/civil contact no. 9350386126) will be available at site for any
site related clearification/query during the site visit.
Generally following facilities / works are included in this tender package.
A) Construction of Integrated checkpost consisting of buildings, sheds, internal /
external services, roads, parkings, signages, special systems etc.
B) Construction of 5.0 kms approach road from existing road (connecting
Jogbani/India with Biratnagar/Nepal) in Nepal to the proposed ICP location.
The facilities are broadly listed hereunder but the list is however indicative
only :
Salient Features of ICP at Biratnagar Nepal

i) Pavements
a. Flexible pavements for internal roads (7.5m wide, 8.5 km length appox.,
over 2m average earth filling)
b. Pre-cast C.C. block Pavements for Truck parks - 21740 sqm
ii) Buildings and Prefabricated Sheds = as per attached table in
following pages.
iii) Gates / Security Gates
iv) Storm water drainage, open/covered drains : 2526m
v) Water Supply & distribution System : 1821m
vi) Sewerage collection, treatment and disposal system : 1535m and
50 KLD STP
vii) ESS & Transformer 1000 kva and DG set 380 kva & 125 kva.
viii) Area Lighting 188400 Sq.mt & boundary lighting (Single arm pole,
triple arm, high mast 30 m & 16m.
ix) Fire Fighting system : 1849m
x) Miscellaneous equipment and systems
a. Weigh bridges- 80 T
b. Surveillance system (CCTV)
c. PA system
d. Telephone connectivity including EPABX
e. Lan connectivity
f. Internal / External Signages
g. Landscaping
The building works proposed under the project are further divided into two
categories, namely: Buildings & Sheds.
The various structures coming under Buildings head which are provided
with RCC framed structures are:
Common Administrative Building

Custom Service Building
Dispensary Building, Dormitory building
Security Barracks, Quarantine Block
Toilet Blocks
Boundary Wall, Entrance Gate
The various structures coming under Sheds head which are provided with
Pre-fabricated structures are:
Warehouses
Confiscated Goods Shed
Inspection Shed, fumingation & rummaging sheds
Animal Shed, Car/Bus/Cargo Processing Shed
KEY BUILDING FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
S. Buildings Area (in No. of Floor Total Height

No. sqm) Storeys Height (in M)
(in M)
A) BUILDINGS
1 Admn Building (Common) 1324 Double 3.8 13

2 Dormitory => 1 nos. x 600 Single 4 5
600sqm
3 Dispensary / Clinic => 1 160 Single 3 4
no. x 160sqm
4 Toilet (2 typical blocks of 358.8 Single 3 4
125sqm each) & 4+4
Toilet in process area
5 ESS & Pump House => 361 Single 4.5 5.5
325sqm + 36 sqm
6 Quarantine Bldg => 1 no. 280 Single 3 4
x 280sqm
7 Security Barracks 400 Single 4 5
(Common) => 1 no. x
400sqm
8 Entrance Gate 150 Double 3 13
Height
9 Boundary Wall 2.7
10 Custom Service Building 350 Single 3 4
Total Area (Buildings) 3984

S. Buildings Area (in No. of Floor Total Height

No. sqm) Storeys Height (in M)
(in M)
B) SHEDS & OTHER MISC. STRUCTURES (DESIGN & BUILD)
11 Warehouse & Refrigerated 1800 Single 7 Pre-

Shed - 2 nos => 1200sqm Engineered
+ 600sqm area each steel framed
12 Inspection Shed 2 no.s => 725 Single 7 building/shed
475sqm + 250sqm area
each
13 Animal Shed => 1 no. x 120 Single 6
120sqm = 200sqm
14 Confiscated Goods Shed 230 Single 6
=> 2 nos. x 115sqm
15 Typical Processing Shed 5000 Single 5.5
(25m x 50m) => 4 nos. x
1250sqm
16 Process Cabins & Police 172.8 Single 2.5 3.1
Posts (2.4m x 2.4m) - 30
nos.
Total Area (Sheds) 8048
Total Area in sqm (Buildings & Sheds) 12032
1.5 Availability of Site

The site for the work is available with client Ministry of External
Affairs, Government of India.
The complete land (for approach road and ICP construction site) shall be
handed over to contractor in one go at the beginning of the project itself.
However ICP site lies approximately 5 kms inside cultivated fields from
the existing road (connecting Jogbani/India with Biratnagar/Nepal) in
Nepal. Hence the work is to be done in following two phases :
Phase 1 : In the initial 6 (six) months period, from date of start, contractor
has to complete the work of approach road (of approximately 5.15 kms
length from the existing road in Nepal to proposed ICP location and
approximately 1km stretch of road, within ICP land, upto International
Border) upto GSB level, in order to facilitate smooth movement of
construction material / machinery to & from ICP.
Phase 2 : All the balance works related to the construction of approach
road and the Integrated checkpost as enumerated in para 1.4 above and
as per Bill of Quantities / relevant drawings / specifications, complete in all
respect, have to be completed in subsequent 18 (eighteen) months

period.
2.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA TO BE SATISFIED
2.1 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied are given at Annexure I

enclosed.
2.2 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied will depend on the category of

works, whether Normal or Large. Normal Works are those costing upto
` 100 Crores each and Large Works are those costing more than ` 100
Crores. The work for which the Tender is being invited falls under the
category of Large (more then ` 100 cr ).
2.3 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied will also depend on whether the
Work falls in Normal area or Difficult area. Difficult area includes North
East States, Jammu & Kashmir, Jharkhand, Chattisgarh and Andaman &
Nicobar Islands. Normal area covers all areas other than Difficult area.
The work for which this Tender has been invited falls under Normal area.
2.4 In this Tender Joint Venture is allowed.
In case Joint Venture is allowed the following will apply:
a) If JV is successful in the Bid, the Contract will be awarded in the name of

JV. The JV Agreement should be executed within 15 days of receipt of
Letter of Acceptance and the JV Agreement duly registered in accordance
with law so as to be legally valid and binding on the members. The JV
shall also open a Bank account in the name of JV and all payments due to
the JV shall be credited by the Employer to that account only. To facilitate
statutory deductions such as towards Income Tax, VAT etc. made from
the amounts due to the JV being credited to the concerned Government
Departments, the JV shall arrange to obtain in the name of JV, PAN/TIN
etc as required.
b) Bid submitted by a Joint Venture of two firms only as Partners/Members

shall be accompanied by the following documents:
i) A copy of Joint Venture MOU/Agreement duly notarized so as to

be legally valid and binding on all the Partners/Members and
incorporating the following provisions (Suggested format at
Annexure III):
The Bid and, in case of a successful Bid, the Agreement

shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all
Partners/Members.
One of the Partners/Members shall be nominated as being
in charge and this authorization shall be evidenced by

submitting Power of Attorney signed by legally authorized

signatories of all the Partners/Members.
The Partner-in-charge/Lead Member shall be authorized to
incur liabilities and receive instructions for and on behalf of
any and all partners/members of the Joint Venture and the
entire execution of the Contract, shall be done exclusively
with the Partner in charge.
All the partners of the Joint Venture shall be liable jointly and
severally for the execution of the Contract in accordance
with the Contract terms and a statement to this effect shall
be included in the authorization through a Power of Attorney
in favour of the Partner-in-charge/Lead Member as well as
in the Bid and in the Agreement (in case of a successful
bid).
Indication of the precise responsibility of all
Partners/Members of the Joint Venture in respect of
planning, design, construction equipment, key personnel,
work execution and financing of the Project duly indicating
the percentage in financing of JV by each Partner.
The maximum number of Partners can be only two and the
Partner-in-Charge/Lead Member shall have more than 50%
participation in financing of the JV and each of the other
Members minimum 45% participation in financing of JV.
All partners/members of the JV shall comply with the
provisions in the Integrity Pact and any violation of the Pact
by any partner/member shall be construed as a violation by
the JV.
ii) Power of Attorney in favour of the Partner-in-charge/Lead Member

on the lines mentioned in item a above. (Suggested format at
Annexure V).
2.5 The documents to be furnished by the Bidder to prove that he is satisfying

the Qualification Criteria laid down should all be in the Bidders name,
except in cases where though the name has changed, the owners
continued to remain the same and in cases of amalgamation of entities.
3.0 FORMAT AND CHECK LIST FOR SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION ON

QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
3.1 Other than Joint Ventures

The Tenderer shall furnish a Letter of Transmittal as given in Annexure II
A enclosing the documents mentioned therein/listed in para 1(a) of
Annexure IA.

3.2 Joint Ventures (For Large Works) : The Partner in charge / Lead
member shall furnish a Letter of Transmittal as given in Annexure II B (L)
enclosing the documents mentioned therein/listed in para 1(b) of
Annexure I A.
3.3 Joint ventures (For Normal Works) : Deleted
4.0 CONTENTS OF TENDER DOCUMENT
4.1 Each set of Tender or Bidding Document will comprise the Documents
listed below and addenda issued in accordance with para 7 :
PART 1 :- Technical Bid Packet

(read with correction Slip Nos. 1 to 16)
Section 1 Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Tenderers.

Section 2 Tender and Contract Form.
Section 3 Special Conditions.
Section 4 Schedules A to F
Section 5 Technical Specifications
Section 6 Drawings
PART 2 :- Financial Bid Packet

Schedule of Quantities (Bill of Quantities)
PART 3:- General Conditions of Contract

(read with correction Slip Nos. 1 to 6)
Section 7 Conditions of Contract
Section 8 Clauses of Contract
Section 9 RITES Safety Code
Section 10 RITES Model Rules for protection of Health and Sanitary
arrangements for Workers
Section 11 RITES Contractors Labour Regulations
4.2 General Conditions of Contract (Compilation of Sections 7 to 11) with

upto date correction slips is also available in RITES website
<www.rites.com>
5.0 ISSUE OF TENDER DOCUMENT
5.1 A complete set of Tender Document (Technical and Financial Bid)

described in Para 4.1 above can be seen in the office of the JGM (AP),
RITES Limited, First Floor, RITES BHAWAN II, Plot No. 144,
Sector 44, Gurgaon 122 003 (Haryana) Ph 0124 - 2728111,
2728105 Fax 0124 - 2571633 between hours of 11.00 AM and 4.00 PM
every day except on Saturdays, Sundays and Public Holidays.

5.2 One set of Tender Document may be purchased from the office of JGM
(AP), RITES Limited, First Floor, RITES BHAWAN II, Plot No. 144,
2728111 Fax 0124 - 2571633 from 09.02.2015 to 27.02.2015 for a non
refundable fee per set of ` 5,000/- (Rupees Five Thousand only) in the
form of Demand Draft/ Pay Order/ Bankers cheque drawn on any
Scheduled Bank payable at Gurgaon in favour of RITES Ltd., Gurgaon,
on submission of an application.
5.3 Tender Documents including drawings can also be downloaded from

RITES Website (www.rites.com) and in such a case, the Tenderer shall
deposit the cost of tender documents (unless he is exempted from such
payment as a matter of Government Policy) along with submission of
tender, failing which his tender shall not be opened. The cost of tender
documents shall be deposited in the form of a separate Bankers cheque /
Demand Draft / Pay Order and enclosed in the envelope containing the
Earnest Money Deposit. In case the Tenderer is exempted from such
payment, the onus of proving such exemption shall rest with the Tenderer
and proof of the same shall be placed in the envelope meant for Earnest
Money. The amendments / clarifications to the Tender documents will
also be available on the above website.
5.4 Tender Documents downloaded from RITES website shall be considered

valid for participating in the tender process. During the scrutiny of
downloaded tender document, if any modification / correction etc. is
noticed as compared to the original documents posted on the website, the
bid submitted by such a Tenderer is liable to be rejected. In case the bid
of a Tenderer who has downloaded the document from website is
accepted the contract shall be executed in the original / manual tender
document issued by the concerned RITES officer.
5.5 Clarifications on Tender Documents
A prospective Tenderer requiring any clarification on the Tender

Document may notify Joint General Manager (Airports), RITES
Limited. (The official nominated for this purpose) in writing or by telefax/
or by E-mail at the following Postal Address/ Fax No./E-mail address :
First Floor, RITES BHAWAN II, Plot No. 144, Sector 44,
Gurgaon 122 003 (Haryana) Ph 0124 - 2728105, 2728111 Fax 0124 -
2571633 / email : airports@rites.com
In cases where Pre-Bid Meeting is not proposed to be held, request for

clarifications including request for Extension of Time for submission of
Bid, if any, must be received not later than 10 (ten) days prior to the
deadline for submission of tenders. Details of such questions raised and
clarifications furnished will be uploaded in RITES website without
identifying the names of the Bidders who had raised the questions. Any
modification of the Tender Document arising out of such clarifications will
also be uploaded on RITES website only.
In cases where Pre-Bid Meeting is proposed to be held, provisions in para

6.0 below may be referred to.
6.0 PRE-BID MEETING
6.1 The Tenderer or his official representative is invited to attend a pre-bid

meeting which will take place at the Office of Group General Manager
(Airports), RITES Limited, First Floor, RITES BHAWAN II, Plot No.
144, Sector 44, Gurgaon 122 003 (Haryana) Ph 0124 - 2728105,
2728111 Fax 0124 - 2571633 on 20.02.2015 at 11:30 Hrs.
6.2 The Tenderers are required to submit any question on issues relating to
the tender, in writing or by telefax or by E-mail so as to reach Joint
General Manager (Airports), RITES Limited, First Floor, RITES
BHAWAN II, Plot No. 144, Sector 44, Gurgaon 122 003
(Haryana) Ph 0124 - 2728105, 2728111 Fax 0124 - 2571633 / email :
airports@rites.com (the official nominated for this purpose) not later than
3 (three) days before the date fixed for the meeting.
6.3 The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify the issues raised and to
answer supplementary questions on such issues.
6.4 Minutes of the meeting including the text of the questions raised (without
identifying the source of enquiry) and the responses given will be
uploaded on RITES website. Any modifications of the Tender Document
which may become necessary as a result of the Pre-bid Meeting shall be
made exclusively through the issue of an Addendum / Corrigendum and
not through the Minutes of the Pre-Bid Meeting. The Minutes of the
Meeting as described above and the Addendum / Corrigendum, if any, will
be uploaded on RITES website only.
6.5 Non-attendance at the Pre-bid Meeting will not be a cause for

disqualification of a tenderer.
7.0 AMENDMENT OF TENDER DOCUMENT
7.1 Before the deadline for submission of tenders, the Tender Document may
be modified by RITES Ltd. by issue of addenda/corrigendum. Issue of
addenda / corrigenda will however be stopped 7 days prior to the deadline
for submission of tenders as finally stipulated.
7.2 Addendum/corrigendum, if any, will be hosted on website only and shall

become a part of the tender document. All Tenderers are advised to see
the website for addendum/ corrigendum to the tender document which
may be uploaded upto 7 days prior to the deadline for submission of
Tender as finally stipulated.
7.3 To give prospective Tenderers reasonable time in which to take the

addenda/ corrigenda into account in preparing their tenders, extension of
the deadline for submission of tenders may be given as considered
necessary by RITES.
8.0 TENDER VALIDITY
8.1 The Tender shall be valid for a period of 120 days from the due date for
submission of Tender or any extended date as indicated in sub para
below.
8.2 In exceptional circumstances, during the process of evaluation of tenders

and prior to the expiry of the original time limit for Tender Validity, the
Employer may request that the Tenderers may extend the period of
validity for a specified additional period. The request and the tenderers
response shall be made in writing. A Tenderer may refuse the request
without forfeiting his Earnest Money. A Tenderer agreeing to the request
will not be permitted to modify his Financial Bid to a higher amount but
will be required to extend the validity of the Earnest Money for the period
of the extension.
9.0 EARNEST MONEY
9.1 The Tender should be accompanied by Earnest Money of ` 100.00 Lakhs

(Rupees One Hundered Lakhs only) in any of the forms given below:-
Bankers Cheque / Pay Order/ Demand Draft payable at New Delhi,
drawn in favour of Pay & Accounts Officer, Ministry of External
Affairs, New Delhi.
9.2 Any Tender not accompanied by Earnest Money in an acceptable form

shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive unless the tenderer
is exempted from payment of Earnest Money as a matter of Government
Policy. The onus of proving such exemption shall rest with the Tenderer
and such proof shall be placed in the envelope meant for Earnest Money.
9.3 Refund of Earnest Money

a) Two Packet System
The Earnest Money of the Tenderers whose Technical Bid is found not
acceptable will be returned without interest soon after scrutiny of
Technical Bid has been completed by the Employer subject to provisions
of Para 9.4 (b). The Earnest Money of the Tenderers whose Technical Bid
is found acceptable but Financial Bid is rejected will be returned without
interest within 28 days of the end of Tender Validity Period subject to
provisions of Para 9.4 (b). The bidder are requested to submit a pre
receipt as per format of MEA given at Annexure-B

Corrections(CR) : .. NIL ..... - 10 - Corrections (CR) : ...
b) Single Packet System

After evaluation of the Financial Bids, the Earnest Money of unsuccessful
Tenderers will be returned without interest within 28 days of the end of
Tender Validity Period subject to provisions of Para 9.4 (b).
c) Earnest Money shall be refunded through Electronic Fund Transfer.

The tendered shall submit RTGS/NEFT Mandate Form as per Performa
given in Annexure IX duly filled in.
d) In case of both Two Packet and Single Packet System, the Earnest
Money of the successful Tenderer, without any interest, will be adjusted
as a part of the Security Deposit payable in terms of provisions in the
General Conditions of Contract (Clause 1A of Clauses of Contract).
9.4 The Earnest Money is liable to be forfeited

a) If after bid opening, but before expiry of bid validity or issue of
Letter of Acceptance, whichever is earlier, any Tenderer
i) withdraws his tender or
ii) makes any modification in the terms and conditions of the
tender which are not acceptable to the Employer.
b) In case any statement/information/document furnished by the

Tenderer is found to be incorrect or false.
c) In the case of a successful Tenderer, if the Tenderer

i) fails to furnish the Performance Guarantee within the period
specified under Clause 1 of Clauses of Contract. or
ii) fails to commence the work without valid reasons within the
period as specified in Schedule F after the date of issue of
Letter of Acceptance or from the first date of handing over of
the site, whichever is later.
In case of forfeiture of E.M.D. as prescribed hereinabove, the Tenderer

shall not be allowed to participate in the retendering process of the work.
9.5 CURRENCIES OF BID AND PAYMENT

a) The unit rates and prices shall be quoted by the bidder entirely in
Indian Rupees only.
b) All payments including advances shall be made in Indian Rupees
only.
c) A bidder is not expected to incur expenditure in currencies other
than Indian Rupees OR Nepali Rupees for the inputs to the work.
The contractor wishing to incur expenditure in currencies other
than Indian Rupees OR Nepali Rupees shall make arrangements
at his end for the same after observance of the relevant provisions
of laws and regulations of government of India and Government of
Nepal.

10.0 ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS BY THE TENDERERS
The Tenderers shall submit offers which comply strictly with the
requirements of the Tender Document as amended from time to time as
indicated in Para 7.0 above. Alternatives or any modifications shall
render the Tender invalid.
11.0 SUBMISSION OF TENDER
11.1 Two Packet System and Single Packet System

(a) Two Packet System
The tenderer shall submit the Tender in original in two packets as under:-
PACKET A :- TECHNICAL BID
Envelope 1 Earnest Money alongwith Mandate Form as

per Annexure IX and Cost of Tender
Document if the bid is submitted on the
document downloaded from RITES website,
unless exempted from both payments as a
matter of Government Policy. If exempted the
document substantiating such exemption must
be placed in this envelope.
Envelope 2 Authority to Sign, Integrity Pact (when
applicable) and Qualification Information along
with all enclosures / documents as per Letter
of Transmittal/ Checklist given in Annexure II
A / II B(L) / II B(N). As regards Authority to
Sign Para 11.2 below may be referred to. As
regards Integrity Pact, para 11.7 below may
be referred to.
Technical Bid (Part 1 and Part 3) (Refer Para
4.1) including signature on Tender Form
(Section 2) duly witnessed after filling up
blanks therein.
Each page of the above documents including

all Drawings should bear the dated initials of
the Tenderer along with the seal of the
Company, in token of confirmation of having
understood the Contents.
PACKET B :- FINANCIAL BID
Envelope 3 Schedule/Bill of Quantities.

Each page of the Financial Bid (Part 2 Refer Para 4.1) should be signed
by the Tenderer along with the seal of the company. In the last page of
Financial Bid, at the end, the Tenderer should sign in full with the name of
the Company, Seal of the Company and Date.
All rates and amounts, whether in figures and words, must be written in
indelible ink. Each correction, cutting, addition and overwriting should be
initialed by the Tenderer.
The rates must be quoted in decimal coinage. Amounts must be quoted

in full rupees by ignoring fifty paise and less and considering more than
fifty paise as rupee one. If the same item figures in more than one
section/part of Schedule of Quantities, the Tenderer should quote the
same rate for that item in all sections/parts. If different rates are quoted
for the same item, the least of the different rates quoted only shall be
considered for evaluation of that item in all sections/parts of the Schedule
of Quantities.
Instructions contained in subsequent Para 17.6 (a) on Item rate tender

and 17.6 (b) on Percentage rate tender may be carefully studied and
complied with.
11.2 Authority to Sign

a) If the applicant is an individual, he should sign above his full type
written name and current address.
b) If the applicant is a proprietary firm, the Proprietor should sign
above his full type written name and the full name of his firm with
its current address.
c) If the applicant is a firm in partnership, the Documents should be
signed by all the partners of the firm above their full type written
names and current addresses. Alternatively the Documents should
be signed by the person holding Power of Attorney for the firm in
the Format at Annexure IV.
d) If the applicant is a limited Company, or a Corporation, the
Documents shall be signed by a duly authorized person holding
Power of Attorney for signing the Documents in the Format at
Annexure IV.
e) If the applicant is a Joint Venture, the Documents shall be signed
by the Lead Member holding Power of Attorney for signing the
Document in the Format at Annexure V. The signatory on behalf
of such Lead Partner shall be the one holding the Power of
Attorney in the Format at Annexure IV.
11.3 Items to be kept in mind while furnishing details

While filling in Qualification Information documents and the Financial Bid,
following should be kept in mind :

i) There shall be no additions or alterations except those to comply

with the instructions issued by the Employer or as necessary to
correct errors, if any, made by the Tenderers.
ii) Conditional Offer/ Tender will be rejected. Unconditional rebate/
discounts in the Financial offer will however be accepted.
iii) The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any conditional
rebate/discounts. While evaluating the Bid Price, the conditional
rebates/discounts which are in excess of the requirements of the
bidding documents or otherwise result in accrual of unsolicited
benefits to the Employer, shall not be taken into account.
11.4 Sealing and Marking of Tenders
11.4.1 Two Packet System

(a) PACKET A TECHNICAL BID
Envelopes 1 & 2 as described in Para 11.1 (a) above should be sealed
separately superscribing Technical Bid with Envelope Number, Name
of the work and Name of the tenderer. In addition, the following should
also be superscribed on the respective envelopes.
Envelope 1 i) Earnest Money alongwith Mandate

Form as per Annexure IX
ii) Cost of Tender Document if the Bid is
submitted on the document downloaded
from RITES website.
iii) If the bidder is exempted from
payment of Earnest Money and Cost of
Tender Document, he should
superscribe Documents substantiating
Exemption from payment of Earnest
Money and Cost of Tender Documents
Envelope 2 i) Authority to Sign, Integrity Pact
(when applicable as per para 11.7
below) and Qualification Information /
documents as per checklist in
Annexure IIA / IIB(L) / II B (N).
ii) Technical Bid including Drawings
Both the envelopes should be put in a packet which should be sealed.

The following should be superscribed on the packet:
i) Packet A Technical Bid
ii) Name of the Work
iii) Name of the Tenderer
(b) PACKET B FINANCIAL BID
Envelope 3 Financial Bid should be put in Packet B which should be
sealed. The following should be superscribed on the packet.
i) Packet B - Financial Bid
ii) Name of the work
iii) Name of the tenderer
(c) Both packets A and B should be put inside an outer envelope and
sealed. This envelope should be superscribed with the following
details:
i) Tender for (Name of work)
ii) Tender number
iii) Date and time of opening of Tender
iv) From (Name of Tenderer)
v) Addressed to Group General Manager (Airports), RITES
Limited, First Floor, RITES BHAWAN II, Plot No. 144,
Sector 44, Gurgaon 122 003 (Haryana) Ph 0124 -
2728105, 2728111 Fax 0124 - 2571633 (RITES Officer inviting
the Tender).
11.4.2 Single Packet System: Deleted
11.5 Deadline for submission of Tender
11.5.1 Tenders must be received by the Employer at the following address not
later than 14:00 Hrs on 03.03.2015. In the event of the specified date for
the submission of the Tender being declared a holiday due to
Strike/Bandh or on any account by the Employer, the Tenders will be
received up to the appointed time on the next working day.
Address for submission of Tender : Group General Manager (Airports),

Sector 44, Gurgaon 122 003 (Haryana) 0124 - 2728105, 2728111
Fax 0124 - 2571633
11.5.2 The Employer may extend the deadline for submission of Tenders by
issuing an amendment in writing in accordance with Para 7.3 in which
case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the Tenderer
previously subject to the original deadline will be subject to new deadline.
11.6 Late Tender / Delayed Tender

Any Tender received by the Employer after the specified date and time of
receipt of Tender will be returned unopened to the Tenderer.
11.7 Integrity Pact

(i) The Bidder/Contractor is required to enter into an Integrity Pact
with the Employer, in the Format at Annexure VIII. The Integrity
Pact enclosed as Annexure VIII will be signed by MEA (Employer)
or RITES for and on behalf of Employer as its Agent/Power of
Attorney Holder at the time of execution of Agreement with the
successful Bidder. While submitting the Bid, the Integrity Pact shall
be signed by the duly authorized signatory of the Bidder/Lead
Member of JV. In case of failure to submit the Integrity Pact duly

signed and witnessed, along with the Bid, the Bid is likely to be
rejected.
(ii) In case of any contradiction between the Terms and Conditions of

the Bid Document and the Integrity Pact, the former will prevail.
Provided always that provision of this para 11.7 Integrity Pact,
shall be applicable only when so provided in para 11.7A below
which will also stipulate the name and address of the Independent
External Monitor as well as the Name, designation and address of
the official nominated by the Employer to act as the Liaison Officer
between the Independent External Monitor and the Engineer-in-
Charge as well as the Contractor.
11.7A Whether para 11.7 (Integrity Pact) shall be applicable YES
If Yes, Name and Address of the Independent External Sh.Suresh Kumar

Monitor (In case value of contract is Rs.10 crores or more) IEM/RITES Ltd.
Name, Designation and Address of RITES Sh.Y. K. Sharma

Liaison Officer Group General
Manager
AP/RITES Ltd
11.8 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids
11.8.1 Tenderers may modify or withdraw their bids by giving notice in writing
before the deadline prescribed in para 11.5 for submission of Bids.
11.8.2 Each modification or withdrawal notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked

and delivered in accordance with paras 11.1, 11.2 and 11.4 with the outer
envelopes additionally marked Modification or Withdrawal as
appropriate.
The envelopes for modifications on Technical Bid and Financial Bid

shall be submitted in separate sealed envelopes and marked as
Modifications of Technical Bid or Modifications of Financial Bid as the
case may be.
11.8.3 No bid may be modified after the deadline for submission of Bids except
as indicated below. If a Bidder makes a suo moto offer of rebate /
discount in his Financial Bid after the deadline for submission of Bids,
such offer will not be considered for Financial evaluation of Tenders. But
if the Tenderer is successful in the Bid based on his original offer without
considering the suo moto offer, the rebate / discount offered will be taken
into account for incorporation in the Contract Agreement.

11.8.4 Withdrawal or modification of a Bid, subject to provisions in Para 11.8.3

above, after the deadline for submission of Bids shall result in forfeiture of
the Earnest Money.
12.0 TENDER OPENING, EVALUATION AND CLARIFICATIONS OF

APPLICATIONS
12.1 The Employer will open all the Tenders received (except those received
late or delayed) as described in para 12.2/12.3 below, in the presence of
the Tenderers or their representatives who choose to attend at 14:30 Hrs
on 03.03.2015 in the office of Group General Manager (Airports),
2728111 Fax 0124 - 2571633. In the event of the specified date of the
opening being declared a holiday by the Employer, the Tenders will be
opened at the appointed time and location on the next working day.
12.2 Two Packet System

(a) (i) The PACKET A will be opened and Envelope 1 containing Earnest
Money and Cost of Tender Document (where Bid is submitted in the
document downloaded from RITES website) of all the Tenderers will
be opened first and checked. If the Earnest Money furnished is not for
the stipulated amount or is not in an acceptable form (unless
exempted) and where applicable, the cost of Tender Document has
not been enclosed for the correct amount and in an acceptable form
(unless exempted), the Envelope 2 of PACKET A (TECHNICAL BID)
and PACKET B will be returned to the Tenderer concerned unopened
at the time of opening of the Tender itself. The Envelopes 2 of
PACKET A (TECHNICAL BID) of other Tenderers who have furnished
Earnest Money of correct amount in acceptable form (unless
exempted) and where applicable the cost of Tender Document for the
correct amount and in an acceptable form (unless exempted) will then
be opened. The Tenderers name, the presence of Earnest Money
and Authority to sign and such other details as the Employer may
consider appropriate will be announced by the Employer at the time of
opening of Packet A. PACKET B (FINANCIAL BID) of the Tenderers
whose Technical Bids have been accepted for evaluation will be
checked to see if the seals are intact. All such PACKETS B will be put
in an envelope and sealed. The Employers official opening the
Tender will sign on this envelope and will also take the signatures of
preferably atleast two Tenderers or their representatives present. This
envelope will be kept in safe custody by the Employer.
(b) The Employer will scrutinise the Technical Bids accepted for evaluation to
determine whether each Tenderer

(i) has submitted Àuthority to sign as per para 11.2 above and
Integrity Pact (where applicable) duly signed and witnessed as per
para 11.7 above;
(ii) meets the Qualification Criteria stipulated in Para 2.0; and
(iii) conforms to all terms, conditions and specifications of the Tender
Document without any modifications or conditions.
(c) If required, the Employer may ask any such Tenderer for clarifications on
his Technical Bid. The request for clarification and the response from the
Tenderer will be in writing. If a Tenderer does not submit the
clarification/document requested, by the date and time set in the
Employers request for clarification, the bid of such Tenderer is likely to be
rejected. Tenderers whose Technical Bids are not found acceptable will
be advised of the same and their Earnest Money and PACKET B
(FINANCIAL BID) will be returned unopened. Tenderers whose Technical
Bids are found acceptable will be advised accordingly and will also be
intimated in writing of the time and date and place where and when the
PACKET B (Financial Bid) will be opened.
(d) At the appointed place, time and date, in the presence of the Tenderers or
their representatives who choose to be present, the Employer will open
the envelopes containing the PACKET B (FINANCIAL BID). The
Tenderers name, the tender amount quoted and such other details as the
Employer may consider appropriate will be announced by the Employer.
12.3 Single Packet System: Deleted
13.0 INSPECTION OF SITE BY THE TENDERERS
Tenderers are advised to inspect and examine the site and its
surroundings and satisfy themselves before submitting their Tenders, as
to the nature of the ground and sub-soil (as far as is practicable), the form
and nature of the site, the means of access to the site, the
accommodation they may require and in general shall themselves obtain
all necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other
circumstances which may influence or affect their Tender. A Tenderer
shall be deemed to have full knowledge of the site whether he inspects it
or not and no extra charges consequent on any misunderstanding or
otherwise shall be allowed. The Tenderer shall be responsible for
arranging and maintaining at his own cost all materials, tools & plants,
water, electricity, access, facilities for workers and all other services
required for executing the work unless otherwise specifically provided for
in the contract documents. Submission of a tender by a Tenderer implies
that he has read this notice and all other contract documents and has
made himself aware of the scope and specifications of the work to be
done and of conditions and rates at which stores, tools and plant etc. will
be issued to him by the Employer and local conditions and other factors
having a bearing on the execution of the work.
14.0 EMPLOYERS RIGHT ON ACCEPTANCE OF ANY TENDER
(i) If required, the Employer may ask any Tenderer the breakdown of unit
rates. If the Tenderer does not submit the clarification by the date and
time set in the Employers request for clarification, such Tender is
likely to be rejected.
(ii) The competent authority on behalf of the Employer does not bind
himself to accept the lowest or any other Tender and reserves to
himself the authority to reject any or all the Tenders received without
the assignment of any reason. All Tenders in which any of the
prescribed conditions is not fulfilled or any condition is put forth by the
Tenderer shall be summarily rejected.
15.0 CANVASSING PROHIBITED

Canvassing whether directly or indirectly, in connection with tenders is
strictly prohibited and the tenders submitted by the Contractors who
resort to canvassing will be liable to rejection.
16.0 EMPLOYERs RIGHT TO ACCEPT WHOLE OR PART OF THE

TENDER
The competent authority on behalf of the Employer reserves to himself
the right of accepting the whole or any part of the tender and the
Tenderer shall be bound to perform the same at the rates quoted.
17.0 MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND DIRECTIONS
17.1 The Tenderer shall not be permitted to tender for works if his near relative
is posted as Associated Finance Officer between the grades of AGM(F)
and J.M (F) in the concerned
SBU Unit of RITES or as an officer in any capacity between the grades of

GGM/GM and Engineer (both inclusive) of the concerned SBU of the
Employer. He shall also intimate the names of persons who are working
with him in any capacity or are subsequently employed by him and who
are near relatives to any Gazetted officer in the organization of the
Employer. Any breach of this condition by the Tenderer would render his
Tender to be rejected.

No Engineer of Gazetted rank or other Gazetted Officer employed in

Engineering or Administrative duties in an Engineering Department of the
Organisation of the Employer is allowed to work as a contractor for a
period of one year after his retirement from the Employers service without
the previous permission of the Employer in writing. The contract is liable
to be cancelled if either the Contractor or any of his employees is found
any time to be such a person who had not obtained the permission of the
Employer as aforesaid before submission of the tender or engagement in
the Contractors service.
17.2 If required by the Employer, the Tenderers shall sign a declaration under
the officials Secret Act 1923, for maintaining secrecy of the tender
documents drawings or other records connected with the work given to
them. The unsuccessful Tenderers shall return all the drawings given to
them.
17.3 Use of correcting fluid anywhere in tender document is not permitted.
Such tender is liable for rejection.
17.4 a) In the case of Item Rate Tenders, only rates quoted shall be
considered. Any tender containing percentage below/above the rates
quoted is liable to be rejected. Rates quoted by the Tenderer in item rate
tender in figures and words shall be accurately filled in so that there is no
discrepancy in the rates written in figures and words. However, if a
discrepancy is found, the rates which correspond with the amount worked
out by the Tenderer shall unless otherwise proved be taken as correct. If
the amount of an item is not worked out by the Tenderer or it does not
correspond with the rates written either in figures or in words then the
rates quoted by the Tenderer in words shall be taken as correct. Where
the rates quoted by the Tenderer in figures and in words tally but the
amount is not worked out correctly, the rates quoted by the Tenderer will,
unless otherwise provided, be taken as correct and not the amount. In
the event that no rate has been quoted for any item(s), leaving space both
in figure (s) or word(s) and the amount blank, it will be presumed that the
Tenderer has included the cost of this/ these item (s) in other items and
rate for such item (s) will be considered as zero and work will be required
to be executed accordingly.
b) In case of percentage Rate Tender only percentage quoted shall be
considered. Any tender containing item rates is liable to be rejected.
Percentage quoted by the Tenderer in percentage rate tender shall be
accurately filled in figures and words so that there is no discrepancy. If,
for any Schedule in Financial Bid, the total amount has been indicated by
the Tenderer and if discrepancy is noticed in the percentages quoted in
words and figures, then the percentage which corresponds with the total
amount, shall, unless otherwise proved be taken as correct. If the total
amount is not worked out or if worked out, it does not correspond with the
percentages written either in figures or in words, then the percentage
quoted by Tenderer in words shall be taken as correct. When the
percentages quoted by the Tenderer in figures and in words tally but the
total amount is not worked out correctly, the percentage quoted by the
Tenderes shall be taken as correct, unless proved otherwise and the total
amount worked out accordingly.
17.5 In the case of any Item rate tender where unit rate of any item/items
appears unrealistic, such tender will be considered as unbalanced and in
case the Tenderer is unable to provide satisfactory explanation, such a
tender is liable to be disqualified and rejected.
17.6 (a) In Item rate Tender, all rates shall be quoted on the tender form. The
amount for each item should be worked out and requisite totals given.
Special care should be taken to write the rates in figures as well as in
words and the amount in figures only, in such a way that interpolation is
not possible. The total amount in each Schedule should be written both in
figures and in words. In case of figures, the word Rs. should be written
before the figure of rupees and word P after the decimal figures, e.g. Rs.
2.15 P and in case of words, the word, Rupees should precede and the
word Paise should be written at the end. Unless the rate is in whole
rupees and followed by the word only it should invariably be up to two
decimal places. While quoting the rate in schedule of quantities, the word
only should be written closely following the amount and it should not be
written in the next line.
(b) In Percentage Rate Tender, the Tenderer shall quote percentage

below / above (in figures as well as in words) at which he will be willing to
execute the work. He shall also work out the total amount of his offer and
the same should be written in figures as well as in words in such a way
that no interpolation is possible. In case of figures, the word Rs should
be written before the figure rupees and word P after the decimal figures
(eg.) Rs. 2.15 P and in case of words the word Rupees should precede
and the word Paisa should be written at the end.
17.6A Labour laws :- The manpower / labour engaged on the works shall be
from Indian OR Nepalese citizens only
The recruitment of labour, administrative staff, technical staff and other

personnel for the project shall be confined to nationals of either country
(India OR Nepal). However, skilled, unskilled or semiskilled labour shall,
to the extent availability, be confined to the nationals of Nepal. The
executing agency shall issue identity cards to such employees and also
arrange for their security during the execution of the project.
17.7 Sales-tax/VAT (except Service Tax), purchase tax, turnover tax or any
other tax/ Cess on material, labour and Works in respect of this Contract
shall be payable by the Contractor and the Employer will not entertain any
claim whatsoever in respect of the same. However, in respect of Service
Tax, same shall be paid by the Contractor to the concerned department
on demand and it will be reimbursed to him by the Engineer-in-Charge
after satisfying that it has been actually and genuinely paid by the
Contractor.
17.7A Exemption of Taxes by Government of Nepal :-

a) Exemption from payment of all custom duties, taxes including VAT &
cesses on any material or equipment imported from India by the
executing agency. The required formats to be filled in this regard as
per rules and regulation of Government of Nepal are placed at Annex
C.
b) Refund of VAT and related taxes in respect of any material or
equipment purchased or procured in Nepal for the project. The
executing agency shall submit the necessary requests with VAT bills
to the Inland Revenue Office of Govt. of Nepal for reimbursement and
Inland Revenue Office of Govt. of Nepal will reimburse the paid VAT
within the prescribed time, in accordance with the VAT act and
regulations of Govt. of Nepal.
c) Double tax avoidance agreement signed between the two countries on

18 January, 1987 shall be applicable in the case of income tax for any
Indian national or Indian firm employed by Govt. of India as a
consultant or contractor in connection with the project.
d) Emphasis should be given that material for the project is manufactured

in India OR Nepal. Nevertheless, special kind of material and
equipment shall be imported from other countries, if required.
17.8 Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid either as an individual or as a
Proprietor in a Proprietary firm or as a Partner in a Partnership firm or as
a Director of a limited Company/Corporation or as a Partner in a Joint
Venture. Any Bidder who has submitted a Bid for a work, shall not be a
witness for any other Bidder for the same work. Failure to observe the
above stipulations would render all such Tenders submitted as a Bidder
and / or as a witness, liable to summary rejection.
17.9 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters arising out of the
Performance of the Contract and shall, at his own expense, comply with
all laws/ acts/ enactments/ orders/ regulations/ obligations whatsoever of
the Government of India & Governmet of Nepal, State Government, Local
Body and any Statutory Authority.
18.0 SIGNING OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT
18.1 The Tenderer whose tender has been accepted will be notified of the
award by the Employer by issue of a `Letter of Acceptance prior to
expiration of the Bid Validity period, in the form at Annexure VI.
The Letter of Acceptance will be sent to the Contractor in two copies one
of which he should return promptly, duly signed and stamped. The Letter
of Acceptance will be a binding Contract between the Employer and the
Contractor till the formal Contract Agreement is executed.
18.2 Within the period as specified in Clause 1 of `Clause of Contract, of the

date of issue of Letter of Acceptance, the successful Tenderer shall
deliver to the Employer, Performance Guarantee and Additional
Performance Guarantee (where applicable) in the format prescribed.
18.3 The Tenderer whose Tender is accepted shall be required to submit at his
cost stamp papers of appropriate value as per the provisions of Indian
Stamp Act within 15 days of the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance.
18.4 At the same time the Employer notifies the successful Tenderer that his
Tender has been accepted, the Employer will direct him to attend the
Employers office within 28 days of issue of Letter of Acceptance for
signing the Agreement in the proforma at Annexure VII. The Agreement
will however be signed only after the Contractor furnishes Performance
Guarantee and Additional Performance Guarantee (where applicable)
and hence, where justified, the period of 28 days stipulated above will be
extended suitably.

ANNEXURE I
QUALIFYING CRITERIA FOR WORKS CONTRACTS
1. Annual Financial Turnover
The bidder should have achieved a minimum annual financial turnover of

` 50 crore in any one of the last 3 Financial Years.
Notes :
- The financial turnover will be taken as given under the head Income in
audited Profit and Loss Account and excluding non-recurring income,
income from other sources and stock. It is clarified that the Financial
Turnover means relevant revenue as recorded in the Income side of Profit
and Loss Account. It does not mean Profit.
- Closing stocks in whatsoever manner should not form part of turnover.
- Weightage of 7 % (compounded annually) shall be given for equating the
financial turnover of the previous years to the current year.
- For considering the Financial Years, for example for a work for which the
Tender is being opened in Financial Year 2014-15, the last three Financial
Years will be 2013-14, 2012-13 and 2011-12. For a Tender opened on
(say) 05.09.2014 (F.Y. 2014-15), with weightage of 7% compounded
annually, the weightages to be applied on the Turnover of the previous
three Financial Years will be : F.Y. 2013-14 = 1.070; F.Y. 2012-13 =
1.145 and F.Y. 2011-12 = 1.225.
- The Bidder should furnish Annual Financial Turnover for each of the last 3
Financial Years in tabular form and give reference of the document (with
page no.) relied upon in support of meeting the Qualification Criterion.
- The Bidder should submit self attested copy of Auditors Report along with
Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement along with Schedules for
the relevant Financial Year in which the minimum criterion is met.
Provisional audit reports or certified statements will not be accepted.
- If the Audited Balance Sheet for the immediately preceding year is not
available in case of tender opened before 30th Sept., audited Balance
Sheets, Profit and Loss Statements and other financial statements of the
three Financial Years immediately preceding the previous Financial Year
may be adopted for evaluating the credentials of the Bidder.
- In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply:

Large Works
For each Partner, the highest Annual Turnover in any of the three
Financial Years will be considered and the weighted figure for the current
Financial Year will be worked out as described in Para 1 (Note 3). This
should not be less than the figure arrived at by multiplying the minimum

Annual Turnover stipulated for the Bidder in Qualification Criterion

multiplied by the percentage of Financial participation by that partner in
the JV. Each partner should satisfy this requirement and thus
automatically JV will satisfy the criterion of minimum Annual Turnover.
2. WORK EXPERIENCE
a) Similar Works Experience
(i) For works in normal areas (other than difficult areas)

The Bidder should have satisfactorily completed in his own
name or proportionate share as a member of a Joint
Venture, at least one similar work of minimum value of
` 83.46 crore OR at least two similar works each of
minimum value of ` 52.16 crore OR at least three similar
works each of minimum value of ` 41.73 crore during the
last 5 (five) years prior to the last stipulated date for
submission of the Bid. Works completed prior to the cut off
date (04/03/2010) shall not be considered.
Similar Works
Similar Works shall mean the work of the following carried out in India :
i) Pavement works of National Highway / State Highway projects /
Airports / Ports etc.
ii) Construction of Check Posts / Inland Container Depots / Buildings /
Warehouses / Industrial complexes / Institutional buildings projects.
Client certificates for experience should show the nature of work

done, the Value of work, date of start, date of completion as per
agreement, actual date of completion and satisfactory completion of
work.
Notes :
- A weightage of 7% (compounded annually from the date of completion of
the work to the submission of the Bid) shall be given for equating the
value of works of the previous years to the current year.
- Only such works shall be considered where physical completion of entire
work is over or commissioning of work has been done, whichever is
earlier.
- The Bidder should submit the details of such similar completed works as
per the format at Proforma-1 enclosed.
- Works carried out by another Contractor on behalf of the Bidder on a back
to back basis will not be considered for satisfaction of the Qualification
Criterion by the Bidder.
- Credential certificates issued by Government Organizations / Semi-
Government Organizations of Central or State Government; or of Public
Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies of Central / State Government;

or of Public Ltd. Companies listed in stock exchange in India or abroad,

shall only be accepted for assessing the eligibility of a Tenderer.
- The cut off date shall be calculated backwards from the last stipulated
date for submission / opening of Tender i.e. for a Tender which is being
opened on 06.08.2014, the cut off date shall be 07.08.09.
- In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply:
Large Works
All the partners shall jointly meet this criterion.
b) Construction Experience in key activities/specified components

To qualify for award of the contract, each Bidder in his own name or as a
member of a Joint Venture should have, in the last five Years prior to the
last stipulated date for submission of the Bid, executed the following key
activities:
i) Pavement works of National Highway / State Highway projects /
Airports / Ports etc. ( Similar work of minimum value of ` 20 crores)
ii) Buildings / Warehouses etc. (Similar work minimum value of` ` 20
crores)
Works completed prior to the cut off date (04/03/2010) shall not be
considered.
Notes :
- The work satisfying the criterion for a particular key activity may be
different from a work satisfying the criterion for another key activity.
- The Bidder should furnish with his Bid a tabular statement giving
contract-wise quantities of key activities / specialised components
executed in the last 5 years which meet the Qualification Criterion
along with documentary proof in support thereof (indicating page
nos.).
- Even if a work has not been completed but if the specified quantity
of the key activity has been completed, the same shall be taken
into consideration for the purpose of this criterion.
- Any work executed by the Bidder as a member of a Joint Venture
will be accepted provided there is documentary proof in support of
the same either in the MOU/ Agreement of the JV or in a
declaration by the other Members of that JV or the Client
confirming that the specialized work was actually executed by the
Bidder.
j) In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply:
Large Works
All the partners shall jointly meet this criterion.
3. SOLVENCY CERTIFICATE

(i) A Solvency Certificate of minimum solvency of ` 41.73 crore

(suggested format at Proforma 2) from a Scheduled Bank issued not
earlier than 6 months from the last date for submission of tender is
required to be submitted by the bidder.
Notes :
k) The certificate so produced by the Bidder may be got verified from
the issuing Bank.
l) Incase JV is pemitted the following provision will apply:
Large works
For each partner, the figure in the solvency certificate isuued as
above in favour of that partner should not be less than the
minimum solvency figure stipulated for the Bidder in the
qualification criterian multiplied by percentage of financial
participation by that partner in the JV.
(iii) The bidder should furnish a declaration that he has not failed to
service the principal amount or interest or both of a loan account /
credit limit from any Bank or Finacial Institution during a period of one
year prior to the deadline for submission of bids.
Notes:
-In case a bidder has defaulted in servcing his loan / credit limit during
the past one year, he shall be disqualified.
-The declaration may be included in the Declaration to be submitted in

Performa 3 to This Annexure.
-In case JV is permitted the following provisions will apply:
Large works
Each partner shall sign the declaration.
4. PROFITABILITY
The bidder should be a Profit (Net) making firm and should have made
profit during any two of the past 3 Financial Years immediately preceeding
the deadline for submission of bids. If the audited balance sheet for the
immediately preceding year is not available in case of tenders opened
before 30th September, Audited balance sheets of the three financial
years immediately preceeding the previous FY shall be considered.
The Bidder should furnish figures of net profit of last 3 years in a tabular
form and submit attested copies of Auditors Reports along with audited
Balance Sheets and Profit and Loss Statements for the last three
Financial Years. Specific reference with page no. of document which
proves satisfaction of this Qualifying Criterion should be indicated in the
tabular statement.
Notes :
- In case JV is permitted, the following provisions will apply:
Large Works
All the partners shall meet individually this criterion.
5. NET WORTH
The bidder should have positive Net Worth of at least 15% of the
estimated cost.
Notes:
Net Worth shall be computed from the bidders audited balance sheet of
the last financial year ending on a date not prior to 18 months from the
due date of submission of the tender ( or, if the due date is extended,
such extended date of submission).
- In case JV is permitted, the following provisions will apply:
Large works
All the parteners shall jointly meet this criterion.
6. POINTS TO NOTE ON SATISFACTION OF QUALIFYING CRITERIA IN

CASE OF BOTH LARGE AND NORMAL WORKS
a) Sub-Contractors Experiences and Resources
Sub-Contractors Experiences and Resources will not be taken into

account in determining the Bidders compliance with the qualifying
criteria.
a. Experiences and Resources of the Parent Company and other
subsidiary companies
If the Bidder is a wholly owned subsidiary of a company, the

experience and resources of the owner/parent company or its other
subsidiaries will not be taken into account. However, if the Bidder
is a Company, the Experience and Resources of its subsidiaries
will be taken into consideration.
7. DISQUALIFICATION ON CERTAIN GROUNDS
Even though the Bidders may meet the above qualifying criteria, they are
subject to be disqualified if they have
a) Made misleading or false representation in the forms, statements
and attachments in proof of the qualification requirements. In such
a case, besides Tenderers liability to action under para 9.4 of
Instructions to Tenderers, the Tenderer is liable to face the penalty
of banning of business dealings with him by RITES.
b) Records of any contract awarded to them, having been determined

during the past three years prior to the deadline for submission of
bids.
c) Their business banned or suspended by any Central/State
Government Department/ Public Undertaking or Enterprise of
Central/State Government and such ban is in force.
d) Not submitted all the supporting documents or not furnished the
relevant details as per the prescribed format.
A declaration to the above effect in the form of affidavit on stamp paper of

Rs. 10/- duly attested by Notary/Magistrate should be submitted as per
format given in Proforma 3 enclosed.

Proforma-1
LIST OF SIMILAR WORKS SATISFYING QUALIFICATION CRITERION

COMPLETED DURING THE LAST 5 YEARS
completion
page no.) in support of

Ref. of document (with
Contract
Scope of work carried
Agreement / Letter of
meeting Qualification
Date of
Date of
Reasons for delay in

Name of the Work &
Award No. and date
Value
Client's Name and
start
out by the Bidder
completion
Location
Criterion
Address
S. No.
if any
Agreement
completion
Actual on
Awarded
As per
Actual
LOA/
SEAL AND SIGNATURE OF THE BIDDER
Note :
1. In support of having completed above works, attach self attested copies of

the completion certificate from the owner/client or Executing Agency /
Consultant appointed by owner / Client indicating the name of work, the
description of work done by the Bidder, date of start, date of completion
(contractual & actual) and contract value as awarded and as executed by
the Bidder . Contract Value shall mean gross value of the completed
work including cost of materials supplied by the owner/client but excluding
those supplied free of cost.
2. Such Credential certificates issued by Government Organizations / Semi-
Government Organizations of Central or State Government; or of Public
Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies of Central / State Government;
or of Public Ltd. Companies listed in stock exchange in India or abroad,
shall only be accepted for assessing the eligibility of a Tenderer.

In case of a Certificate from a Public Limited Co., the Bidder should also
submit documentary proof that the Public Ltd. Co., was listed on BSE or
NSE when the work was executed for it.
3. Information must be furnished for works carried out by the Bidder in his
own name or proportionate share as member of a Joint Venture. In the
latter case details of contract value including extent of financial
participation by partners in that work should be furnished.
4. If a Bidder has got a work executed through a Subcontractor on a back to

back basis, the Bidder cannot include such a work for his satisfying the
Qualification Criterion even if the Client has issued a Completion
Certificate in favour of that Bidder.
5. Use a separate sheet for each partner in case of a Joint Venture.
6. Only similar works completed during the last 5 years prior to the last
stipulated date for submission of Bid, which meet the Qualification
Criterion need be included in this list.

Proforma 2
SOLVENCY CERTIFICATE FROM A NATIONALISED

OR A SCHEDULED BANK IN FAVOUR OF Ministry of External Affairs, New
Delhi.
This is to certify that to the best of our knowledge and information, M/s
____________________, having their registered office at _____________, a
customer of our Bank, is a reputed company with a good financial standing and
can be treated as solvent to the extent of Rs. ___________. This certificate is
issued without any guarantee or risk and responsibility on the Bank or any of its
officers.
Signature with date

Senior Bank Manager (Name of Officer issuing
the Certificate)
Name, address & Seal of the Bank/
Branch
Note:
Bankers Certificate should be on letter head of the Bank.

Proforma 3
DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER
(Affidavit on Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of Rs.10/- duly attested by Notary /

Magistrate)
This is to certify that We, M/s. __________________________, in submission of

this offer confirm that:-
i) We have not made any misleading or false representation in the forms,

statements and attachments in proof of the qualification requirements;
ii) During the past three years prior to the deadline for submission of bids ,
no contract awarded to us has been determined.
iii) No Central / State Government Department / Public Sector Undertaking

or Enterprise of Central / State Government has banned/suspended
business dealings with us as on date.
iv) We have submitted all the supporting documents and furnished the
relevant details as per prescribed format.
v) List of Similar Works satisfying Qualification Criterion indicated in

Proforma 1 does not include any work which has been carried out by us
through a Subcontractor on a back to back basis.
vi) The information and documents submitted with the Tender and those to
be submitted subsequently by way of clarifications / making good deficient
documents are correct and we are fully responsible for the correctness of
the information and documents submitted by us.
vii) We have not failed to service the principal amount or interest or both of a
loan account / credit limit from any bank or Finacial Insitution during a
period of one year prior to the deadline for submission of bids.
viii) We understand that in case any statement/information/document

furnished by us or to be furnished by us in connection with this offer, is
found to be incorrect or false, our EMD in full will be forfeited and
business dealings will be banned.
SEAL, SIGNATURE & NAME OF THE BIDDER
signing this document

ANNEXURE I A
CHECK LIST OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
1. a) BY BIDDERS OTHER THAN JOINT VENTURES

i) Annual Financial Turnover
- Annual financial turnover for each of the last 3 Financial
Years in tabular form.
- Self attested copies of Auditors Report along with the
Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement for the
relevant Financial Year in which the minimum criterion is
met (Refer Notes under Para 1 of Annexure I).
ii) Work Experience
- Similar Work Experience : Proforma 1 of Annexure I with
details of 1, 2 or 3 works as the case may be, which satisfy
requisite qualification criterion with self attested copies of
supporting document (Refer Para 2a of Annexure I).
- Construction Experience in Key Activities/Specialised
Components: Tabular Statement giving contract-wise
quantities executed in last 5 years along with documentary
proof in support of having met the criterion (Refer Para 2b of
Annexure I).
iii) Solvency Certificate.
Suggested format at Proforma 2 of Annexure I (Refer Para 3 of
Annexure I)
iv) Profitability
- Net profit of last 5 Financial Years in tabular form.
m) Self attested copies of Auditors Report along with the
Balance Sheets and Profit and Loss Statements for last 3
Financial Years. (Refer Para 4 of Annexure I).
v) Declaration by Bidder
Proforma 3 (Refer Para 6 of Annexure I)
vi) Integrity Pact: duly signed and witnessed in the format at
Annexure VIII (Refer para 11.7 of NIT & Instructions to Tenderers)
b) BY JOINT VENTURE PARTNERS FOR LARGE WORKS

(1) By Partner-in-Charge/Lead Member
i) JV MOU/Agreement (Refer Para 2.4 of NIT & Instructions to
Tenderers)
ii) Power of Attorney (Refer Para 2.4 of NIT & Instructions to
Tenderers)
iii) Annual Turnover : As in a(i) above
iv) Work Experience
- Similar Work Experience : As in (a) (ii) above
- Construction Experience in Key activities/ specialised
components: As in (a) (ii) above.
v) Solvency Certificate: As in (a) (iii) above.
vi) Profitability: As in (a) (iv) above.

vii) Declaration by Bidder: As in (a) (v) above.
viii)Integrity Pact:: duly signed and witnessed, as in (a) (vi) above.
(2) By Partners other than Partner-in-Charge/Lead Member

i) Annual Turnover: As in (a) (i) above)
ii) Work Experience
- Similar Work Experience : As in (a) (ii) above
- Construction Experience in Key activities/specialised
iii) Solvency Certificate: As in (a) (iii) above .
iv) Profitability: As in (a) (iv) above.
v) Declaration by Bidder: As in (a) (v) above.
vi) Integrity Pact: duly signed and witnessed, as in (a) (vi) above
c) BY JOINT VENTURE PARTNERS FOR NORMAL WORKS

(1) By Partner-in-Charge/Lead Member
i) JV MOU/Agreement (Refer Para 2.4 of NIT & Instructions to
Tenderers)
ii) Power of Attorney (Refer Para 2.4 of NIT & Instructions to
Tenderers)
iii) Annual Turnover: As in a(i) above to meet 100 % of
requirement as per criterion
iv) Work Experience
- Similar Work Experience : As in (a) (ii) above to meet
100% of requirement as per criterion
- Construction Experience in Key activities/specialised
v) Solvency Certificate : As per (a) (iii) above To the extent of
100% financial participation
vi) Profitability : As in (a) (iv) above.
vii) Declaration by Bidder: As in (a) (v) above.
viii) Integrity Pact : duly signed and witnessed, as in (a) (vi) above.
(2) By Partners other than Partner-in-Charge/Lead Member

i) Work Experience : Construction experience in Key Activities/
Specialised Components : As in (a) (ii) above.
ii) Declaration by Bidder : As in (a) (v) above.
iii) Integrity Pact:: duly signed and witnessed, as in (a) (vi) above

ANNEXURE II A
QUALIFICATION INFORMATION/CHECKLIST OF DOCUMENTS

--LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL BY OTHER THAN JOINT VENTURES
(on letter head of the Applicant)
From To
___________________________ MEA / RITES Ltd.____________
(AUTHORITY INVITING TENDER)
Sir,
Sub: Submission of Qualification information /documents as per Checklist.
1. I/We hereby submit the following documents in support of my/our

satisfying the Qualification Criteria laid down for the work:-
a) Self attested copy of a certificate, confirming that the applicant is a

working contractor or has executed any work within the last five years
reckoned from the date of opening of Tender, issued by Government
Government; or of Public Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies of
Central / State Government; or of Public Ltd. Companies listed in stock
exchange in India or abroad.
b) Annual Financial Turnover

(i) Annual financial turnover for each of the last 3 Financial Years in a
tabular form.
(ii) Self attested copy of Auditors Report along with the Balance
Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement and Schedules for the
relevant Financial Year in which the minimum criterion is met, with
calculations in support of the same.
c) Work Experience
i) Similar Work Experience :- In Proforma 1 with details of 1 /
2 / 3 works as applicable and self attested copies of
supporting documents as mentioned therein.
ii) Construction experience in key activities / specialised
components:
Tabular Statement giving contract wise quantities executed
in last 5 years with documentary proof.
d) Solvency Certificate - Proforma 2.
e) Profitability - Net profit of last 3 financial years in tabular form with
self attested copies of Profit and Loss Statements for the last 3
Financial Years.
2. In addition the following supporting documents are also enclosed.

a) Self attested copy of Partnership Deed/Memorandum and Articles
of Association of the Firm.

b) Self attested copies of PAN/TAN issued by the Income Tax

Department.
c) Declaration Proforma 3
d) Self attested copy of Sales Tax, Works Contract Tax, Service Tax
Registration Certificate (as applicable).
e) Self attested copy of Registration under Labour Laws, like PF, ESI
etc.
f) Self attested copy of ISO 9000 Certificate ( if any)
g) Integrity Pact : duly signed and witnessed.
3. I authorize you to approach any Bank, Individual, Employer, Firm or

Corporation, whether mentioned in the enclosed documents or not, to
verify our competence and general reputation.
4. I also enclose written Power of Attorney of the signatory of the Tender on

behalf of the Tenderer.
Yours faithfully,
Encl: As in Paras 1, 2 & 4
Signature of Applicant
with Name Date and Seal

ANNEXURE II B (L)
QUALIFICATION INFORMATION /CHECKLIST OF DOCUMENTS

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL BY JOINT VENTURE
(FOR LARGE WORKS COSTING OVER Rs. 100 CRORES)

(To be signed by the Lead Member on his Letter Head)
From To
___________________________ MEA/RITES
Ltd.________________
Sir,
Subject: Submission of Qualification Information/ documents as per

Checklist.
1. As the Lead Member of the Joint Venture, I/We hereby submit the
following documents in support of our JV:
a) Self certified copy of the Joint Venture Agreement/Memorandum of

Understanding.
b) Power of Attorney in my/our favour as the Lead Member executed
by the authorized representatives of all the members.
c) Self attested copy of Sales Tax, Works Contract Tax, Service
Registration Certificate (as applicable).
d) Self attested copy of Registration under Labour Laws, like PF, ESI
etc.
e) Self attested copy of ISO 9000 Certificate (if any)
f) Integrity Pact Duly signed and witnessed.
2) I/We also enclose the following documents pertaining to each of the

Partners including Lead Partner duly signed by the Authorized
representative of each Partner/Member of J.V.
i) Qualification Criteria
a) Self attested copy of a certificate, confirming that the applicant is a

working contractor or has executed any work within the last five years
reckoned from the date of opening of Tender, issued by Government
Government; or of Public Sector Undertakings / Autonomous Bodies
of Central / State Government; or of Public Ltd. Companies listed in
stock exchange in India or abroad..
b) Annual Turnover
- Annual financial turnover for each of the last 3 Financial Years in

tabular form.
- Self attested copy of Auditors Report along with the Balance Sheet
and Profit and Loss Statement and Schedules for the relevant
Financial Year in which the minimum criterion is met, with
calculations in support of the same.
c) Work Experience
- Similar Works Experience :- In Proforma 1 with details of 1 / 2 / 3

works as applicable and self attested copies of supporting
documents as mentioned therein.
- Construction experience in key activities / specialised
components:-
Tabular Statement giving contract wise quantities executed in last
5 years with documentary proof.
d) Solvency Certificate - Proforma 2.
e) Profitability - Net profit of last 3 Financial Years in tabular form with

self attested copies of Profit and Loss Statements for the last 3
Financial Years as applicable.
(ii) Other Supporting Documents
a) Self attested copy of Partnership Deed/Memorandum and Articles

of Association of the Firm.
b) Self attested copy of PAN/TAN issued by Income Tax Department.
e) Declaration Proforma 3
3) I/We authorize you to approach any Bank, Individual, Employer, Firm or

Corporation, whether mentioned in the enclosed documents or not, to
verify the competence and general reputation of each Member of our JV.
4) I also enclose written Power of Attorney of the signatory of the Tender on

behalf of the Tenderer.
Encl: As in Paras 1, 2 & 4

Yours faithfully,
Signature of Applicant
with Name Date and Seal

ANNEXURE II B (N)- Deleted

ANNEXURE III
DRAFT MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING

EXECUTED BY MEMBERS OF THE CONSORTIUM / JOINT VENTURE
(On each firms Letter Head)
From To
___________________________
MEA / RITES Ltd._____
Dear Sir,
Re: RITES Tender Notice No.________________ dated _______ for_____

(Name of Work)
We wish to conform that our company / firm (delete as appropriate) has formed a
Consortium with _____ (insert names of all other members of the group and their
percentage participation) for purposes associated with your Tender
No.__________
(Members who are not the Lead Member of the Consortium should add the
following paragraph) *
* The Consortium is led by _________ (insert name of the Lead Member) whom
we hereby authorize to act as leader on our behalf for the purposes of
submission of Bid for ____ (name of work) and to incur liabilities and receive
instructions for and on behalf of any and all the partners of the Joint
Venture/Members of the Consortium. For this purpose we have executed a
Power of Attorney in favour of ______ (name of the Lead Member)
(Member who is the Lead Member of the Consortium should add the following
paragraph)**
** In this Consortium we act as Lead Member and for the purposes of

bidding for the work, represent the Consortium.
Till the award of work, the Lead Partner shall furnish Bid bond and all other
bonds/guarantees to the Employer on behalf of the Joint Venture, which shall be
legally binding on all the partners of the Joint Venture.
In the event of our Consortium being awarded the contract we agree to be jointly
with ________ (insert names of all other members of the Consortium) and
severally liable to MEA/RITES, its successors and assigns for all obligations,
liabilities, duties and responsibilities arising from or imposed by the contract
subsequently entered into between MEA/RITES and our Consortium.

The precise responsibility of the Lead Member and other Members of the
Consortium in respect of planning, design, construction equipment, key
personnel, work execution and financing of the Work including Percentage of
financial participation by each Member will be as indicated in the Annexure.
These shall not be varied/ modified subsequently without your prior approval.
We further agree that entire execution of the contract shall be carried out
exclusively through the Lead Member.
In case our Bid is successful, the Joint Venture Agreement incorporating the
above provisions will be executed within 15 days of receipt of Letter of
Acceptance from you and shall be registered at the place where the Agreement
will be signed, so as to be legally valid and binding on all Members of the
Consortium.
We agree that the Joint Venture Agreement shall be valid during the entire
currency of the Contract including the period of extension if any, and the
maintenance period after the work is completed.
We further confirm that we shall open a Bank Account in the name of JV and all
payments due to the JV shall be made by you by crediting to that Account. To
facilitate statutory deductions such as towards Income Tax and VAT made from
the amounts due to us against our bills, being credited to the concerned
Government departments, we shall obtain PAN/TIN number etc. as required and
advise you the details before claming our first on-account bill.
We affirm that the Integrity Pact with the Employer in the format at Annexure VIII
(if applicable) shall be signed by the Lead Member duly witnessed, on behalf of
the Joint Venture/Consortium. All Members including the Lead Member shall
comply with the provision in the Integrity Pact and any violation of the Integrity
Pact by any Member shall be construed as violation by the Joint
Venture/Consortium.
Encl: Annexure.
Yours faithfully,
Signature ____________
(Name of Signatory)___________
(Capacity of signatory)_________
Seal
Witness 1 Witness 2
Name Name
Address Address
Occupation Occupation
Note :
1. To be executed by each Member of the Consortium individually.
ANNEXURE IV
FORMAT FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY TO AUTHORISED SIGNATORY
POWER OF ATTORNEY
(To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of the appropriate value in

accordance with relevant Stamp Act. The stamp paper to be in the name of the
firm/ company who is issuing the Power of Attorney).
We, M/s.______ (name of the firm/company with address of the registered

office) hereby constitute, appoint and authorise Mr./Ms.______ (Name and
residential address) who is presently employed with us and holding the position
of ______ and whose signature is given below as our Attorney to do in our name
and our behalf all or any of the acts, deeds or things necessary or incidental to
our bid for the work _____ (name of work), including signing and submission of
application / proposal, participating in the meetings, responding to queries,
submission of information / documents and generally to represent us in all the
dealings with MEA / RITES or any other Government Agency or any person, in
connection with the works until culmination of the process of bidding, till the
Contract Agreement is entered into with MEA / RITES and thereafter till the
expiry of the Contract Agreement.
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by our said
Attorney pursuant to this Power of Attorney and that all acts, deeds and things
done by our aforesaid Attorney shall always be deemed to have been done by
us.
(Add in the case of a Consortium/Joint Venture)

Our firm is a Member/Lead Member of the Consortium of ___________,
_________ and ___________.
Dated this the _____ day of ______ 20
(Signature and name of authorized signatory being given Power of Attorney)

___________
(Signature and name in block letters of *All the partners of the firm, * Authorized
Signatory for the Company)
(* Strike out whichever is not applicable)
Seal of firm/ Company
Witness 1: Witness 2:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Occupation: Occupation:

Notes:
- In case the Firm / Company is a Member of a Consortium/ JV, the
authorized signatory has to be the one employed by the Lead Member.
- The mode of execution of the Power of Attorney should be in accordance

with the procedure, if any, laid down by the applicable law and the charter
documents of the executant(s) and when it is so required the same should
be under common seal affixed in accordance with the required procedure.

ANNEXURE V
FORMAT FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY TO LEAD MEMBER OF

CONSORTIUM / JOINT VENTURE
(To be executed on non-judicial stamp paper of the appropriate value in

accordance with relevant Stamp Act. The stamp paper to be in the name of the
company who is issuing the Power of Attorney)
Whereas ______ RITES Ltd. on behalf of JOINT SECRETARY (DPA III),

MINISTRY OF EXTERNAL AFFAIRS, Government of India (Employer), has
invited bids for _______ (Name of work) for and on behalf of ________ as an
Agent /Power of Attorney Holder.
Whereas, the Members of the Consortium comprising of M/s.________,

M/s.______, M/s.______ and M/s._______ (the respective names and
addresses of the registered offices to be given) are interested in bidding for the
work and implementing the same in accordance with the terms and conditions
contained in the bid documents.
Whereas, it is necessary for the members of the Consortium to designate one of

them as the Lead Member with all necessary power and authority to do, for and
on behalf of the Consortium, all acts, deeds and things as may be necessary in
connection with the Consortiums bid for the work.
NOW THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY WITNESSETH THAT
We, M/s._________ , M/s ________ and M/s_________ hereby designate M/s.

______ being one of the members of the Consortium, as the Lead Member of
the Consortium, to do on behalf of the Consortium, all or any of the acts, deeds
or things necessary or incidental to the Consortiums bid for the work, including
submission of application proposal, participating in meetings, responding to
queries, submission of information/documents and generally to represent the
Consortium in all its dealings with MEA / RITES or any other Government
Agency or any person, in connection with the work until culmination of the
process of bidding till the contract agreement is entered into with MEA / RITES
and thereafter till the expiry of the contract agreement.
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by our said
Attorney pursuant to this Power of Attorney and that all acts, deeds and things
done by our aforesaid Attorney shall and shall always be deemed to have been
done by us/Consortium.
Dated this the ________ day of _______ 20_______________

(Signature and Name in Block letters of *All the Partners of the firm / *
Authorised Signatory for the Company)
____________
(* Strike out whichever is not applicable)
Seal of firm / Company
Witness 1 Witness 2
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Occupation: Occupation:
Notes:
- To be executed by all the members individually, in case of a Consortium.
- The mode of execution of the Power of Attorney should be in accordance

with the procedure, if any laid down by the applicable law and the charter
documents of the executant(s) and when it is so required the same should
be under common seal affixed in accordance with the required procedure.

ANNEXURE VI
(FORM OF LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE)

(By REGD POST / ACK.DUE)
(On the letter head of JS (DPA-III), MEA )
NO. : Dated :
To
(Name & Address of the Contractor)
Dear Sirs,
Sub: TENDER No. FOR THE WORK OF
Ref: Your Tender dated _________________ and letters dated
_____________and this office letter Nos. ___________ dated___________ in
reply to the same.
This is to notify you that your Tender for the work under reference has been
accepted by the Competent Authority of JOINT SECRETARY (DPA III),
MINISTRY OF EXTERNAL AFFAIRS, Government of India (Employer), for a
total Contract Price of Rs. _______ (Rupees _____________only)
Pursuant to Clause 1 of the Contract, you are required to furnish irrevocable

Performance Guarantee for an amount equivalent to 5% (Five percent) of the
Contract Price and an Additional Performance Guarantee for an amount of Rs. --
---------- (if applicable). The Guarantee Bonds aggregating for an amount of
Rs.______________ are required to be submitted within ___ days of issue of
this Letter of Acceptance. Bank Guarantees issued by the following Banks will
not be acceptable _____________________ (Names of Banks _________)
The time of ________months allowed for execution of the work will be reckoned
from the date of start as defined in Schedule F or from the first day of the
handing over of the site, whichever is later, in accordance with phasing, if any,
indicated in tender document.
You are requested to contact _________ (complete designation and address of

the Project Coordinator) for carrying out the contract.
You are also requested to attend this office within Twenty Eight days from the
date of issue of this letter for execution of the formal agreement. It may be noted
that no payment shall be made for any work carried out by you till the Agreement

is executed and till such time the Performance Guarantee and Additional
Performance Guarantee (where applicable) has/have been submitted by you.
This Letter of Acceptance is being sent to you in duplicate and you are
requested to return without delay one copy of the letter duly signed and
stamped, as a token of your acknowledgement.
Kindly note that this Letter of Acceptance thereof shall constitute a binding
Contract between us pending execution of formal Agreement.
Your letters as well as this office letters referred to above shall form part of the
Contract.
Yours faithfully,
Government of India
Copy to :
1. RITES Ltd.

ANNEXURE VII
FORM OF AGREEMENT
(ON NON JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)
Agreement No. ________ dated _________
THIS AGREEMENT is made on ________ day of ______ Two thousand

________ between Ministry of External Affairs, DPA-III, Delhi hereinafter called
the Employer (which expression shall, wherever the context so demands or
requires, include their successors in office and assigns) on one part and
M/s.______ hereinafter called the Contractor (which expression shall wherever
the context so demands or requires, include his/ their successors and assigns) of
the other part.
WHEREAS the Employer is desirous that certain works should be executed

viz.___________ (brief description of the work) and has by Letter of Acceptance
dated ____ accepted a tender submitted by the Contractor for the execution,
completion, remedying of any defects therein and maintenance of such works at
a total Contract Price of `. ______ (Rupees ______________ only)
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows:-
1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meaning
as are respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract
hereinafter referred to.
2. The following documents in conjunction with addenda/ corrigenda to

Tender Documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed
as part of this agreement viz.
The Letter of Acceptance dated______.

Priced Schedule (Bill) of Quantities
Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Tenderers.
RITES Tender and Contract Form
Special Conditions
Schedules A to F.
Technical Specifications
Drawings
Amendments to Tender Documents (List enclosed)
General Conditions of Contract (read with Correction Slip Nos. 1 to 6)
comprising of
(i) Conditions of Contract
(ii) Clauses of Contract
(iii) RITES Safety Code
(iv) RITES - Model Rules for the protection of Health and
Sanitary arrangements for Workers
(v) RITES Contractor's Labour Regulations.
3. In consideration of the payment to be made by the Employer to the

Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants
with the Employer to execute, complete, remedy defects therein and
maintain the works in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the
Contract.
4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay to the Contractor in consideration

of the execution, completion, remedying of any defects therein and
maintenance of the works, the contract price or such other sum as may
become payable under the provisions of the contract at the time and in
the manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused their respective common
seals to be hereinto affixed (or have herewith set their respective hands and
seals) the day and year first above written.
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED BY
____________________________ ______________________________
In the capacity of _____ Representing Joint Secretary (DPA-III),
Ministry of External Affairs, DPA-III,
Delhi.
On behalf of M/s. _________ (The Employer)
(The Contractor) In the presence of
In the presence of Witnesses (Signature, Name &

Designation)
Witnesses (Signature, Name &
Designation) 1.
1.
2.
2.

ANNEXURE VIII
INTEGRITY PACT
Between
RITES LTD. acting for and on behalf of and as an Agent / Power of Attorney
Holder of Ministry of External Affairs, Government of India hereinafter
called the Employer and ____________________ hereinafter referred to
as "The Bidder / Contractor"
Preamble
The Employer intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures,

contract/s for Development of Integrated Check Post at Biratnagar, Nepal
along Indo-Nepal International Border. The Employer values full compliance
with all relevant laws and regulations, and economic use of resources, and of
fairness and transparency in his relations with the Bidder/s and/or contractor/s.
In order to achieve these goals, the Employer will appoint an Independent

External Monitor (IEM) who will monitor the Tender process and execution of the
contract for compliance with the principles mentioned above.
Section 1 Commitments of the Employer
(1) The Employer commits himself to take all measures necessary to prevent
corruption and to observe the following principles:-
1. No employee of the Employer, personally or through family
members, will in connection with the tender or for the execution of
the contract, demand, take a promise for or accept, for self or third
person, any material or immaterial benefit which the person is not
legally entitled to.
2. The Employer will, during the tender process, treat all Bidders with
equity and reason. The Employer will in particular, before and
during the tender process, provide to all Bidders the same
information and will not provide to any Bidder
confidential/additional information through which the Bidder could
obtain an advantage in relation to the tender process or the
contract execution.
3. The Employer will exclude from the process all known prejudiced
persons.
(2) If the Employer obtains information on the conduct of any of his

employees which is a criminal offence under the IPC (Indian Penal Code)
/PC (Prevention of Corruption) Act, or if there be a substantive suspicion
in this regard, the Employer will inform its Chief Vigilance Officer and in
addition can initiate disciplinary action.
Section 2 Commitments of the Bidder/Contractor
(1) The Bidder/Contractor commits himself to take all measures necessary to

prevent corruption. He commits himself to observe the following
principles during his participation in the tender process and during the
contract execution.
1. The Bidder/Contractor will not directly or through any other person
or firm, offer, promise or give to any of the Employers employees
involved in the tender process or the execution of the contract or to
any third person any material or other benefit which he is not
legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of
any kind whatsoever during the tender process or during the
execution of the contract.
2. The Bidder/Contractor will not enter with other Bidders into any
undisclosed agreement or understanding, whether formal or
informal. This applies in particular to prices, specifications,
certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission
of bids or any other actions, to restrict competitiveness or to
introduce cartelization in the bidding process.
3. The Bidder/Contractor will not commit any offence under the
relevant IPC/PC Act; further the Bidder/ Contractor will not use
improperly, for purposes of competition or personal gain, or pass
on to others, any information or document provided by the
Employer as part of the business relationship, regarding plans,
technical proposals and business details, including information
contained or transmitted electronically.
4. The Bidder/Contractor will, when presenting his bid, disclose any
and all payments he has made, is committed to or intends to make
to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries in connection with
the award of the contract.
(2) The Bidder/ Contractor will not instigate third persons to commit offences
outlined above or be an accessory to such offences.
Section 3-Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from

future contracts
If the Bidder/Contractor, before award or during execution has committed

a transgression through a violation of Section 2 above, or in any other
form such as to put his reliability or credibility in question, the Employer is
entitled to disqualify the Bidder/Contractor from the tender process or take
action as per the procedure mentioned in the "Guideline on banning of
business dealing" annexed and marked as Annexure "A".
Section 4- Compensation for Damages
(1) If the Employer has disqualified in terms of the provisions in Section 3, the
Bidder/Contractor from the tender process prior to the award of contract,
the Employer is entitled to demand and recover the damages equivalent
to Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security.
(2) If the Employer has terminated the contract during execution in terms of
the provisions under Section 3, the Employer shall be entitled to demand
and recover from the Contractor the damages equivalent to Earnest
Money Deposit, Security Deposits already recovered and Performance
Guarantee, which shall be absolutely at the disposal of the Employer.
Section -5 Previous transgressions
(1) The Bidder/ Contractor declares that no previous transgression occurred in

the last 3 years with any other Company in any country conforming to the
Anti-Corruption approach or with any other Public Sector Enterprise in
India that could justify his exclusion from the tender process.
(2) If the Bidder/Contractor makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can

be disqualified from the tender process or action can be taken as per the
procedure mentioned in "Guideline on banning of business dealing".
Section -6 Equal treatment of all Bidders/Contractors/Sub-Contractors
(1) The Bidder/Contractor undertakes to demand from all partners/sub-

contractors (if permitted under the conditions/ clauses of the contract) a
commitment to act in conformity with this Integrity Pact and to submit it to
the Employer before signing the contract.
(2) The Bidder/ Contractor confirms that any violation by any of his
partners/sub-contractors to act in conformity with the provisions of this
Integrity Pact can be construed as a violation by the Bidder/Contractor
himself, leading to possible Termination of Contract in terms of Section 4.
(3) The Employer will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do
not sign this Pact or violate its provisions.
Section 7- Criminal charges against violating Bidders/Contractors/Sub-

Contractors
If the Employer obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or

Partners/Sub-Contractor, or of an employee or a representative or an associate
of a Bidder, Contractor or Sub-Contractor, which constitutes corruption, or if the
Employer has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Employer will inform the
same to its Chief Vigilance Officer.
Section -8 Independent External Monitor/Monitors
(1) The Employer shall appoint competent and credible Independent External
Monitor for this Pact. The task of the Monitor is to review independently
and objectively, whether and to what extent the parties comply with the
obligations under this agreement.

(2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the

parties and will perform his functions neutrally and independently. He will
report to the MD/RITES Ltd.
(3) The Bidder/Contractor accepts that the Monitor has the right of access
without restriction to all Project documentation of the Employer including
that provided by the Contractor. The Contractor will also grant the
Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid interest,
unrestricted and unconditional access to his project documentation. The
same is applicable to Partners/Sub-Contractors. The Monitor is under
contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the
Bidder/Contractor/Partners/Sub-Contractor with confidentiality.
(4) The Employer will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all
meetings among the parties related to the Project provided such meetings
could have an impact on the contractual relations between the Employer
and the Contractor. The parties offer to the Monitor the option to
participate in such meetings.
(5) As soon as the Monitor notices or has reason to believe that violation of
the agreement by the Employer or the Bidder/ Contractor, has taken
place, he will request the Party concerned to discontinue or take
corrective action , or to take any other relevant action. The Monitor can in
this regard submit non-binding recommendations. Beyond this, the
Monitor has no right to demand from the parties that they act in a specific
manner or refrain from action or tolerate action.
(6) The Monitor will submit a written report to the MD/RITES Ltd. within 8-10
weeks from the date of reference or intimation to him by the Employer and
should the occasion arise, submit proposal for correcting problematic
situations.
(7) If the Monitor has reported to the MD/RITES Ltd. of a substantiated

suspicion of an offence under relevant IPC/PC Act, and the MD/RITES
Ltd. has not, within reasonable time, taken visible action to proceed
against such offender or reported it to the Chief Vigilance Officer, the
Monitor may also transmit this information directly to the Central Vigilance
Commissioner.
(8) The word Monitor would include both singular and plural.
Section 9 Pact Duration
This pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the
Contractor when his Security Deposit is released on completion of the
Maintenance Period and for all other Tenderers six months after the Contract
has been awarded.

If any claim is made/lodged during this time the same shall be binding and
continue to be valid despite the lapse of this pact specified above, unless it is
discharged/determined by MD/RITES Ltd.
Section 10 Other Provisions
(1) This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and

jurisdiction shall be as stated in the Contract Agreement.
(2) Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be

made in writing.
(3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be

signed by the Partner in charge/ Lead Member nominated as being
incharge and who holds the Power of Attorney signed by legally
authorised signatories of all the partners/Members. The Memorandum of
Understanding /Joint Venture Agreement will incorporate a provision to
the effect that all Members of the Consortium will comply with the
provisions in the Integrity Pact to be signed by the Lead Member on
behalf of the Consortium. Any violation of Section 2 above by any of the
Partners/Members will be construed as a violation by the consortium
leading to possible Termination of Contract in terms of Section 3
(4) Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid,
the remainder of this agreement remains valid. In this case, the parties
will strive to come to an agreement to their original intentions.
RITES Ltd.
Agent / Power of Attorney Holder
_________________________ _________________________
(For & on behalf of the Employer) (For the Bidder/Contractor)
(Office Seal) (Office Seal)
Place:XXXXXXXXXX
Date:XXXXXXXXX.
Witness 1:
(Name & Address) -----------------------------
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
Witness 2
(Name & Address) -----------------------------
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
-----------------------------
ANNEXURE - IX
Mandate Form
To,
Ministry of External Affairs / RITES Ltd.
Dear Sir,
Authorization for payments through Electronic Fund Transfer System (RTGS/NEFT)
We hereby authorize Ministry of External Affairs / RITES Ltd. to make all our payments,
including refund of Earnest Money, through Electronic Fund Transfer System
(RTGS/NEFT). The details for facilitating the payments are given below :
(TO BE FILLED IN CAPITAL LETTERS)
1 NAME OF THE BENEFICIARY
2 ADDRESS WITH PIN CODE
3 (A) TELEPHONE NO. WITH STD CODE
(B) MOBILE NO.
4 BANK PARTICULARS
A BANK NAME
B BANK TELEPHONE NO. WITH STD CODE
C BRANCH ADDRESS WITH PIN CODE
D BANK FAX NO. WITH STD CODE
E 11 CHARACTER IFSC CODE OF THE BANK
(EITHER ENCLOSE A CANCELLED
CHEQUE OR OBTAIN BANK CERTIFICATE
AS APPENDED)
F BANK ACCOUNT NUMBER AS
APPEARING ON THE CHEQUE BOOK
G BANK ACCOUNT TYPE (TICK ONE) SAVING CURRENT
LOAN CASH
CREDIT OTHERS
H IF OTHERS, SPECIFY
5 PERMANENT ACCOUNT NUMBER (PAN)
6 E-MAIL ADDRESS
I/We hereby declare that the particulars given above are correct and complete. If the
transaction is delayed or credit is not effected at all for reasons of incomplete or
incorrect information, I/We would not hold Ministry of External Affairs / RITES Ltd.
responsible. Bank charges for such transfer will be borne by us.
Date---------- SIGNATURE
(AUTHORISED SIGNATORY)
Name ------------------------------
BANK CERTIFICATION
It is certified that the above mentioned beneficiary holds bank account No.------------------
-------with our branch and the Bank particulars mentioned above are correct.
Date------------ SIGNATURE
(AUTHORISED SIGNATORY)
Name ------------------------------
OFFICIAL STAMP --- -- ------------
ANNEX-A

Guidelines on Banning of Business Dealings
1. Introduction
1.1 RITES, being a Public Sector Enterprise and State, within the meaning of
Article 12 of Constitution of India, has to ensure preservation of rights
enshrined in Chapter III of the Constitution. RITES has also to safeguard
its commercial interests. It is not in the interest of RITES to deal with
Agencies who commit deception, fraud or other misconduct in the
execution of contracts awarded / orders issued to them. In order to ensure
compliance with the constitutional mandate, it is incumbent on RITES to
observe principles of natural justice before banning the business dealings
with any Agency.
1.2 Since banning of business dealings involves civil consequences for an

Agency concerned, it is incumbent that adequate opportunity of hearing is
provided and the explanation, if tendered, is considered before passing
any order in this regard keeping in view the facts and circumstances of
the case.
2. Scope
2.1 The procedure of (i) Suspension and (ii) Banning of Business Dealing with
Agencies, has been laid down in these guidelines.
2.2 It is clarified that these guidelines do not deal with the decision of the
Management not to entertain any particular Agency due to its poor /
inadequate performance or for any other reason.
2.3 The banning shall be with prospective effect, i.e., future business
dealings.
3. Definitions
In these Guidelines, unless the context otherwise requires:
i) `Bidder / Contractor / Supplier' in the context of these guidelines is

indicated as Agency.
ii) Competent Authority and Appellate Authority shall mean the

following:
a) The Director shall be the Competent Authority for the

purpose of these guidelines. MD, RITES shall be the
Appellate Authority in respect of such cases.
b) MD, RITES shall have overall power to take suo-moto action

on any information available or received by him and pass
such order(s) as he may think appropriate, including
modifying the order(s) passed by any authority under these

guidelines.
iii) Investigating Department shall mean any Department, Division or

Unit investigating into the conduct of the Agency and shall include
the Vigilance Department, Central Bureau of Investigation, the
State Police or any other department set up by the Central or State
Government having powers to investigate.
4. Initiation of Banning / Suspension:
Action for banning / suspension business dealings with any Agency

should be initiated by the department/ unit having business dealings with
them after noticing the irregularities or misconduct on their part.
5. Suspension of Business Dealings
5.1 If the conduct of any Agency dealing with RITES is under investigation by
any department, the Competent Authority may consider whether the
allegations under investigation are of a serious nature and whether
pending investigation, it would be advisable to continue business dealing
with the Agency. If the Competent Authority, after consideration of the
matter including the recommendation of the Investigating
Department/Unit, if any, decides that it would not be in the interest to
continue business dealings pending investigation, it may suspend
business dealings with the Agency. The order to this effect may indicate a
brief of the charges under investigation. The order of such suspension
would operate for a period not more than six months and may be
communicated to the Agency as also to the Investigating Department.
The Investigating Department/Unit may ensure that their investigation is

completed and whole process of final order is over within such period.
5.2 As far as possible, the existing contract(s) with the Agency may be
continued unless the Competent Authority, having regard to the
circumstances of the case, decides otherwise.
5.3 If the Agency concerned asks for detailed reasons of suspension, the
Agency may be informed that its conduct is under investigation. It is not
necessary to enter into correspondence or argument with the Agency at
this stage.
5.4 It is not necessary to give any show-cause notice or personal hearing to

the Agency before issuing the order of suspension. However, if
investigations are not complete in six months time, the Competent
Authority may extend the period of suspension by another three months,
during which period the investigations must be completed.
6. Grounds on which Banning of Business Dealings can be initiated

6.1 If the security consideration, including questions of loyalty of the Agency

to the State, so warrants;
6.2 If the Director / Owner of the Agency, proprietor or partner of the firm, is
convicted by a Court of Law for offences involving moral turpitude in
relation to its business dealings with the Government or any other public
sector enterprises or RITES, during the last five years;
6.3 If there is strong justification for believing that the Directors, Proprietors,
Partners, owner of the Agency have been guilty of malpractices such as
bribery, corruption, fraud, substitution of tenders, interpolations, etc;
6.4 If the Agency employs a public servant dismissed / removed or employs a

person convicted for an offence involving corruption or abetment of such
offence;
6.5 If business dealings with the Agency have been banned by the Govt. or
any other public sector enterprise;
6.6 If the Agency has resorted to Corrupt, fraudulent practices including

misrepresentation of facts;
6.7 If the Agency uses intimidation / threatening or brings undue outside

pressure on the Company (RITES) or its official in acceptance /
performances of the job under the contract;
6.8 If the Agency indulges in repeated and / or deliberate use of delay tactics
in complying with contractual stipulations;
6.9 Based on the findings of the investigation report of CBI / Police against
the Agency for malafide / unlawful acts or improper conduct on his part in
matters relating to the Company (RITES) or even otherwise;
6.10 Established litigant nature of the Agency to derive undue benefit;
6.11 Continued poor performance of the Agency in several contracts;
(Note: The examples given above are only illustrative and not exhaustive.
The Competent Authority may decide to ban business dealing for any
good and sufficient reason).
7. Banning of Business Dealings
7.1 A decision to ban business dealings with any Agency shall apply
throughout the Company.
7.2 If the Competent Authority is prima-facie of view that action for banning
business dealings with the Agency is called for, a show-cause notice may
be issued to the Agency as per paragraph 8.1 and an enquiry held
accordingly.
8. Show-cause Notice
8.1 In case where the Competent Authority decides that action against an
Agency is called for, a show-cause notice has to be issued to the Agency.
Statement containing the imputation of misconduct or misbehaviour may
be appended to the show-cause notice and the Agency should be asked
to submit within 30 days a written statement in its defence. If no reply is
received, the decision may be taken ex-parte.
8.2 If the Agency requests for inspection of any relevant document in

possession of RITES, necessary facility for inspection of documents may
be provided.
8.3 After considering the reply of the Agency and other circumstances and
facts of the case, a final decision for Company-wide banning shall be
taken by the Competent Authority. The Competent Authority may consider
and pass an appropriate speaking order:
a) For exonerating the Agency if the charges are not established;

b) For banning the business dealing with the Agency.
8.4 The decision should be communicated to the Agency concerned along with
a reasoned order. If it decided to ban business dealings, the period for
which the ban would be operative may be mentioned.
9. Appeal against the Decision of the Competent Authority
9.1 The Agency may file an appeal against the order of the Competent
Authority banning business dealing, etc. The appeal shall lie to Appellate
Authority. Such an appeal shall be preferred within one month from the
date of receipt of the order banning business dealing, etc.
9.2 Appellate Authority would consider the appeal and pass appropriate order
which shall be communicated to the Agency as well as the Competent
Authority.
10. Review of the Decision by the Competent Authority
Any petition / application filed by the Agency concerning the review of the
banning order passed originally by Competent Authority under the existing
guidelines either before or after filing of appeal before the Appellate

Authority or after disposal of appeal by the Appellate Authority, the review
petition can be decided by the Competent Authority upon disclosure of
new facts /circumstances or subsequent development necessitating such
review.
11. Circulation of the names of Agencies with whom Business Dealings

have been banned.
11.1 Depending upon the gravity of misconduct established, the Competent

Authority of RITES may circulate the names of Agency with whom
business dealings have been banned, to the Ministry of Railways and
PSUs of Railways, for such action as they deem appropriate.
11.2 If Ministry of Railways or a Public Sector Undertaking of Railways request

for more information about the Agency with whom business dealings have
been banned a copy of the report of Inquiring Authority together with a
copy of the order of the Competent Authority/ Appellate Authority may be
supplied.
12. Restoration
12.1 The validity of the banning order shall be for a specific time & on expiry of
the same, the banning order shall be considered as "withdrawn".
12.2 In case any agency applies for restoration of business prior to the expiry
of the ban order, depending upon merits of each case, the Competent
Authority which had passed the original banning orders may consider
revocation of order of suspension of business/lifting the ban on business
dealings at an appropriate time. Copies of the restoration orders shall be
sent to all those offices where copies of Ban Orders had been sent.

ANNEX-B
Required format of pre receipt as per requirements of MEA for

refund of EMD
TO BE PROVIDED BY MEA

ANNEX-C
Required formats to be filled as per rules and regulation of

Government of Nepal for custom free imports etc.
TO BE PROVIDED BY GoN

POWER OF ATORNEY
Power of Attorney to be issued by

MEA to RITES LTD.
for acting for and on behalf of and as an Agent
/ Power of Attorney Holder of
Ministry of External Affairs, Government of India

SECTION-2
TENDER AND CONTRACT FORM

SECTION 2
TENDER AND CONTRACT FORM FOR WORKS
To,
Joint Secretary (DPA-III),

Ministry of External Affairs, Delhi
Sub : TENDER FOR THE WORK OF Development of

Integrated Check Post at Biratnagar, Nepal along Indo-Nepal
International Border
(TENDER No. RITES/AP/ICP/BIRATNAGAR/TENDER/2015/01
ISSUED BY Group General Manager, Airports Division, RITES
Limited, Plot No. - 144, Sector 44, Gurgaon 122 003 Haryana)
TENDER
1. I/We have read and examined the Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions
to Tenderers, Special Conditions, Schedules A to F, Technical
Specifications, Drawings, Schedule / Bill of Quantities and General
Conditions of Contract as well as other documents and rules referred to
in GCC and all the details contained in the Tender Document for the work.
2. I/We hereby tender for the execution and completion of the work and
remedy any defects therein, specified in the Schedule of Quantities within
the time specified in Schedule F, and in accordance in all respects with
the specifications, designs, drawings and instructions in writing referred to
in Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Tenderers and in Clause 11
of the Clauses of Contract and with such materials as are provided for, by,
and in respects in accordance with, such conditions so far as applicable.
3. We agree that our tender shall remain valid for a period of 90 days from
the due date for submission of bid or extended date as stipulated and not
to make any modifications in its terms and conditions.
4. A sum of ` 100,00,000/- (Rupees One Hundered Lacs only) is hereby

forwarded in the form of Bankers cheque/Pay Order /Demand Draft
issued in favour of Pay & Accounts Officer, Ministry of External Affairs
payable at New Delhi as the Earnest Money. Mandate Form authorizing
Ministry of External Affairs / RITES Ltd. to make all payments through
RTGS/NEFT as per Annexure IX duly filled in is enclosed.
5. If I/We withdraw my/our tender during the period of tender validity or

before issue of Letter of Acceptance which ever is earlier or make
modifications in the Terms and Conditions of the Tender which are not
acceptable to the Employer, then the Employer shall, without prejudice to

any other right or remedy, be at liberty to forfeit entire Earnest Money

absolutely.
6. If I/We fail to furnish the prescribed Performance Guarantee and
Additional Performance Guarantee (if applicable) within prescribed period,
I/We agree that the said Employer shall, without prejudice to any other
right or remedy, be at liberty to forfeit the said Earnest Money absolutely.
7. If, I/We fail to commence the work within the specified period, I/We agree
that the Employer shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy
available in law, be at liberty to forfeit the Earnest Money and
Performance Guarantee and Additional Performance Guarantee (if
applicable) absolutely.
8. Further, I/We hereby agree that in case of forfeiture of Earnest Money or

both Earnest Money & Performance Guarantee and Additional
Performance Guarantee (if applicable) as aforesaid in paras 5 to 7, I/We
shall be debarred from participation in re-tendering process of the work.
9. On issue of Letter of Acceptance by the Employer, I/We agree that the

said Earnest Money shall be retained by the Employer towards Security
Deposit, to execute all the works referred to in the Tender document upon
the Terms and Conditions contained or referred to therein and to carry out
such deviations as may be ordered, upto maximum of the percentage
mentioned in Schedule F at rates as stipulated in relevant Clauses of
contract and those in excess of that limit at the rates to be determined in
accordance with the provisions contained in Clauses 12.2 and 12.3 of the
tender form.
10. I/We hereby agree that I/ We shall sign the Formal Agreement with the
Employer within 28 days from the date of issue of Letter of Acceptance.
In case of any delay, I/We agree that we shall not submit any Bill for
Payment till the Contract Agreement is signed.
11. I/We hereby declare that I/We shall treat the tender documents, drawings
and other records connected with the work as secret/confidential
documents and shall not communicate information derived there from to
any person other than a person to whom I/We am/are authorized to
communicate the same or use the information in any manner prejudicial to
the safety of the Employer/State.
12. I/We hereby declare that I/We have not laid down any condition/deviation
to any content of Technical Bid and/or Financial Bid. I/We agree that in
case any condition is found to be quoted by us in the Technical and/or
Financial Bid, my/our Tender may be rejected.
13. I/We understand that the Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or
any tender he may receive. I/We also understand that the Employer
reserves the right to accept the whole or any part of the tender and I/We
shall be bound to perform the same at the rates quoted.
14. Until a formal agreement is prepared and executed, this bid together with
our written acceptance thereof shall constitute a binding contract between
us and MEA / RITES.
15. I am/We are signing this Tender offer in my / our capacity as one/those
authorized to sign on behalf of my/our company/as one holding the Power
of Attorney issued in my favour as Lead Member by the Members of the
Joint Venture.
Signature of Authorized Person/s

Date
Name/s & Title of Signatory
Name of Tenderer
Postal Address
Seal
Witness
Signature
Name
Postal Address
Occupation


SECTION-3
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 3
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL:
The following Special Conditions shall be read in conjunction with Conditions of Contract
and amendments/corrections thereto. If there are any provisions in these Special
Conditions which are at variance with the provisions in the above mentioned documents,
the Provisions in these Special Conditions shall take precedence.
(i) Special Conditions relating to existing Clauses of Contract :
GENERAL : In section 7 to 11 of the tender document (PART-3), wherever RITES or

RITES Ltd. Is written it shall also be deemed to include Ministry of External Affairs for all
context and matters related to this work.
1.0 Payment on intermediate Certificates to be regarded as Advances

(Clause No. 7 of GCC)
The second para under heading Payment on intermediate Certificates to be regarded
as Advances starting from 75% of bill amount may be paid to in case delay in
payment is replaced with the following :
Payment on account of amount admissible of IPC / Running Account Bill(s) shall
be made by the client (MEA) after approval of competent authority (Division /
IFD) within 45 working days (excluding the day of submission) of presentation of
the bill by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge or his Engineer together with
the account of the material issued by the Employer, or dismantled materials, if
any duly certified by M/s RITES. The time limit of 45 days mentioned above will
be adhered to by the Engineer-in-Charge as far as possible and the contractor
will not be entitled to any compensation or claims or damages by way of interest
etc. in case of delay in payment.
Last para of clause 7 of GCC Since the contract ------- made available by the
Employer is deleted.
2.0 PAYMENT OF CONTRACTORS BILLS

Payment of Contractors Bill to Banks
(Clause No. 9A of GCC)
2.1 All payment towards Running Account Bills and Final Bill to the Contractor will be
made only through RTGS/NEFT to the Bank account nominated by the
contractor for this purpose. All required information and documents shall be
provided by the Contractor in this regard. Necessary bank charges towards the
same shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.0 MATERIALS
Materials to be provided by the Contractor
(Clause No. 10A of GCC)
3.1 Materials Generally
3.1.1 The materials and manufactured goods shall be the best of their respective kinds
and as described in the specifications, drawings and Bill of Quantities. The
Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge within a
reasonable time after receipt of the order to commence the Works, a list of the
names and addresses of the manufacturers, the trademarks and types of all
materials and articles he proposes to employ together with all specifications and
descriptions and samples that may be required in this connection before any
orders are placed. Within a reasonable time the Engineer-in-Charge shall issue
written decision on the Contractors proposals. If any of the manufacturers,
materials, etc. have been rejected then the Contractor must propose acceptable
alternatives within one week of such rejection. The Engineer-in-Charges
decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all orders for materials.
3.1.3 Where a particular proprietary product, supplier or suppliers catalogue is

referred to in the specifications or in the Bills of quantities and the material
specified is not available, other equal and approved product shall be permitted in
use subject to downward price adjustment if called for. Upward price adjustment
in such cases will not be accepted.
3.1.4 If, during the course of the Contract, certain materials required for use in the
Works should be unobtainable despite the best efforts of the Contractor, then the
Contractor
may offer substitute materials for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. These
substitute materials, although not complying fully with the specifications, must
nevertheless be suitable and appropriate for use in the Works. Acceptance or
refusal of such substitute materials shall be at the sole discretion of the
Engineer-in-Charge. In the event of acceptance of the substitute materials a
suitable price reduction shall be made in respect of decrease in quality or value
but no price addition shall be made in respect of increase in quality or value. In
the event of refusal of the substitute materials, the Contractor shall not be
relieved of any of his obligations under the Contract and shall be solely liable for
any delay or loss occasioned by his failure to provide materials as specified.
3.1.5 Samples
The Contractor shall furnish for approval, with reasonable promptness, samples
of all materials and workmanship. The Engineer shall check and confirm
approval of such samples with reasonable promptness if they conform with the
design concept of the Works and with the requirement given in the contract
documents. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples. The
procedure for submission and approval of samples shall be as follows:
(a) All material samples in duplicate shall be delivered to the Engineers office at
the Contractors cost. Samples shall be properly labeled with
Name of Project
Name of Contractor
Name of Product
Name of Manufacturer
Reference No. of BOQ
Date of Submission
Date of Fabrication/ Casting if applicable
(b) Samples shall be accompanied by technical specification/ manufacturers
catalogue
(c) In case the Contractor intends to keep an approved sample in his possession
he shall submit additional samples for the Engineers approval.
(d) Samples shall be furnished well in advance to give the Engineer reasonable
time for his consideration.
Testing of Materials and Site Laboratories

3.1.6 The Contractor shall procure all the materials well in advance so that there is
sufficient time for testing of the materials and clearance of the same before
incorporation in the work.
3.1.7 All the materials to be used in and on every part of the works shall be subjected
to Mandatory tests from time to time as prescribed in the MoSRT&H/CPWD or
other specifications as stipulated. These Mandatory tests / norms are the
minimum requirement and the Engineer may supplement these with additional
tests / checks according to the site condition. Materials for such extra tests shall
made available by the Contractor free of cost. In the case of Non-Mandatory or
Extra tests, if the test results show that the Material / workmanship is not to the
required standard, the cost of test shall be borne by the Contractor. If the test
result is satisfactory, the cost of test will be borne by the Employer, except that
the cost of sample will always be borne by the Contractor. The samples for tests
shall be in all cases selected by the Engineer and supplied by the Contractor as
part of the Contract. If at any time, any material so tested, fails to meet the
acceptance criteria, the same shall be removed from the site of works and other
materials substituted there for. In the absence of any specified test / acceptance
criteria, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding as to whether the
said material or materials shall be used on the works, or forthwith removed and
other materials substituted.
3.1.8 The Contractor shall produce on demand from the Engineer the manufacturing
certificates certifying that the materials conform to the technical specifications.
3.1.9 The Contractor has to establish at his own cost, a testing laboratory/ field
laboratory with equipments and instruments as given in Annexure H"
enclosed with Special Conditions of Contract in addition to the
equipment mentioned at Annexure B-1 to conduct regular and routine tests
on materials, measurements of temperature and any other tests stipulated in the
technical specifications of the items to be executed in the Contract. On
completion of works, the site laboratory shall be dismantled and site cleared
unless the Employer directs otherwise. The Site laboratory shall be manned by
Technically competent staff to be appointed and paid by the Contractor at his
cost.
3.1.10 The Contractor shall permit the Engineer or his authorized representative to be
present during any or all the tests. Before issuing the notification to the Engineer
in charge that the work has been completed, the Contractor shall make under
the direction and in the presence of Engineer such tests and inspections as have
been specified or as the Engineer shall consider necessary to determine whether
or not in the Works the full intent of requirements of the plans and specifications
has been fulfilled. In case the work does not meet the full intent of the
specifications it shall be rectified by the Contractor at no extra cost and the
Contractor shall bear all the expenses for any further tests considered
necessary.
3.1.11 For any tests as directed by the Engineer that have to be carried out at an
outside laboratory, the cost of such tests, materials, transport etc. shall be borne
by the Contractor/ Employer as stipulated in Para 3.1.7 above.

3.1.12 List of Mandatory Tests to be carried and other details of Mandatory Tests to be
carried out have been stipulated in MoSRT&H (for pavement works) & CPWD
specifications (for buildings, boundary wall and drainage works).
5.0 PRICE VARIATION CLAUSE 10CC INSTRUCTIONS

5.1 Add the sub-clause (d) under para iv) of Clause 10CC
(d) Adjustment for Bitumen Component
Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of bitumen shall be paid
in accordance with the following formula:
Vb = [(W x Xb)/100] ] {(Bi-Bo)/Bo}
Vb = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the month under
consideration due to changes in the rates for bitumen:
Bo = The official retail price of bulk bitumen at the nearest refinery for the
place, as valid on the last stipulated date of receipt of tenders including
extension, if any.
Bi= The official retail price of bulk bitumen at nearest refinery for the place,
for the period under consideration to which a particular Interim
Payment Certificate is related.
Xb = Percentage of bitumen component of the work.
The contractor shall furnish the basic data, initially and periodically during the
course of work about the Bo & Bi also.
6.0 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Work to be executed in accordance with specifications, drawings, orders etc.
(Clause No. 11 of the GCC).
6.1 Issue and custody

6.1.1 The Contractor shall receive from the Engineer-in-charge through the Engineer
two set of drawings approved for construction. These drawings will be generally
same as issued at tender stage. However these drawings may have additional
details from construction / working/ execution point of view and to facilitate ease
of installation, erection or construction. Additional detailing not in anyway vitiate
the Contract nor allow the Contractor to claim extra compensation. Deviation or
alteration to basic drawings only shall be treated as variation. Any additional
copies of Drawings if requested by the Contractor shall be provided on making
extra payment.
6.1.2 The Contract shall be executed in triplicate and the Employer, the Engineer and
the Contractor shall be entitled to one executed copy each for his use. The
Contractor on the signing thereof shall be furnished by the Engineer-in-charge,
copies of Drawings as mentioned in Para 6.1.1 above.
6.1.3 The Contractor shall keep one copy of all Drawings at the works site and the
Employer. Engineer-in-charge/ Engineer shall at all reasonable time have access
to the same. Before the issue of the final certificate to the Contractor, he shall
forthwith return to the Engineer all Drawings and other documents issued.
6.2 Errors and Omissions in Drawings or Specifications

Any apparent errors or omissions in drawings or specifications or instructions
issued by the Engineer in-charge or the Engineer shall be brought to the notice
of the Engineer by the Contractor as soon as the documents have been made
available to him. The Engineer shall correct such errors or omissions with the
approval of the Engineer in-charge. The Contractor shall neither be eligible for
any additional cost, time etc. on this account nor shall he be permitted to take
any advantage thereof.
7.0 Deviations, Substituted Items, Pricing

(Clause No. 12.2 of the GCC)
The first paragraph under the heading Deviation, Substituted Items, Pricing
shall be read as under :
In the case of substituted items, the rate for the agreement item (to be
substituted) and substituted item shall also be determined in the manner
as mentioned in the following para.
8.0 Levies / taxes / cesses payable by the contractor

(Clause No. 37 of the GCC)
Replace the entire caluse wirth the following :
The taxes etc. payble by the contractor in Nepal shall be governed by the
Memorandum of Undurstanding between Government of India & Governemnt of
Nepal and perevailiang rules and regulation in Nepal.
The contractor shall deposit royalty, if any as per the Nepalesse rules & regulations,
and obtain necessary permit for supply of coarse & fine aggregate, coarse & fine
sand, Granular Sub Base material, Earth etc. from concerned Nepalesse authorities.
Contractor may be required to pay local taxes like royalty on mines & minerals, levy
of local taxes, cess, VAT in accordance with prevailing Nepalesse laws which shall
be reimbursed by the govt. of Nepal as per their procedure on submission of proof of
payment in the prescribed formats. The contractor shall make himself aware of the
existing tax structure / rules & regulation prevelant in Nepal.
Tax deduction at source will be done by the employer towards income tax and any
other tax as required by the law, from the running account and final bills.
9.0 Royalty payable on minor minerals employer to be indemnified

(Clause No. 37A of the GCC)
Where ever state government is written in the caluse it shall be read as concerned
authorities of Nepalesse government.
10.0 Condition for reimbursement of leviy/taxes/cess if levied after receipt of

tender
(Clause No. 38 of the GCC)
Add the following at the end of the caluse :

Refund of VAT and related taxes in respect of any material or equipment purchased
or procured in Nepal for the project. The executing agency shall submit the
necessary requests with VAT bills to the Inland Revenue Office of Govt. of Nepal for
reimbursement and Inland Revenue Office of Govt. of Nepal will reimburse the paid
VAT within the prescribed time, in accordance with the VAT act and regulations of
Govt. of Nepal.

11.0 Release fo security deposit after clearance by state government authority

for mineral extraction
(Clause No. 45A of the GCC)
Add the following at the end of the caluse :

Where ever state government department is written in the caluse it shall be read as
concerned authorities / department of nepalesse government.
12.0 Compensation for Delay

(Clause No. 2 of GCC)
12.1 Para 3 is replaced as compensation for delay of work shall be @ 2 % of
Tender value per month of delay to be computed on per day basis.
(i) Additional Special Conditions:
1.0 STORES AND MATERIALS

No storage accommodation will be made by Employer for materials arranged by
contractor. The contractor is required to store the construction materials for use
in the work in locations strictly as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
No excavated earth or building materials shall be stacked on areas where other
buildings, roads, services or compound wall are to be constructed.
Nothing extra shall be payable for any extra lead involved in stacking the
materials at a reasonable distance away from the work place, on account of
operational requirements and runway lights installations etc.
2.0 CONSUMPTION OF CEMENT/BITUMEN/ STEEL

Proper record of daily consumption of bitumen, cement and steel etc., shall be
maintained at the site of work for each item as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge. The contractor shall submit time to time or on demand by the Engineer-
in-charge, purchase vouchers of bitumen, cement, steel, sand ,stone aggregates
or of any other item or material in reference to this project as desired by the
Engineer-in-charge.
The contractor shall submit original / verified photocopy of purchase vouchers of

bitumen, cement or any other material procured by him relating to this project to
the Engineer-in -charge time to time or as demanded by him.
No payment/compensation will be made to the contractor for damage caused by

rains, snow fall, floods, tornadoes, earthquakes, subversion, riots or other natural
calamities during the execution of the works. The damage to work shall be made
good by the contractor at his own cost and no claim on this account shall be
entertained.
3.0 The contractor shall adjust his labour, staff, plant, machinery etc., according
to the requirement of work from time to time and no claim shall be

entertained on account of idle labour, plant, machinery, etc., due to any reason
whatsoever.
4.0 SURVEYING AND MEASURING EQUIPMENTS

Equipment for surveying and Measurements of the work shall be made available
by the contractor for his use at his own cost. The same shall also be made
available to the Engineer-in-charge without any charges for use on this work.
5.0 TESTS
All tools, instruments, plants and labour/operating personnel for the test shall be
provided by the contractor at his own cost. For any tests as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge, that have to be carried out at an outside laboratory, the cost
of such tests, materials, transport etc., shall be borne by the contractor.
In case there is any discrepancy in frequency of testing as given in list of

mandatory tests and that in individual sub-heads of work as per MoST&H
specifications / CPWD specifications Vol. I-II (2009), the higher of the two
frequencies of testing shall be followed, and nothing extra shall be payable to
the contractor on this account.
6.0 Law governing the Contract

a) The Contract shall be governed by the law for the time being in force in
the Republic of India.
b) Court Jurisdiction
The Courts in the City of New Delhi alone shall have the jurisdiction to
entertain any application or other proceedings in respect of anything
arising under this Agreement and any award or awards made by the
Arbitrator hereunder shall be filed in the concerned Courts in the
aforesaid City only.
7.0 SITE FOR PLANTS EQUIPMENT STACKING OF MATERIALS AND LABOUR

a) Contractor will have to install his hot mix plant for production of
bituminous mix and Batch mix plant for production of cement concrete, at
site approved by Engineer-in-Charge in case the land is provided by the
Employer.
b) The contractor shall stack materials at the site of work strictly as per
instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
The contractor shall be responsible for routine maintenance of T&P and any
damage and delay due to breakdown shall be responsible of the contractor.
Nothing extra shall be payable for any extra lead involved in stacking the
materials at a reasonable distance away from the work place on account of
operational requirements and runway lights installations etc.
8.0 PROVISIONAL SUMS

Each Provisional Sum shall only be used, in whole or in part, in accordance with
the Engineer's instructions, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.
The total sum paid to the Contractor shall include only such amounts, for the
work, supplies or services to which the Provisional Sum relates, as the Engineer-
in-Charge shall have instructed.

For each Provisional Sum, the Engineer- in-Charge may instruct :

(a) for which there shall be included in the Contract Price:
(i) the actual amounts paid (or due to be paid) by the Contractor, and
(ii) a sum for overhead charges and profit, calculated as a percentage
of these actual amounts by applying the relevant percentage rate (if
any) stated in the appropriate Schedule.
The Contractor shall, when required by the Engineer, produce quotations,
invoices, vouchers and accounts or receipts in substantiation.

SECTION-4
SCHEDULES A TO F
SECTION 4
PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES
(Operative Schedules to be supplied separately to each intending Tenderer)
SCHEDULE A
Schedule of quantities (As per Bill of Quantities attached)
(BOQ to be attached with Financial Bid)
SCHEDULE B
Schedule of materials to be issued to the contractor. (Refer Clause 10 of
Clauses of Contract)
S.No Description of Quantity Rates in Figures & words Place of Issue
items at which the material will
be charged to the
contractor
1 2 3 4 5
- Not Applicable -
SCHEDULE C
Tools and plants to be hired to the contractor. (Refer clause 34 of Clauses of
Contract).
S.No Description Hire charges per day Place of Issue
1 2 3 4
- Not Applicable -
SCHEDULE D
Extra schedule for specific requirements/documents for the work, if any.
- Not Applicable -

SCHEDULE E
Schedule of components of Cement, Steel, other materials, POL,
Labour etc .for price escalation. (Refer Clause 10CC of Clauses
of Contract).
CLAUSE 10 CC
Component of Cement (XC)
expressed as percent of total value of work 07 % ( Seven percent)
Component of steel (XS)

expressed as percent of total value of work 06 % ( Six percent)
Component of bitumen (XB)

expressed as percent of total value of work 08 % (Eight percent)
Component of other materials (XM) (except cement, steel & Bitumen)

expressed as per cent of total value of work 63 % (Sixty Three percent)
Component of labour (Y)

expressed as percent of total value of work 14 % (Fourteen percent)
Component of P.O.L (Z)

expressed as percent of total value of work 02% (Two percent)
_____________
Total 100% _
SCHEDULE F
Reference to General Conditions of Contract
Name of Work : Development of Integrated Check
Post at Biratnagar, Nepal along Indo-
Nepal Border
Estimated cost of work : ` 104.33 Crore (Rupees One

hundred Four Crore & Thirty Three
Lakhs Only)
Earnest money : ` 100.00 Lakhs (Rupees One Hundred

Lakhs Only)
Performance Guarantee (Ref. Clause 1) 5% of Tendered value.(In the name

of MEA)
Security Deposit: (Refer clause 1A) 5% of Tendered value
Notice Inviting Tender and Instruction to Tenderers

Officer inviting tender : Group General Manager,
Airports Division, RITES Limited
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Definitions
2 (iv) Employer Ministry of External Affairs,

Government of India
2(v) Engineer-in-Charge Group General Manager,

Airports Division, RITES Limited
2(vii) Accepting Authority Joint Secretary (DPA-III),

Ministry of External Affairs,
Government of India
2(ix) Percentage on cost of materials

and labour to cover all 15%
overheads and profits.
2(x) Standard Schedule of Rates MoSRT&H for pavement works,

CPWD-DSR 2013 for Civil works
& CPWD DSR (E&M) -2013 (Internal &
External) for Electrical works
corrected and amended upto date of
receipt of tender.
2(xiii) Date of commencement of work 15 days (Fifteen Days) from the date
of issue of LOA or the first date of
handing over of site whichever is later
or the date of approval
issued by the Govt. of Nepal for custom free
import of contractors material, equipment and
machinery etc. which ever is later.
9 (a) (ii) General Conditions of Contract RITES General Conditions of Contract

for works JULY 2011 Edition as
modified & corrected upto date of
receipt of tender
CLAUSES OF CONTRACT
Clause 1
1 (i) Time allowed for submission of
P.G. from the date of issue of
Letter of Acceptance 15 days (Fifteen Days)
Maximum allowable extension

beyond the period provided in
(i) above subject to a maximum of 07 days (Seven Days)
Clause 2
Authority for fixing compensation under Joint Secretary (DPA-III)
Clause 2 Ministry of External Affairs

Clause 2A
Whether Clause 2A shall be applicable NO
Clause 5
5.1 (a) Time allowed for execution of work 24 months (Twenty Four
months) from the date of start
Date of start 15 days (Fifteen Days) from the date
of issue of Letter of Acceptance or the first Day
of handing over of site or the date of approval
issued by the Govt. of Nepal for custom free
import of contractors material, equipment and
machinery etc. which ever is later
5.1 (b) TABLE OF MILESTONE(S)
S. Description of Milestone Time allowed in days Amount to be
No (Physical) (from date of start) withheld in case of
non achievement of
milestone
1 1/8th (of the whole work) 1/4th (of the whole work) In the event of not
2 3/8th (of the whole work) 1/2 (of the whole work) achieving the
3 3/4th (of the whole work) 3/4th (of the whole work) necessary progress
4 Full Full as assessed from the
running payments,
1% of the tendered
value of work will be
withheld for failure of
each milestone.
Clause 5 A
Shifting of stipulated date of completion
Competent Authority Accepting Authority as
Specified in Clause 2(vii)
of Conditions of Contract
above
Clause 6 A
Whether Clause 6A applicable NO
Clause 7
Gross work to be done together with net
payment/adjustment of advances for
material collected, if any, since the last such `100 Lakhs
payment for being eligible to interim payment
Clause 10A
i) Whether Material Testing Laboratory is to
be provided at site. YES
ii) If YES list of equipments to be provided Refer Annexure H

(placed in the end of section 5)
Clause 10 B
Whether Clause 10 B (iii) applicable NO
Clause 10 CC
Whether Clause 10CC applicable YES
Clause 11
Specifications to be followed for execution of work For CPWD DSR Items:-
Civil Works
MoSRT&H (Ministry of Shipping
Road Transport and Highways)
specifications for Road and Bridge
work (Fourth Revision) with up to
date correction slips for pavement
works and CPWD Specifications
2009 (Vol. I to II), all with upto date
Corrections slips.
Electrical Works
CPWD General Specifications
Part I Internal 2013
Part II External 1994
Part III Lifts & Escalators 2003
Part IV Substations 2013
Part V Wet Riser & Sprinkler
System 2006
Part VI Heating, Ventilation &
Air Conditioning Works
2004
Part VII DG Sets 2013
all with up to date Corrections slips
For Non DSR Items and items

of Specialised nature etc.
Technical Specifications under
Section No. 5.
Clause 12
Clause 12.2 Deviation Limit beyond which i) For Non-foundation items.
12.3 & 12.5 Clauses 12.2, 12.3 & 12.5 Plus 25%
shall apply Minus No limit
ii) For Foundation Items
Plus 100%
Minus No limit
Note: For Earthwork, individual
classification of quantity can vary
to any extent but overall

Deviation Limits will be as above.
Clause 12.5 Definition of Foundation item if

other than that described in
Clause 12.5 not applicable
Clause 16 Competent Authority for

deciding reduced rates Joint Secretary (DPA-III), MEA
Clause 17 Maintenance period 12 months
Clause 18 List of mandatory machinery, tools & plants to be deployed by the

Contractor at site :-
1. Concrete Batching Plant
2. Hot Mix Plant
Clause 25
25 (i) Appellate Authority Executive Director (B&A),
RITES Limited
Appointing Authority Director Projects, RITES Limited
Clause 36 (i) & (iii)

Minimum Qualifications & Experience required and Discipline to which
should belong :
Designation Minimum Qualification Minimum working Discipline to Number

experience belong
Principal Graduate Engineer 15 years experience in CIVIL 1
Technical construction projects
Representative Or
(Project
Manager) Retired Assistant 15 years experience in
Engineer construction projects
possessing at least
recognized
Diploma Holder in
Engineering
Deputy Project Graduate Engineer 10 years experience in CIVIL 1
Manager-I pavement works
Or
Recognized
Diploma Holder in 15 years experience in
Engineering pavement works
Deputy Project Graduate Engineer 10 years experience in CIVIL 1
Manager-II building works
Or
Recognized
Diploma Holder in 15 years experience in
Designation Minimum Qualification Minimum working Discipline to Number

experience belong
Engineering building works
Deputy Project Graduate Engineer 10 years experience in Electrical 1

Manager-III electrical works related
to buildings and
installation of power
Or supply equipment
Recognized 15 years experience in

Diploma Holder in electrical works related
Engineering to buildings and
installation of power
supply equipment
Clause 36 (iv)
Recovery for non-deployment of Principal Technical Representative and
Deputy Technical Representative :
Designation Rate of Recovery per month
(in `) for non-deployment
Project Manager ` 55,000/-
Deputy Project Manager-I ` 45,000/-
Deputy Project Manager-II ` 45,000/-
Deputy Project Manager-III ` 45,000/-
Clause 42
i)(a) Schedule/statement for determining DSR 2013

theoretical quantity of cement &
bitumen on the basis of Delhi
Schedule of Rates printed by CPWD
ii) Variations permissible on theoretical quantities
a) Cement
- for works with estimated cost 3% plus / minus
put to tender not more than `5 lakhs
- for works with estimated cost put to 2% plus / minus
tender more than ` 5 lakhs
b) Bitumen for All Works 2.5% plus only &
nil on minus side
c) Steel Reinforcement and structural 2% plus / minus
steel sections for each diameter,
section and category
d) All other materials Nil
RECOVERY RATES FOR QUANTITIES BEYOND PERMISSIBLE VARIATION
Sl. Description of Rates in figures and words at which recovery shall be

No. Item made from the Contractor
Excess beyond Less use beyond the

permissible variation permissible variation

1 Cement
2 Steel
reinforcement
3 Structural
Sections
NOT APPLICABLE
4 Bitumen issued
free
5 Bitumen issued
at stipulated
fixed price
Clause 46
Clause 46.10
Details of temporary accommodation
including number of rooms and their
sizes as well as furniture to be made
available by the Contractor Two rooms of total size 75 sqm
(Approx.) including toilet and pantry with
proper office seating for four officers
Whether Clause 46.11.1A applicable NO
Whether Clause 46.13A applicable YES
Clause 46.17
City of Jurisdiction of Court NEW DELHI
Clause 47.2.1
Sum for which Third Party ` 5.00 Lakhs per
Insurance to be obtained occurrence with the number of
occurrences limited to four.
Clause 55
Whether clause 55 shall NO
be applicable.
If yes, time allowed for completion N.A.

of sample floor/unit.

SECTION-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 5
1.0 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED BY CPWD
1.1 Civil Engineering Works
CPWD Specification 2009 Vol. I & II with upto date correction slips.
These Specifications have replaced CPWD Specifications 1996 along
with Correction Slips issued on them. These Specifications cover all
types of Building Works. The specifications are available as a printed
document issued by CPWD and also in soft copy PDF Format in CPWD
website.
1.2 Electrical Engineering Works
Part No. Description Year of issue
I Internal 2013
II External 1994
III Lifts and Escalators 2003
IV Sub Stations 2013
V Wet Riser and Sprinkler Systems 2006
VI Heating, Ventilations & Air
Conditioning Works 2004
VII D.G.Sets 2013
The above documents are available as Priced Document issued by

CPWD and in soft copy PDF Format in CPWD website.
2.0 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED BY MINISTRY OF SURFACE

TRANSPORT
Specifications for Road and Bridge works (Fourth Revision) August 2001
have been published by Indian Road Congress as a priced document.
These Specification cover exhaustively various Road and Bridge works.
3.0 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED BY INDIAN RAILWAYS
Railway Board vide their letter No. 2009/LMD/01/03 dated 14/01/2010

have advised that they have approved issue of Indian Railways Unified
Standard Specifications or Materials and works with corresponding Indian
Railways Unified Standard Schedule of items (for rates of Materials and
works). These documents are to be published by Northern Railway on
behalf of Railway Board after the Zonal Railways have made out
Schedule of Rates as applicable to them based on Standard Analysis of
Rates of items. These Specification however cover only Building and

Road works generally on the lines of CPWD and Ministry of Surface
Transport. They do not cover Track works which are governed by
Manuals and RDSO/Indian Railway Specifications. Pending publication of
Unified Standard Specifications, the specifications issued by the zonal
Railways will be applicable.
4.0 SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS (NOT COVERED BY ANY STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS)
The works will be executed as indicated in the nomenclature of each item,

general specification as contained in section-5 and Particular
specifications as given in this section. Particular specification contained
herein shall apply to following works :
i) Particular specifications for Sewerage Treatment Plant
ii) Particular specifications for Pre Engineered Steel Buildings / Sheds
iii) Particular specifications for pre fabricated structures for porta cabins.
iv) Particular specifications for Non Schedule Internal and External
Electrification Items
v) Particular specifications for Prime Cost Items
In the absence of any definite provision in the MoSRT&H specifications or

in particular specifications contained herein reference may be made to
the latest CPWD specifications with upto date amendment / correction
slips, Bureau of Indian Standards codes, IRC, MoSRT&H (Erstwhile called
MOST), BS, ASTM and AASHTO in that order. Wherever these are silent,
the construction and completion of the works shall conform to sound
engineering practice and in case of any dispute arising out of the
interpretation of the above, the decision of the Engineer-in-charge shall be
final and binding on the contractor.
In addition, the abbreviations CPWD, IS, IRC, MoSRT&H, BS, ASTM,

AASHTO shall be considered to have the following meaning :
CPWD : Central Public Works Department.

MoSRT&H: Ministry of Shipping Road Transport & Highways,
Government of India.
BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards
IRC : Indian Road Congress.
BS : British Standard of the British Standards Institutes.
ASTM : American Standard of the American Society of Testing
materials.
AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation
officials.
All the codes of practice, Standards and specification applicable shall be

the latest editions with all correction slips etc. or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
Specification of Sewage Treatment Plant
1. Scope of Work
A. Sewage Treatment Plant shall be compact, odour free and shall consume
low power.
Plant shall be installed below ground level & shall generate minimum
amount of excess sludge.
Waste water after treatment below shall be suitable for Irrigation, washing
and Sanitation.
Following shall be the Parameters for design of Sewage Treatment.
NATURE OF EFFLUENT DOMESTIC SEWAGE
Daily Average Flow 50 KL/Day
pH 7.5 8.5
BOD5 500 Mg/L
Suspended Solids 400 Mg/L
COD 1000 Mg/L
Oil & Grease 50 Mg/L
E- Coli 106 MPN/100 ml
Standards of the Effluent Discharge after treatment shall be as follows

(after filtration).
PARAMETERS VALUE
PH 6.0 8.5
BOD5 Less than 20 Mg/L
Suspended Solids Less than 10 Mg/L
COD Less than 100 Mg/L
Oil & Grease Less than 10 Mg/L
E Coli Less Than 103 MPN/100 ml

B PROCESS DESCRIPTION:
In order to conserve water, the treatment plant shall be designed to

ensure that treated effluent (water) characteristics are well below the
permissible limits, even under varying flow conditions which are typical for
such systems. This implies that the selected process shall be able to
withstand the shock load situation.
It is proposed to use FAB-reactor system working on the principle of

attached growth process.
The treatment plant shall be designed with a capacity to handle 50 KLD of

waste water. Waste water will flow via gravity collection system through a
bar screen chamber to a sump chamber. A bar screen shall be provided
at the inlet point in the bar screen chamber and the wastewater will flow
through this bar screen into the sump. Bar screen shall be so designed
that it can be cleaned manually by going down to a platform in the
chamber. Two horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be provided in the sump
to pump the collected wastewater to the FAB reactor. Air will be
introduced in the sump through piper grid, to avoid the sewage from
becoming septic.
Waste water from the sump shall be lifted by means of effluent lifting
pumps into Equalized Reactors where BOD/COD reduction is achieved by
virtue of aerobic microbial activity. FAB Reactors would be running in
series. Oxygen required will be supplied through course bubble air
diffusers.
The excess bio-solids wasted in the biological process are separated in

the downstream Tube Settler Tank. The clear supernatant will be
collected in the Chlorine contact tank cum filter feed tank. The treated
sewage is further pumped through filtration units. The sewage after CCT
is disinfected & shall meet the coliform norms of < 1000 counts as
per WHO standards with minimal dosage of sodium hypochlorite.
The coliform count in the treated effluent will be almost nil.
The tertiary treatment consists of removing the residual suspended solid

load, by filtering through Dual Media Filter, and passing the water
through Activated Carbon Filter so that traces of BOD / COD and
excess chlorine are removed. The tertiary treated water is stored in the
final holding tank & can be safely used for irrigation purpose and flushing
purpose.
The biological sludge generated from the FAB, which is settled in the
Tube Settler, is pumped into Sludge Sump. The sludge shall be pumped
& filled in a tanker for suitable disposal by client.

C BLOWERS AND AERATION SYSTEM
The treatment plant shall be provided with rotary positive displacement

blowers with a common base and a central electric control panel, belt
drive system, drip proof induction type electric motors, necessary valves
including a pressure relief valve and intake and discharge silencing. Each
blower motor unit shall be housed in an enclosure. All piping and related
accessories necessary to connect the blowers to the plant air header shall
be provided by the plant manufacturer.
All air piping from the blower motor unit to the air header shall be
approved steel pipe with fittings.
The air diffusion devices shall be designed to distribute air over the entire
length of the tank and to have efficiency such that an adequate supply of
oxygen is maintained in the tanks to treat the sewage load for which the
plant is designed.
D Work is including internal walkways, pathways, illumination, Fencing &

Gate and Pipe lines, Sewer Lines within the space allotted.
2. The work broadly comprises of:

a) Construction/provision of sump & pump house with equipment
within STP complex.
b) Pre-treatment to include provisioning of screens, oil and grease
trap and by-pass arrangement for all process units.
c) Biological treatment unit-i.e. aeration equipment.
d) Secondary clarifier including facility for removing digested sludge.
e) Provision of sludge drying beds.
f) Chlorination of treated effluent and disposal of treated effluent by
pumping/gravity as required.
g) Design engineering including all civil, electromechanical drawings,
P&I diagram & sewage treatment layout.
h) Required piping, valves within the battery limits of effluent
treatment plant.
i) Provision of minimal testing facilities as BODs; suspended solids;
PH
j) Civil construction to include operator room with toilet, DB room and
as per instructions of Engineer, Internal walkways, Pathways,
Illumination, Fencing & Gate. Carry out survey if required to make
sure that the invert levels are properly matched with the individual
sites.
k) Approval from local pollution control Board including that for
adequacy report and/or National River Conservation Directorate
(NRCD) or any other authority as required.

l) Operation & Maintenance of STP with Trained Staff for a period of

Two years from the date of commissioning and training of owners
staff deputed for STP.
m) Co ordination with other agencies to make sure that the incoming
sewage is properly handled by the facility provided.
n) Connection from chlorine contact tank to the nearest drain as
directed by the engineer.
o) System should be compact with low land area requirement for STP
with the provision for expansion without disturbing existing
arrangements. However, the system should be able to
accommodate additional loads upto 20%. Except for the pumps &
blowers, the system should preferably not having moving
mechanical parts.
p) Ensuring disposal of effluent from STP, through Sewer Line to the
disposal point.
3. Power supply
3.1 For operation of sewage treatment plant power will be available at 410V,
3 phase, 4 wire 50 cycles earthed neutral system. All equipment shall be
suitable for a variation of 5% voltage.
4. Shop Drawings
The contractor shall submit shop drawings as follows:
4.1 On award of the work, he shall submit GA drawing, diagrams, plant layout
with basic dimensions, and flow diagram with levels of elements. Bidder
shall submit the design calculations, which shall be got verified by the
Engineer.
4.2 Foundation, masonry, RCC and structural details drawings of all

components of works that are required to be constructed in civil works.
4.3 Fabrication and equipment layout piping, valves and all other information
required for installation.
4.4 Electrical layouts, detail of all MCC, cable sizing and system diagrams
and earthing system.
4.5 Piping layout with pipe dia. slopes, fixing arrangements.
4.6 Three copies of the structural drawings with bar bending schedule shall
be submitted for initial scrutiny. On approval of the same contractor shall
submit six copies of the same incorporating corrections etc. Two sets will
be stamped GOOD FOR CONSTRUCTION" by the Engineer and
returned to the contractor. Total time of 2 weeks, which shall be taken by
RITES for scrutiny of structural drawings, shall be included in the total
time period of completion.
5. Other Submittals
5.1 Contractor shall furnish four sets of folders giving:
a) Catalogues and technical information sheets of equipment to be

installed.
b) Performance curves, foundation details and fixing arrangements.
5.2 Contractors will submit testing procedures for individual equipment and for
overall testing of the plant.
5.3 Submittals shall be separate for :

a) Civil Works
b) Mechanical and Piping works
c) Electrical Works
5.4 All drawings including structural drawings and submittals mentioned

above shall be approved by the Engineer in Charge and two sets duly
stamped shall be returned to the contractor.
6. Execution of Work.
6.1 All work shall be executed only in accordance with the approved shop
drawings and other submittals.
6.2 All special tools and tackle required for erection, the contractor himself
shall obtain assembly of the equipment covered by the contract. All other
materials such as foundation bolts nuts, etc. required for the installation
of the plant and equipment shall be supplied by the contractor and are
part of the contract.
7 Testing & Handing Over

7.1 The contractor shall carryout tests on different equipment as required in
the presence of the Engineer-in Charge or his representative in order to
enable him to determine whether the plant, equipment and installation
comply with the specifications and IS Codes or equivalent.
7.2 The installation shall be handed over to the Owner /Engineer only on
successful completion, operational tests and Board/ statutory authorities.
8. Statutory Permissions
8.1 Contractor shall submit a write-up of process of the plant, drawings,
design parameters flow and P & I diagrams as necessary and required for
submission to the local pollution control authority.
8.2 Contractor shall assist the Owner/Engineer in filling up any forms,

applications and other documents related to his portion of the work for
obtaining statutory approval of the STP from the Pollution Control
Board/NRCD including adequacy report. However obtaining NOC from
local Pollution ControL Board/NRCD or any other authority rest with
contractor.
8.3 Contractor shall furnish at his own cost, analysis of incoming influent as
well as that of effluents after the treatment from the main STP for
submitting to the Pollution Control Board.
8.4 Contractor shall perform testing and operation in presence of the Pollution
Control Board/NRCD if so stipulated by them.
9. Completion documents
On successful completion of the entire work, the contractor shall submit
six sets of following documents to Engineer-in Charge :-
9.1 A brief write-up of process, day to day operating and maintenance

instructions.
9.2 List of approved chemicals and procedure for storage and safety norms.
9.3 Completion drawings and data, catalogues, performance charts, technical

data sheets and equipments installed.
9.4 Manufacturers maintenance and operating instructions for mechanical

and electrical equipment.
9.5 As Built drawings including process flow diagrams, pipe runs, levels etc.
9.6 Test readings taken at final handing over time
9.7 NOC (No Objection Certificate) from local Pollution Control Board/NRCD
and municipal authority etc for the entire plan and effluent quality etc
complete.
10. Performance Guarantee

10.1 Equipment supplied and installed shall be guaranteed to yield the
specified effluent standards which must meet and accepted with the
requirements of local authorities.
10.2 The guarantee implicitly includes replacement of the entire plant on failure
to meet desired effluent parameters, replacement of individual equipment
or repairs as warranted. Decision on each and every aspect on this
matter shall rest with the Engineer and shall be final and binding on the
contractor.
11. Defects liability

All equipment and the entire installation shall be guaranteed against
defective materials and workmanship for a period of 24 months reckoned
one month after the plant is commissioned and handed over to the
Engineer along with the documentation. During the defects liability
period, the contractor shall replace defective parts and components free
of cost. Rectification on repair may be permitted in case the defect is of
minor nature.
11 Technical Specifications :
11.1 Conceptual Treatment Scheme

Sewage treatment plant One number 50 KLD capacity is to be installed at
Biratnagar. Please refer S No.1 (A C) for technical data.
12 Technical Schedule Power, Chemicals & Utilities

12.1 Chemicals
The bidder should list the chemical consumption to be used by them for
the STP. This information is to be used for evaluating of the Offer
Chemical / Utilities Units Daily Consumption

Kg/day
For STP
Total Installed Power, kW ________________
Sludge Generated
Excess Sludge Quantity in (m3/d) and (tons/day) _
12.2 BATTERY LIMITS
- Raw effluent : Inlet to Coarse Bar Screen in equalization tank

- Treated effluent : To the disposal point within 200 m from chlorine tank
- Electricity : Incomer on panel at 415 v, 50 Hz., 3 phase
- Service water : At one point within battery limit.
- Screenings : At the outlet of screen
- Sludge : On Sludge holding tank
13 CIVIL DESIGN
1. Clearing jungle including uprooting of rank vegetation, grass brush,

wood, trees and sapling of girth upto 30 Cms measured from height of
1m above ground level and removal of rubbish as per direction of
Engineer .
2. Cement shall be 43 grade of approved brand and as per the approval
of Engineer.
3. Grade of concrete for water retaining structure in M-25. Minimum
cement content for M25 grade for water retaining structures as per IS
3370.
4. P.C.C. as mud mat below water retaining structure will be 100mm thk
grade 1:4:8( 1 cement: 4 coarse sand : 8 coarse aggregate).
5. All reinforcing steel shall be TMT bars/HYSD FE-415 (as per
specification) confirming to IS 1786 with anticorrosive treatment for
water retaining structure.
6. Water stops, plasticizers & water proofing compounds shall be
provided as per Engineer in charge.
7. Handrailing shall be in MS 25 MM dia with verticals angle 50 x 50 x 6

mm at 1.5 m c / c & two rows of horizontals 25 dia MS pipes inclusive
of 2 coats of red oxide & 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved
colour & shade.
8. All external brickwork will be 230 thk in CM (1:6)
9. Internal brickwork will be 115 thk in CM (1:4)
10. All external plaster of brick wall shall be 15 MM thk cement plaster in
CM (1:4) with water proofing compound.
11. All internal plaster of brick wall shall be 12 MM thk cement plaster in
CM (1:6)
12. Ceiling plaster shall be 5 mm thk (1:3)
13. Internal wall finish - White wash ( 2 or more coats)
14. All external wall finish - Cement paint (2 or more coats, waterproof)
15. Ceiling finish - White wash
16. All rain water down comers shall be cast iron of 100 MM dia ( anti
corrosive paint) including all fittings confirming to IS 1230.
17. All windows, ventilators, doors shall be in MS as per relevant
specifications.
18. In general all flooring shall be 25mm thick precast terrazzo tiles over
20mm thick 1:4 mortar layer over 100mm thick PCC 1:4:8 over well
compacted soil.
19. Toilet flooring- 7mm thick non skid ceramic tiles over 20mm thick
cement mortar (1:4) over 100mm thick PCC(1:4:8) over compacted
soil. Dadooing Glazed tiles-7mm thick over 155 mm thick cement
mortar 1:4. vitrous china EWC (10 litres)with cistern-1 No, piping-GI,
250 litres service tank in working conditions. PVC door frame and
shutter including alluminium fittings.( Brand to approved by RITES Ltd
before use)
20. Plinth height considered 450 MM
21. Minor pump foundations etc. shall be laid by excavating existing soil
up to a depth of 600 mm & strengthening the same by doing rubble
soling.
22. All lead and lifts as per instructions of Engineer.
23. Anti termite treatment as per instructions of Engineer.
24. Inside drains at the STP as per site conditions and as per instructions
of Engineer.
25. Minor pump / blower / small pits & other such foundations shall rest on
well-compacted soil with rubble soling & PCC as mud mat with
acoustic proof enclosure.
26. All filling of good earth shall be well compacted in layers of 20cms or
as per instruction of Engineer.
27. 40mm DPC with coat of bitumen.
28. Chajja and lintels shall be provided as per requirement of Engineer .
29. Cable trenches if requirement shall be in brick masonry (of required
depth etc) with chequred plate of thick ness 5mm shall be as required
by Engineer.
30. 33. Ramp as per instructions of Engineer.
14 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
1. This specification is intended to cover furnishing of all labour,

supervision, consumable materials, tools and tackle and services
necessary for receiving, unloading and storing, transportation, pre
assembly at site, if required, complete erection, testing and
commissioning of all items included in the complete plant and
equipment for the sewage treatment plant at Biratnagar.
2. Omission of any specific reference to any method, parts, accessories
or material required for proper and efficient execution of the work shall
not, in any way relieve the bidder from his responsibilities from
providing such facilities and performing the complete erection, testing
and commissioning at no extra cost to the Owner.
3. EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND SERVICES TO BE PROVIDED BY
THE BIDDER
4. The Bidder shall perform the following in addition to design,
manufacture and supply of equipment materials and accessories.
5. Leading and transportation from the manufacturers work site to the
receiving area at the Owners plant site.
6. Unloading and clearing of materials from rails and other means of
transport carriages.
7. Receiving and unloading at the Owners plant site.
8. Opening of packages and inspecting all materials and equipment.
9. Checking of all materials with consignment note, reporting for missing
or damaged items, repairing damages and cleaning before erection.
10. Transportation/shifting of materials from storage place to erection site
and vice versa.
11. Pre assembly at site after proper checking/overhauling as required.
12. Erection including all civil works (of all mechanical and electrical
equipment included in the scope and subsequent cleaning/flushing as
required, pre-commissioning checking to ensure correctness of
erection)
13. Final adjustment of foundation levels by chipping and dressing,
checking location, elevation etc of anchor bolts and base plates.
14. Site testing and commissioning services as required
15. Training of Owners personnel in operating and maintaining the system
and various equipment as to make them proficient.
16. Watch and ward to ensure security and safety of materials under the
bidders custody
17. DETAILED SCOPE OF ERECTION, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING
18. The scope of work shall include all activities at site including placing of
equipment on foundation, leveling and alignment, grouting of
foundation, other miscellaneous minor civil work such as dressing /
chipping of foundation surfaces as required, scrapping, edge
preparation, assembly and pre-assembly, inspection and testing by
inspecting authority whenever required, minor rectification, welding,
cutting, site adjustments, and all other incidental activities as
applicable.

19. The Bidder shall furnish all labour (supervisory, skilled, unskilled and
administrative), all erection materials, hardware and consumable
materials as required for the complete installation, transport vehicles,
mobile cranes, hydraulic jacks, all erection tools, tackles and
equipment precision levels including micro level, dial and other
gauges, surface cleaners, blowers, pumps and other equipment
necessary for hydro testing, and all other necessary implements in
sufficient numbers as may be required for timely and efficient
execution of the contract. The materials supplied shall be of the best
quality, the specification and quality of which have to be approved by
Engineer-in-charge before the same are used for erection work.
20. Protection of work, inspection of work, erection programs and
progress, responsibility of erection and completeness of work etc. and
other general information shall be as spelt out in this specification.
15 SUPERVISION DURING ERECTION
The contractor shall be required to provide, at proper time, the necessary

supervisory engineers, supervisors and other supervising, personnel duly
qualified and in sufficient number for transportation, erection, pre
commissioning and post commissioning check up, start up, testing and
trial operation of plants and equipment. The bidder shall keep competent
representative who will be Resident Engineer and shall remain as In
charge of Bidders work-site and also remain answerable to the
Engineer-in-charge for all activities of the Bidder at site.
16 ERECTION
1. Erection work shall be carried out in the manner and sequence as may
be directed by respective equipment manufacturers supervisory
engineers and the Owners engineer.
2. As erection proceeds each assembled part before being boxed up with
a view to erecting it finally shall be inspected and approved by the
concerned supervisor. Should any defect be found out during such
inspection the Bidder shall make it good as per directives from
Engineer-in-charge.
3. The equipment shall be placed on respective foundation or support,
levelled and aligned with precision measuring instruments, checked for
proper clearance between moving and stationary parts wherever
applicable and grouted on the foundation. Positions of piping with
respect to anchor points shall be checked for hot and cold clearances.
4. The installation of motors shall be carried out along with driven
equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and / or as
directed by the Owner.
5. Wherever the scope includes control panels, all connections in control
panels shall be completed, checked and adjusted to ensure safety and
satisfactory operation of the equipment.
6. All fabrication and engineering work incidental to erection, like

scaffoldings structural forming for pre-assembly, transport and erection
etc. shall have to be done by the bidder at his own cost. The structural
steel required for such work shall be arranged by the bidder.
7. All piping work shall be done as per Owners certified drawings. The
scope of work of the bidder shall include installation of all items
supplied by others but coming on the pipelines included under this
specification. Such items are flow elements, control valves and other
specialties etc. All impulse piping upto the last root value and
connection on terminal equipment/piping shall also be done by the
Bidder.
17 RE-COMMISSIONING TESTING
After alignment of all equipment, alignment tests shall be carried out

by the Bidder to check leveling, clearance, eccentricity etc.
Hydro testing shall be conducted for all pressure parts after

installation at required pressure. All necessary blanking
arrangement necessary for such hydro testing shall be furnished by
the Bidder. All necessary test pump, temporary piping, etc shall be
supplied by the Bidder.
18 TAKING OVER
Upon successful completion of all the tests to be performed at site on the

equipment furnished and erection by the Bidder, the engineer shall issue
to the Bidder a taking over certificate as a proof of the final acceptance of
the equipment. Such certificate shall not relieve the Bidder of any of his
obligations which otherwise purview, by the terms and conditions of the
Contract after issuance of such certificate.
19 The Tenderers are required to offer their own design on the basis of soil
parameters and other consideration confirmed by the bidder at his cost.
The entire responsibility regarding safety, stability and functioning of the
STP System lies with the contractor. The work shall be executed on the
basis of approved drawings, design and technology submitted by the
tenderer and approved by RITES Ltd. The Concrete design mix with
minimum cement content of 360 kg/cum. to be used.
The contractor whose offer is finally accepted shall be paid on lump-sum

agreed rates for the job completed as per payment schedule of
Commercial Bid. The contractors design should, in general, contain all
accessories and fittings as mentioned in Bill of Quantities and any other
requirement of tools, equipment, machinery required for successful
completion of work and fully operational condition. The contractor shall
submit the design of the STP strictly in accordance with the specifications
given in the tender document. Regarding design, relevant I.S Code shall
be followed. The workmanship shall be in accordance with the

specifications given herein before and in absence of any specifications in
accordance with I.S. Specifications. The design of STP strictly shall be
done, as per the standard engineering practice following the relevant IS
codes and design practice/pollution control board guide lines/as per the
instructions of the Engineer.
20 List of detailed and fully dimensioned drawings good for execution at site.
These sets of working drawings as listed below, designs, calculations,
electrical load list details including list of motors, distribution boards,
cables, outdoor cable routing, earthing, bar bending schedule and
specifications etc. to be submitted after acceptance of work as may be
directed by the Engineer, the contractor shall submit modified and
accepted working drawings, along with design calculations and
documents as aforesaid in six (6) sets within 10 days of the demand
made by the Engineer Good for Execution at site.
a) Plan,elevation,section.
b) Electrical plan of circuits.
c) Mechanical plan, elevation and section.
d) Structural details.
e) Foundation details and plan.
f) Bar Bending schedule.
g) Any other drawing(s) as required for completion of works.
21 The samples shall be got approved by the contractor from the Engineer
within two weeks after receiving the order for starting the work alongwith
design mix proposed to be used for approval acceptance.
Any other samples required by the Engineer from time to time returnable
after the close of the contract but no payment shall be made if it perishes
or lost during this period.
22 Tests to be carried out by the contractor at his own expense as per

diections of Engineer from time to time;necessary equipments for such
tests shall be arranged by the contractor at site of work if so desired by
the Engineer and contractor shall make necessary provisions for this in
rates:
(i) Tests of all construction materials like cement, steel, sand,
bricks, aggregates
(ii) Test of Sewage Water before treatment.
(iii) Test of treated water (Physical & Chemical)
(iv) Test for motors
(v) Test of distribution boards, cables, outdoor cable routine,
earthing etc.
(vi) Test for compressive strength of concrete cubes
(vii) Testing of cement and steel shall be carried at every lot
brought at site for

conforming the manufacturers test certificate and any other material to be

incorporated in the work shall be tested as per instruction of engineer in
charge & IS specifications. The costs of testing shall be borne by the
contractor.
23 The effectiveness in functioning of whole STP for treatment of sewage

shall be tested for various components individually or collectively when
the work is completed as well as the work in progress. Any deficiency if
found, shall be removed by the contractor at his own cost and risk. In
case, the defect is of such nature which cannot be rectified, the defective
portion along with structurally connected parts shall be removed and
replaced by the contractor without any extra payment whatsoever. In case
structures shows any sign of failure, whole Systems shall be rebuilt by the
contractor at his cost without any extra payment or material / whatsoever.
24 General Requirements
1. Contractor shall submit with the tender a detailed layout with

dimensions of the plant, a flow diagram and a detailed list of all
equipments proposed to be installed in the space available and
marked on the site plan attached with the tender documents.
2. Work shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner true to level and
line.
3. Equipment and connecting piping shall be so installed as to prevent
any obstruction to general movement, other equipment in the
vicinity, piping, ducting and cabling etc.
4. Equipment shall be installed in a manner to provide adequate
ventilation for all motors.
5. Contractor shall furnish all information relating to the provision of
foundations, sleeves, inserts, bolts, electrical connections and
loads required.
6. Adequate provision shall be made in the equipment mounting to
prevent excessive noise transmission directly or through piping and
structures.
25 Mechanical Works
1. Mechanical equipment shall be suitable for continuous and heavy duty

operation fabricated from M.S. structural. Equipments shall be
supported in a manner to eliminate undue stresses, vibration and
noise. All equipment shall be corrosion protected by approved type of
epoxy paint.
2. Bearings used shall be self-lubricating non-corrosive type with easy

access for inspection and maintenance.
26 Electrical Works

Motors shall be for heavy duty TEFC suitable for open outdoor
installation. Motors shall be rated 10-15% above the proof terminal
box.
Each motor shall be provided with a weather proof terminal proof.
Connections to all motors shall be made with water proof flexible
connections with suitable bushes and terminal lugs.
Starters for motors shall be fully automatic type with push buttons.
Direct on line for motor up-to 10 HP. Starters for motors above 10
H.P. shall be automatic star-delta starters. All starters shall be
equipped with single phase preventer and with confirming to type II
co-ordination.
Motor control center for the entire plant shall be dust and vermin
proof construction fabricated from corrosion resistance M.S. sheets
and comprising of :
a) One incoming switch fuse unit.

b) Copper bus bar in separate chamber of ample capacity.
c) One isolation switch fuse unit for each motor.
d) One starter of required type for each motor.
e) One set of ON/OFF indicating lamps for each motor.
f) One voltmeter with selector switch on incoming main.
g) One ampere meter for each motor.
h) One single phasing preventer for each motor.
i) All interconnecting colour coded wiring within the control
center.
Any other devices and accessories necessary and
required for a complete working system.
Provide all power and control cabling from MCC
panel to all motors and controls. Cables shall be
1100 volts grade with no. of the cores necessary
and required conforming to relevant IS.
Entire electrical installation shall be earthed in
accordance with local electrical rules.
27 Instrumentation
1. Provide 100 mm dia gunmetal Bourden pressure gauge with isolation

cock and connecting piping for each pump.
2. Provide approved type of flow meter on the plant inlet calibrated in ltrs
/ minute.
3. Chlorinator/Chemical Feed Pumps
a) Chemical feed and chlorination will be done by approved
make of non corrosive material by separate metering
pumps mounted on a 90 litres PVC tank.
b) Provided PVC bucket containers with lid for making
solutions

c) Provide all suction, delivery and injection piping and

fittings. All pipes and fittings shall be corrosion
resistant.
d) Painting
ii) Steel work where used shall be sand blasted and

applied with one coat primer.
iii) Steel work and equipment in contact with water shall
be painted with Epoxy paint as per paint
manufacturers recommendation.
iv) Steel work exposed to atmosphere shall be painted
with three coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved shade.
v) Alternate for equipment protection painting shall be
considered if the same are proven technique of
International Standards.
4. Pumps (Submersible/centrifugal) - Kirloskar

- Jyoti
- Beacon
- Crompton Greaves
- Jhonson
- KSB
5. Electric motors - Siemens

- Kirloskar
- Crompton Greaves
- ABB
- Bharat Bijlie
6. ACSR conductors - CCI

- Incab
- Unistar
7. Lightning arrester11 KV - ALPRO

- Oblum
- Jaipuria
- Skipper
8. G.O.D., D.O.Fuses - Pectil

- Jaipuria
- Isotech
- Skipper
9. CTS/PTS (11KV) - Pragati

- AE
- Kappa
- Skipper

10. Transformer - Kirloskar

- Areva
- Crompton Greaves
- Bharat Billie
11. KWh Meter/ Tri vector Meter - Havells

- Jaipur Meter
- Secure Meter
- BENTEX
12. 11 KV VCPanel - Crompton

- Siemens
- ABB
- Areva
13. Air Blowers - Usha / Everest
14. MS / SS / CI / GI Pipes - Tata Steel / Surya

Roshni / Jindal /
Zenith
15. HDPE Pipes - Trustlene / NOCIL /

Dutron ( Duraline)
16. Valves - Intervalve / Arem /

BDK / Dinesh Plastics /
Jyoti Plastics /
/ Kirloskar / Saunders
17. CI, Isolation Gates - Yashwant / Jash
18. Pressure Gauges - H. Guru / Waree

/ Fiebig / Gluck
19. Level Switches - TRAC / Pune Techtrol

Specifications for Pre-Engineered Steel Building / Shed (s) as described

below :
The building/shed will consist of all components required to construct the

primary and secondary framing (wind bents, wall & roof purlins) plus the
wall and roof cladding. The contractor will complete the work on Design &
Build basis. The contractor will get the shed designed from the approved
suppliers/firms and get the designs approved from RITES LTD. The
contractor will then get its designs proof checked from a reputed IIT
(as approved by RITES LTD) and on approval shall proceed for
construction.
The contractor will also give a 10 year leak proof guarantee for the pre-
engineered buildings/sheds from the date of completion/handover.
The pre-engineered buildings shall be designed according to the following

codes :
Design Codes
Seismic Load As per IS 1893 -2002(Zone 5)
Wind Load IS -875
Design IS -800 -2007(LIMIT STATE) & AISI -96
Design Loads
Live Load 0.75 Kpa
Dead Load 0.13 Kpa
Wind Speed 170 KMPH
Roof Slope 1:10
A. General Features
Type : TCCS (Tapered Column Clear Span)

Width : as per Drawing
Length : as per Drawing
Eave height : 7.0m clear under the knee
Width module : 1
Roof slope : min 1 in 10
Bay spacing : min 6.0 M
Front End Frame : Standard Post & Beam System
Back End Frame : Standard Post & Beam System
Type of bracing on roof & wall : Diagonal Rod / Angle Bracing
(as per design)
Roof panel : as per detailed product specification as under.
Wall panel : as per detailed product specification as under.

Girts : Sidewall girts and end wall girts are mounted on the exterior
face of the main column.
Fasteners : Mechanically galvanised Hex-washer head self-drilling
fasteners with integral EPDM seals.
Accessories : Flashing, trims, eave gutters & downspouts.
Roof Lighting panel : 1.5 mm thick FRP day lighting panels for
4% of roof area.
Canopy : A canopy/soffit of size 3(W) x (Length as per drawing) X
5.0m (H) will be provided on one side wall.
Self propelled turbo-ventilation- As per manufacturess
specifications / drawing.
Doors : Aluminium Panel
Windows : Aluminium Glazed
Flooring : Shed Area : Tri mix / VDF, Office Area ; Vitrified tiles.
Paint Finish : All primary and secondary members shall be
supplied with factory applied one coat of Zinc Chromate red oxide
primer finished with 2 coasts of synthetic enamel paint applied at
site. All internal walls painted with Emulsion paint and external
walls in Weather coat paint.
Special conditions: All walls clad to full height above 3.0m high
brick masonry wall.
Building Layout: as per Drawing enclosed
B. Detailed Product Specification
General
Structural Members:
Frame: Supply of Primary (Built-up) sections are fabricated from hot rolled
steel plates conforming to ASTM A 572M Grade 50 or equivalent with
minimum yield strength of 345 MPa. Flanges are welded to the web by a
continuous single side fillet weld deposited by an automatic submerged
arc welding process. The Built up frame shall be shot blast & primed with
one coat of primer paint applied as per standards.
Supply of Galvanized secondary members are cold-formed from steel

coils conforming to ASTM A 653M Grade 65 or equivalent , with zinc

coating to Z275 designation (275 g/m2) on both surfaces & having a

minimum yield strength of 450 MPa.
Roofing panel :
Supply of MR-24 type monolithic/seamless roofing system, factory pre-
punched profiled sheet of nominal 600 mm effective cover width with two
major corrugations, 50 mm high (80 mm including seam). The flat of the
panel shall contain cross flutes 430 mm on the pan centre perpendicular
to the major corrugations over the entire length of the panel. The feed
material is manufactured from 0.60 mm Base Metal thickness (BMT), min.
345 MPa yield strength coated with hot dip metallic Aluminium /Zinc alloy
coating, Zincalume AZ150 as 150 gms/ sq.mt total on both sides of
Aluminium (55%) & Zinc (43.50 %) & Silicon (1.50%), conforms to
ASTM792M or AS1397, or, any other equivalent roofing system . The
steel manufacturers test certificate for the chemical and mechanical
properties of steel shall be submitted for approval by the concerned
authority prior to installation. The sheet shall have brand marking of the
manufacturer on the back of the sheet at every 1 m c/c for confirming
genuinity of the material. Specially designed roof clips shall be used to
hold roof panels to the supporting structural member. The clip is designed
to move freely in both directions to take care of thermal expansion and
contraction. The supporting structural member (galvanized purlins) shall
be factory pre-punched as per design requirements. Panel side laps shall
be field-seamed by roof runner seaming machine which is self-propelled
and portable electrical lock-seaming machine. The machine field forms
the final 180 degrees of a 360 degree double-lock standing seam, all side
lap sealant shall be factory applied butyl rubber hot metal sealant. The
insulation shall be vinyl membrane supported fiberglass blanket of
thickness 50 mm with density 12 kg/m3 (or as per design requirement)
shall be approved by concern authority. The panel end lap shall be joined
by mean of a two piece clamped connection consisting of a bottom
reinforcing plate and top panel strap. Accessories such as ridge capping,
flashing; trims, gutter and down pipe shall be used for fixing roof system
which shall be approved by Engineer-in-charge. Scrubolt type fastener
shall be used for fixing roof system.
Wall Panels:
Shadowrib 900 type panels are roll formed from nominal 0.45 mm base
metal thickness of minimum yield strength of 550 MPa, coated with an
aluminum /zinc alloy (i.e. Zincalume Steel), AZ150 (min 150 gm/m2 total
on both side), conforms to Australian standard AS1397, pre-painted with
Colorbond steel quality paint coat as per AS/NZS 2728 Class 3 or any
other equivalent panel. The paint finish thickness shall have a total
coating thickness of nominal 35 m, comprising of nominal 20 m on
exterior face and nominal 5 m reverse coat on interior face over nominal
5 m epoxy primer coat on both surfaces of approved colour shade by
concern authority. The steel manufacturer's test certificate for the
chemical and mechanical properties of steel shall be submitted for
approval by the concerned authority prior to installation. The sheet shall
have brand marking of the manufacturer giving product details on the

back of the sheet at every 1 meter c/c for confirming genuinity of the
material.
Profile dimensions:
SHADOWRIB rib profile of 900 mm effective cover width, min. 38 mm
deep ribs at pitch of min. 300 mm centre to centre distance with two
stiffeners between the ribs.
OR
Any other equivalent material.
Trims & Gutters: Wall flashing and trims (gable, corner, framed
opening, accessories, etc.) are manufactured from same color, finish and
thickness as wall panels
Roof flashing and trims (parapet flashing, transition trims, expansion joint
trims and ridge caps) are manufactured from same color, finish and
thickness as roof panels.
Eave gutters and downspouts are cold-formed from the same material as
wall panels
Water-resistant louvers shall be manufactured from high strength

ZINCALUME steel .
Protection accessories:
SKYWEB II type protection netting shall be provided.
Other Accessories:
Anchor bolts are manufactured from rods conforming to ASTM A 36M
Grade 36 or equivalent with minimum yield strength of 240 MPa and an
ultimate strength of 400 MPa.
Bracing rods, used in sidewalls of buildings supporting cranes are solid

plain round steel bars conforming to ASTM A36 M or equivalent with
minimum yield strength of 240 MPa.
Flange braces used to stabilize the inner flanges of main frame columns
and rafters are 50 mm x 50 mm x 4 mm steel angles conforming to ASTM
A 36M (or equivalent) with a minimum yield strength of 240 MPa
Roof Fixing Clip: Specially designed roof clips shall be used to hold MR-
24 roof panels to the supporting structure member. The clip shall be
design to move freely in both direction to take care of thermal expansion
and contraction. The supporting structural member (galvanized Purlin)
shall be factory pre-punched as per design requirements.
Panel End lap: The panel lap shall be joined by means of a two-piece
clamped connection consisting of a bottom reinforcing plate and a top
panel strap as per approved design and to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-

Charge. All other special accessories should also be factory fabricated
including flashings, ridge cap,gutter, downpipe etc.
Sealant: Special grade of silicon sealant non-hardening, neutral cure type

of approved make and grade shall be applied at all side laps and endlaps
(with flowable mastick) as approved by engineer-in-charge.
Bead mastic is an extruded elastomeric butyl rubber based sealant

supplied in rolls on silicon release paper conforming to Federal
Specification TT-C-1796 A Type II Class B (or equivalent).
Flowable mastic (caulking sealant) is a neutral cure silicone rubber

sealant that is chemically inert and non corrosive. It is UV resistant and
suitable for exterior applications against weathering and rainwater. When
cured it is non-toxic and will accommodate high thermal and shrinkage
changes in structural movement joints.
Foam closures match the panel profile. They are made of expanded
polyurethane or similar material.
Fasteners: The panel clip shall be fastened to structural members with

Scrubolt fastener or equivalent material. The size of the fastener shall be
as per the manufacturers recommendation and as approved by engineer-
in-charge.
Insulation: The insulation shall be vinyl membrane supported fiberglass

blanket of thickness 50 mm with density min 12 kg/m3 (or as per design
requirement) and as approved by engineer-in-charge.
Specification for Skylight (Translucent sheeting) :

The panel shall be nominal 1.5mm thick composed of a translucent,
thermosetting polyester resin with a thoroughly impregnated glass fiber
reinforcing mat with an integrally bonded translucent film on the
weathering face. The profile should match with cladding profile. The fixing
shall be done with specially designed Lap seal and weather-tight washer
for fixing the translucent sheeting. The profile and properties shall be
approved by Engineer-in-charge before installation.
The work also includes design of following:

Rigid frame structural for columns, rafters with end plates, purlins,
girts.
Wind Operated Turbo Ventilators
All necessary flashings, trims, eave gutters & downspout
Roofing & cladding sheets
Structural hardware & sheeting fasteners
End lap sealant
Bracing
Anchor bolts and templates
2 mm thick FRP day light panel

Framed opening
Canopy system
Interior partition wall, Doors and fixtures
Wall vents, doors, windows and louvers
Civil, mechanical and electrical installations and materials
Concrete embed plates of weld plate of any kind
Design of Foundations, Slabs etc and other masonry design.
All civil, electrical and PHE works.
Setting of Anchor Bolt (Physical setting or fixing)
Grouting - Grouting under column base plates with high strength
grout.
Crane beam, brackets, crane rails and crane
Electricity & Water required during work at site.
Proof checking by a reputed IIT (as approved by RITES LTD).
Erection and Fixing:

The installation shall be done in accordance to the standard
practices as specified by the manufacturer and as approved by the
concern authority. All sheets and accessories must be stored and
finally erected without any damage.
The contractor will be required to submit design calculation in

support of the proposed profile of the sheet and standard loading etc.
to the satisfaction of RITES LTD. The contractor shall also submit
methodology for fixing and also a maintenance manual for routine
maintenance.
Special flashing, ridge capping and trims shall be fixed as per

manufacturers recommendation. The shape and girths shall be as
per design requirement and shall be approved by RITES LTD.
Panel clips shall be positioned by matching the hole in the clip with
the factory-punched holes in the secondary structural members.
Panel shall be positioned and properly aligned by matching the

factory punched holes in the panel end with the factory punched
holes in the eave structural member and by aligning the panel with
the panel clip.
Panel side lap shall be field-seamed by a self-propelled and portable

electrical lock-seaming machine. The machine field forms the final
180 degrees of a 360 degree double-lock standing seam; all side lap
sealant shall be factory applied.
Panel endlap, when required, shall be at least 150mm sealed with

neutral-cure sealant and fastened together by clamping plates.
Sealant shall contain hard nylon beads which prevent it from flowing
out due to clamping actions. The panel lap shall be joined by means
of a two-piece clamped connection consisting of a bottom reinforcing
plate and a top panel strap. The panel endlap shall be located
directly over, but not fastened to, a supporting secondary roof
structural member and be staggered, so as to avoid a four panel lap
splice condition.
The contractor shall ensure that panel erector is familiarized with the
erection procedure and all the supporting members are straight, level
and true before starting panel erection. Panels shall be erected
according to approved shop drawings by RITES LTD.
Measurement:
The pre-engineered shed (length & breadth) shall be measured from
outer face of columns on one side and the projected edge of canopy
on the other side. In case there is no canopy, than the sheds will be
measured from outer face of columns on both sides. If there is one
side canopy, 50% are of canopy shall be measured.
No separate payment will be made for the laps of sheet and

accessories, bolts, nuts, washers, adjustable bolts and supports for
gutters and other fixtures. These are assumed to be included in the
quoted rates.
Civil works like foundation, columns, plinth beams, Brick walls, ,

plaster, door/windows, floring, electrical/water supply/ sanitary works,
fixure/fittings, etc. shall be measured and paid separately.
Note: The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings based on the
drawings supplied by the engineer-in-charge or the concern authority.
These shall be submitted in five sets sufficiently in advance to the concern
authority for approval.
Stages of Payment (for this item only) :

No. Stage Payable at %age
of amount quoted
1. On receipt of the material at the site 30%
2. On erection and assembly of the Bldg/Shed frame. 20%
3. On receipt of roof and wall sheeting material at site. 20%
4. On erection and assembly of Bldg/Shed roof/wall sheeting. 20%
5. On completion of work and handing over 10%
Pre Engineered Building/Shed (approved supplier) :

TATA BLUESCOPE STEEL / BUTLER BUILDING SYSTEMS
KIRBY Engineering
Saxena Marine Tech Pvt. Ltd.,
Supertech (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
Trident Metal Arch
Or, EQUIVALENT
Foundation & other Civil Components Design :

From the empanelled lists of RITES/ CPWD/ Railways.
Specifications for Prefabricated portacabin :
MAIN FRAME Hollow Steel Pipe Framing 5858mm & Bracing with
3838mm.
OUTER CLADDING 10mm thick Silica Fiber Board covered epoxy and
P.U. Texture/Silicon Coating.
INNER CLADDING Laminated both side with 8mm Fiber Board

Walls/5mm thick both side reinforced Bakelite lining.
INSULATION 25mm thick Glass Wool.
TEMPERATURE Can withstand -20C to + 70C very easily.
ROOFING G.I Sheet Profile in Sloping/Hut/Plane shape insulated with 8

Feet Height Inside.
FLOORING C.C. Platform to be provided or if required with 16mm thick

Silica Fiber Board over Steel frame with flanges at additional cost.
DOORS/WINDOWS Flush doors, Wall finish 35mm thick and Aluminum

Sliding Windows.
LIGHTING Concealed Brass Fitting with Anchor Switches and Sockets

Concealed Copper Wiring.
PAINTING P.U. Texture coating on Outer Wall of desired shade with

classic texture finish covered with Silicon Coating.
BASE Fixed / Flanged.
GROUND CLEARANCE 6 or as desired.
FIRE RESISTANCE 60 minutes.
TECHNICIAL DETAILS / PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
OUTER CLADDING
Density : 1250 Kgs/m3
Compressive Strength : 15N/mm2
Moisture Content : 9% 3%
Surface Alkalinity : pH between 11 and 13

Moisture of Elasticity : 3000N/mm2
Nail Holding Power : 205 Kg
Bending Strength : 9N/mm2
Screw Holding Power : 312 Kg
Transverse tensile strength : 0.4N/mm2
Sound Insulation : 30db to 60 db
INTERNAL CLADDING
Density : 700-850 kg/m3
Water Absorption : 24 hours soak 6%
Internal Bond : 8-10 kg/cm2
Tensile strength : 4 kg/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity : 30,000 kg/cm2
Water Resistance Test : 2.5 kg/cm2
Modulus of Rupture : 250-280 kg/cm2
Screw Holding (Face) : 150kg & (Edge): 125 Kg
FIRE RESISTANCE Satisfy according to BS 476, the criteria ISO 834-

1975 and ISO-1979 for hour to 4 hours fire rating
WATER ABSORPTION Swelling = 0.31% approx, under relative humidity

of air from 30% to 95% at 20C
FLAME RETRADATION TEST Fire extinguishers itself within 15 sec. if

kept over a flame for 60 sec.
STEAM TEST No traces of discoloration or bubbles even after 2 hours.
CRACKING TEST No effect even at 70C for 24 hours or 100C for 2

hours.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTERNAL & EXTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION & ALLIED WORKS
GENERAL
The installation shall conform in all respects to Indian standard Code of Practice
for Electrical Wiring Installation IS 732 as amended up to date, CPWD
specifications and `National Electric Code'. It shall also be in conformity with the
current I.E. Rules and Regulations and requirements of the local Electric Supply
Authority and Fire Insurance regulations in-so-far-as these become applicable to
the installation.
Electrical work in general shall be carried out as per following CPWD
Specifications with upto date amendments.
General Specifications for Electrical Works. (Part I - Internal) -2013.
General Specifications for Electrical Works. (Part II -External) - 1994
General Specifications for Electrical Works. (Part IV Sub-station) -2013
Code of Practice for Fire Alarm System & 2189-1999
CPWD specification for Fire Alarm & detection System amended as on
date.
Heating, Ventilations & Air Conditioning works (Part VI 2004)
DG Sets (Part VII 2013)
Wherever this specifications calls for a higher standard of material and or
workmanship than those required by any of the above mentioned regulations
and specification then the specification here under shall take precedence over
the said regulations and standards.
In general, the materials equipment and workmanship not covered by the above,
shall confirm to the Indian Standards (latest edition) unless otherwise called for.
1.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL

WORK:
(A) SCOPE
The work to be carried out under this contract comprises of the External
electrification and sub-station work at Biratnagar (Nepal). The Contractor shall
carry out and complete the said work under this contract in every respect in
conformity with the CPWD specifications and current rules and regulations of
the local electricity Supply authority, Department of Electrical Safety (State
Administration), State / District Fire Service, State Pollution Control Board,
state government/national building code / Central government / or any other
statuary bodies/ the Bureau of Indian Standard and with the directions of and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer In charge. The Contractor shall furnish all
labour, supply and install all materials, appliances, equipments necessary for
the complete provision and testing of the whole Electrical Installation as
specified herein and shown on the drawings . This also includes any material,
appliances, equipment not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the
drawings as being furnished or installed but which are necessary and
customary to make complete installation with all outlets for power, light,
telephone conduits and other electrical systems shown on the schedule or
described herein, properly connected and in working conditions. The work
shall include all incidental jobs connected with electrical installation such as
excavation (all type of earth) of trenches and back filling, with sand & brick
protection, cutting of wall / RCC slab, drilling and grouting for fixing of fixtures,
equipment etc and making the same good.
In general the work to be performed under this contract shall comprise of the
following:
a. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Area lighting with GI

Octagonal poles / High mast and Light fixtures.
b. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of all feeder pillars.
c. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning all conduit /pipes, junction
boxes and cabling for Fire Detection & Alarm, external PA, out door CCTV
systems with their allied system.
d. Supply, Installation, testing & commissioning of lighting fixtures.
e. Supply, installation and testing of Aviation Obstruction Light & Lightning
Protection System with high mast towers & High mast panel.
f. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of earthing system.
g. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Panels and cabling.
h. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of HT & LT sub-station.
i. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of cold storage, Weigh
Bridge.
j. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of DG sets with exhaust
system as per CPCB norms.
k. Obtaining & delivering to the owner all the statuary Clearances and
Approval from all statutory authorities for Electrical & DG Works like
Electrical Inspector Safety / Pollution Control Board / District Fire
Service, etc.
l. Approval from statutory authority/ Electrical Inspector/ safety /
Pollution Control Board / Fire Officer etc.
m. Sanction of load with scheme, energisation & handing over of all the
above systems to the owner.
Bidder shall be responsible for:
Inter-connection Drawing.
Protection co-ordination drawings/tables.
All electrical wiring work will be done as CPWD specifications.
Shop inspection and testing procedures.
Field testing and commissioning procedures.

Bidder shall also be responsible for:
Any other work/activity that is not listed above however is

necessary for completeness and correctness of electrical system.
All minor civil works associated with earthling, system, lighting

and power panels / distribution boards, in walls for light points
switch boxes, receptacles and their drops etc. such as fixing of
anchor bolts, clamps, cleats, cutting of chases in wall, ceiling
including refilling and plastering etc. of the same.
2.0 DRAWINGS
The drawings, specifications and bills of quantities shall be considered as

a part of this contract and any work or materials shown on the drawings
and not called for in the specifications or vice-versa, shall be executed as
if specifically called for in both. The contract drawings indicate the extent
and general arrangement of various equipment and wiring, etc. and are
essentially diagrammatic. The drawings indicate the point of termination
of cables/conduit runs and broadly suggest the routes to be followed. The
work shall be executed as per approved working drawings, subject to any
minor changes, if found essential to co-ordinate installation of this work
with other trades. All such changes shall be without any additional major
cost to the owners. The data given in the documents and drawings are
approximate & their complete accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings
and data furnished are meant for guidance & assistance to the
contractor.
The exact dimension, location, distance and levels, etc., will be governed
by the space conditions. The contractor shall examine all Architectural,
structural, plumbing and sanitary and air-conditioning drawing before
starting the work and report to the Engineer In charge any discrepancy
which in his opinion appear on them, and get the same clarified. He shall
not be entitled to any extras for omissions or defects in electrical drawings
or when they conflict with other work. Any information / data shown in the
drawings furnished with the specifications shall not relieve the contractor
of his responsibility to carry out the entire work as per the specifications
and to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. Additional information
required by the bidder for successfully completing the work shall be
obtained by him.
3.0 WORKING DRAWINGS & SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare and furnish Shop Drawings in six (6) copies
(hard + one CD) at no extra cost for approval by the Engineer In-charge
before commencing installation/ fabrication / manufacture of the
equipment & all other works detailed shop drawings indicating General
Arrangement, Schematic, Inter-connection of the various equipment and
submit to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval before commencing the
work. The shop drawings shall indicate all setting out details and physical
dimensions of all components with wiring and cable details including
system operating write up in the system. All work shall be carried out on
the approval of these drawings. However, approval of these drawings do
not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for providing maintenance
free and fool proof system including any missing component/accessories
to meet with the intent of the specifications.
4.0 COMPLETION DRAWINGS (As per GCC Clause 8 B)
At the completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual

completion, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer In-charge layout
drawings drawn at approved scale indicating the complete Internal &
external system As installed. In addition, these drawings shall in
particular, give the following information:
(a) Run and size of cables, man holes, Hume pipe.

(b) Location and details of LT panel boards, showing the circuit number &
load on each circuit, switches, switchgear and other particulars.
(c) A complete external lighting, PA, CCTV system layout diagram as
installed and schematic drawings showing all connections in the
complete electrical & allied systems as per the scope of works.
(d) Location of earthing pits & types, sizes of all earthing conductors,
Manholes etc.
(e) Layout and particulars of all equipments with their control system.
(f) Conduit route, numbers of wires in each conduit, location of DB,
Switch Boards.
(g) Circuit diagram with load detail.
(h) Single line diagrams.
5.0 FEES PERMITS & TESTS
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any fee and permits required for
the installation work including obtaining the load sanction & scheme, and
obtaining certificates & approvals from the local/statutory authority. The
Owner shall arrange only for reimbursement of payment against original
receipt in the name of owner of service connection charges and any other
legal fee / application fee for the connection & the security deposit for
getting electric supply. The Contractor shall also arrange for releasing of
electrical connection, its energisation and handing over to the owners. On
Completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
Engineer In-charge, certificates of final inspection and approval by the
Local Electric Supply Authority & any other State statuary authority. All the
incidental & liasoning charges what-so-ever shall be borne by the
contractor and are deemed to be included in the quoted prices.
On completion of this work the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
owners the certificates of inspection and approval by electrical
inspectorate of local Administration. The fees paid for inspection will be
reimbursed on production of original challan / receipts and with approvals
certificate / letter. The contractor shall include in his rates all charges
necessary for getting the electrical installations etc. approved by the Chief
Electrical Inspector to the State Government. He shall also obtain any
other clearance such as sealing of meters etc. and deliver the same to the
owners.
6.0 GENERAL
To provide electrical equipment and materials for the distribution of

electrical power from the ESS including ESS The quantities mentioned in
BOQ are tentative. It will be the bidders responsibility to work out the
exact quantities from drawings, which trade provides said equipment,
materials.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all aspects of design and
constructional features of equipment and details of work to be carried out,
nevertheless, the equipment and work shall conform in all respects to high
standards of Engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable
of performing in continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable
to the Engineer In charge who will interpret the meaning of the
specifications and drawings and shall have right to reject or accept any
work or material which in his assessment is not complete to meet the
requirement of this specifications and or applicable code and standards
mentioned elsewhere in these specifications.
After completion of work the contractor will hand over the directly to
the client in presence of RITES Engineer In charge. And defect liability
period of one year will be start from that date.
6A CODES & STANDARDS
The design engineering and manufacturing shall be in accordance with

established standards/codes (with amendments up to date), sound
engineering practices, specifications and shall conform to the statutory
regulations applicable in the country. Some of the relevant
Standards/Codes are listed below:
Indian Electricity Act, 2003
Indian Electricity Rules, 1956

IS:8130 : Conductors for insulated electrical cables and

flexible cords.
IS:5831 : PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
IS:694 : PVC insulated electric cables for working Voltage
up to and including 1100 volts.
IS:424, 1475 (F-3) : Power cable flexibility test.
IEC:754(1) : FRLS PVC insulated cable.
IS:13947 / 947 IEC : Air Circuit Breaker / Molded Case Circuit
Part 1-5 Breaker.
Specification for factory built assemblies of
IS:8623 : switch gear and control gear for voltage up to
and including1000V AC/1200V DC.
IS:10118 : Switchgear and Control gear selection,

installation and maintenance.
IS:1248 : Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
Part 1-9 measuring instruments and testing accessories.
IS:13779 : Digital measuring instruments and testing
accessories.
IS:2705 : Current Transformer for metering and protection
with classification, burden and insulation.
IS :2147 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures for

low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IS:3427 : Metal enclosed switchgear and control gear.
BS:162 : Safety clearance.
IS:3202 : Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical
equipment.
IS:375 : Marking and arrangement for switchgear, bus
bars, main connections and auxiliary wiring.
IS:722 : AC electric meters.
IS:5082 : Electrolytic copper / aluminum Bus bars.
IS:2834 : Capacitors.
IS:7752 : Guide for improvement of power factor at
consumers installation.
IS:4201 : Application guide for Current Transformer.
IS:4146 : Application guide for Voltage Transformer.
IS:2959 : Contactors.
IS:5578 : Guide for marking of insulated conductors.
IS:11050 : Guide for forming system of marking and

identification of conductors & apparatus terminal.
IS:6005 : Code of practice for phosphate of iron & steel.
Any other standard may be followed provided it is equivalent or more

stringent than the standards specified above.

The following abbreviations used in the bill of quantities, specifications

and drawings represent:
ISS Indian Standard Specification
IER Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
BS British Standard (Wherever specifically called for).
HRC High Rupturing Capacity

GI Galvanised Iron
MS Mild steel
C.I. Cast Iron
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
HT High Tension
LT Low Tension
A-Amp Ampere
KV Kilo Volts
PT Potential Transformers
CT Current Transformers
OCB Oil Circuit Breakers
VCB Vaccum circuit breaker
ACB Air Circuit Breakers
SFU Switch Fuse Unit
FDU Fuse Disconnecter Unit
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MCB Miniature circuit Breaker
IC Iron Clad
DB Distribution Board
KVA Kilo Volts Ampere
KVAR Kilo Volts Ampere Reactive
PCC Power Control Center
MCC Motor Control Center
NC Normally closed
RCCB / ELCB Residual current circuit breaker.
mA Milli ampere
NO Normally open
SWG Standard Wire Gauge
CL/RL Ceiling Light
DL Drop Light
WL Wall Light
In case of any deviation / conflict of this specification with the codes &
standards, the following order of precedence shall govern.
a) Specification, particular specification if any, and drawings.

b) Indian regulations / IS codes and standards.
6B DESIGN
The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best

engineering practices, to ensure satisfactory performance and service life.
The requirement offered by the contractor shall be complete in all respects.
Any materials or accessories which may not have been specifically

mentioned, but which are usual and necessary for the satisfactory and
trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided
without any extra cost to the purchaser. This shall also include spares for
commissioning of the equipment.
7.0 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENTS
All the materials and equipment shall be of the approved make and design.
Unless otherwise called for any approval by Engineer-in-Charge, only the
best quality materials and equipment shall be used.
INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
The Engineer-in-Charge shall have at all reasonable times free access to the
Contractors premises or works and shall have the power at all reasonable times
to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the works during its
manufacture or erection, if part of the works is being manufactured or
assembled at other premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain permission to
inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractors
own premises or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture,
dispatch or at site at the option of the Purchaser and the equipment if found
unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be
rejected.
All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to
routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under respective
sections. Bidder shall submit the type tests reports for approval. The Contractor
shall intimate the Engineer-in-Charge the detailed program about the tests at
least three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies. If for any item
type test is pending payment would be made on successful completion of
type/routine test(s) actually carried out as per Engineer-in-Charges instructions.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge thirty (30) days written notice
of any material being ready for testing. Such tests shall be to the Contractors
account. The Consultant/Owner unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived
will attend such tests within thirty (30) days of the date of which the equipment
is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may
proceed with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the
presence of Engineer-in-Charge and he shall forthwith forward to the Consultant
duly certified copies of tests in triplicate.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection
as defined shall inform in writing to the Contractor of any objection to any
drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which in his opinion is not
in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall give due consideration to
such objections and make the necessary modifications accordingly.
When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractors or Sub-
contractors works, the Engineer-in-Charge shall issue a certificate to this effect
within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not
witnessed by the Engineer-in-Charge, the certificate shall be issued within

fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractors Test certificate by the Engineer-
in-Charge. Failure of the issue such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor
from proceeding with the works. The completion of these tests or the issue of
the certificate shall not bind the Purchaser to accept the equipment should, it,
on further tests after erection, be found not to comply with the Specification. The
equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and
issuance of MICC by the Engineer-in-Charge.
For tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any
Sub-Contractor, the Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide
free of charge such items as labor, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores,
apparatus and instruments as may be required by Engineer-in-Charge or this
authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in
accordance with the Specification.
The inspection by Engineer-in-Charge and issue of Inspection Certificate

thereon shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor
in respect of the agreed quality assurance program me forming a part of the
Contract.
The Engineer-in-Charge will have the right of having at his own expenses any
other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractors premises or at
site or in any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy
that the material comply with the specifications.
The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right for getting any field tests not
specified in respective sections of the technical specification conducted on the
completely assembled equipment at site. The testing equipment for these tests
shall be provided by the Contractor.
8.0 INSPECTION & APPROVAL OF THE WORK BY LOCAL UTHORITY
On completion of this work, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
Engineer-In-charge the certificates of inspection and approval by electrical
inspectorate of local Local Administration. The contractor shall include in
his rates all charges necessary for getting electrical installation approved
which includes Sub-station, LT distribution, etc. by the Chief Electrical
Inspector to the state government /electrical inspector.
8A INSPECTION OF MATERIALS
The RITES / owners representative shall have access to the

manufacturers premises for inspection of any items of the tender for which
contractor has made arrangement with manufacturer/ suppliers. All such
inspection shall not need any prior intimation by the Engineer-In-charge.
8B For the items of works in the bill of quantities pertaining to CPWD DSR-
2013 the specifications & mode of measurements shall be in accordance
with CPWD DSR-2013 and CPWD Specifications 2013 with up to date
correction slips. For market rate items in the bill of quantities, the
specifications and mode of measurement shall be as per these
specifications hereinafter and as per the description of the item in the bill of
quantities and as per directions of Engineer In charge.
8C Latest CPWD Specifications/IS Codes referred above shall stand modified

in accordance with the stipulations/clarifications/modifications given in
particular technical specifications hereinafter.
For the items not covered in the CPWD Specifications, the work shall be
executed as per latest Indian Standard codes published by BIS (formerly
ISI) inclusive of all amendments issued thereto or revision, if any, up to the
date of opening of tenders (Technical Bid).
8D Wherever IS/BIS codes are mentioned the latest codes with up to date
amendments/revisions shall be used.
8E In the event of any discrepancy in the description of item as given in the bill
of quantities or these specifications and the specifications relating to the
relevant item as per CPWD Specifications/Indian Standards mentioned
above or drawings, the former shall prevail.
8F In case of items not covered by CPWD/BIS codes/ specifications, the

decision of the Engineer In charge based on sound engineering practice
shall be final and binding on the contractor.
8G Drawings have to be properly co related by the contractor before executing

the work. In case of any difference noticed between architectural and
structural/services drawing, the Contractor shall obtain final decision of the
Engineer In charge in writing. For the items where so required, samples
shall be prepared before starting the particular items of work for prior
approval of the Engineer In charge and nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.
8H In respect of works of the sub agencies deployed for doing the work of
electrification, external services, other building works, horticulture work, etc
for this project and any other agencies simultaneously executing other
works, the contractor shall provide necessary coordination facilities for
same. The contractor shall leave such necessary holes, openings, etc for
laying/burying in the work pipes, cables, conduits, clamps, boxes and
hooks for fan clamps, etc as may be required for electric, sanitary,
firefighting, telephone, CCTV system, etc and nothing extra shall be paid
for the Same.
9.0 SUBMISSION OF MANUFACTURER TEST REPORTS, MANUALS & IS

CODE
Contractor has to submit the test reports, manufacturer manual, and

referred IS code /CPWD specification for inspection of material.

10.0 ENGINEER/ FOREMAN
The Contractor shall employ a competent, licensed, qualified full time

electrical engineer (as per schedule- F) to direct the work of electrical
installations in accordance with the drawings & specifications. The
engineer shall be available at site at all times to receive instructions from
the Engineer-in charge for any day to day activities throughout the duration
of the contract. The engineer shall correlate the progress of work in
conjunction with all relevant requirements of the supply authority .The
skilled workers employed for the work should have requisite qualifications
and should posses competency certificate from the Electrical Inspectorate.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR NON SCHEDULE ITEMS
NOTE The items contained in these schedule are composite in

nature, the specification for elements common to those items
are given in these specification for adherence.
1.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF L.T. PANELS AND

DISTRIBUTION PANELS
1.1 GENERAL:
1.1.1 The Panel design shall be of single front cubicle with horizontal bus-bars
mounted at top, extensible on either side. The breaker, instruments and
auxiliary equipments shall be accessible from front. The cable
terminations shall be accessible from the rear side. Medium voltage power
& motor control centers shall be in sheet steel cubicle type enclosure,
floor mounted, free standing type, totally enclosed & compartmentalized
design.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION:
1.2.1 The Panels shall be free standing type, with sheet steel enclosure having
following features.
1.2.2 The panels shall be made out of minimum 2.0-mm thick CRCA sheet
steel. The internal frame shall be made of channels. The panels shall be
dust & vermin proof duly powder coated in approved colour, by seven-
tank process. The degree of protection shall not be less than IP52 as per
relevant IS code. The sheet steel shroud & partitions shall be of minimum
1.6-mm thickness. All sheet steelwork forming the exterior of the panels
shall be smoothly finished, leveled, having rounded corners & free from
any flaws. All doors to be fixed with dust-excluding neoprene gasket with
fasteners designed to ensure proper compression of the gaskets. Where
ever covers are provided instead of doors, sufficient and generous
overlap shall be ensured between sheet steel surface with gaskets &
closely placed fasteners to preclude the entry of dust.
1.2.3 The following minimum clearances have to be maintained after taking into
consideration connecting clamps & bolts etc. :
i) Between Phases -32 mm.
ii) Between Phases & Neutral -26 mm.
iii) Between Phases & Earth -26 mm.
iv) Between Neutral & Earth -26 mm.
1.2.4 Each section shall be divided into 3 compartments, enclosing either Air
Circuit Breakers or MCCBs or On Load Change over switch fuse units or
Switch Fuse / Fuse Switch Units or Auxiliary equipments. Maximum of 2
tier ACB compartments shall be provided in one section. All functional
units such as MCCB shall be arranged in multi-tier formation & each such
unit shall be fully compartmentalised. A vertical cable alley of at least 300
mm width shall be provided to serve one / two vertical sections of feeders.
Cable alley shall have hinged doors & suitable cable clamping
arrangement with slotted angles shall be provided in the cable alley.
Similarly, vertical bus bars shall be housed in between two feeder
compartments in a separate bus chamber. The openings between the bus
chambers & feeder compartments shall be covered with Bakelite / hylam
sheet of minimum 2.0 mm thickness. The vertical bus bar chambers shall
be provided with removable bolted covers on the front and the back. All
the interconnecting links to the feeders shall be shrouded so as to avoid
accidental contact, by means of phenolic barriers. Each compartment
shall have its own individual door with concealed hinges & the door shall
have interlocking facility with the feeder unit, also arrangement for by-
passing this facility shall be provided.
1.2.5 All insulating materials used in the construction of the panels shall be of
non-hygroscopic materials, duly treated to withstand the effect of high
humidity & high temperatures.
1.2.6 A standard transportable shipping section shall contain maximum three

sections with length not exceeding 3 m and weight not exceeding 2.5
tones.
1.3 BUSBARS :
1.3.1 The busbars shall be of 31MVA rupturing capacity, suitable for 3 phases,
4 wires, 415 Volts, 50 Hz AC supply. The bus bars shall be made of high
conductivity & high strength aluminium confirming to the requirement of
E91E of IS 5082. The busbars shall have uniform cross section
throughout the length & shall be designed for carrying rated current
continuously throughout the length. The cross-section of the neutral
busbar shall be same as that of the phase busbar for busbars of capacity
up to 200 Amp; for higher capacities, the neutral busbar shall not be less
than half (50%) the cross-section of that of the phase busbars. The
busbars & links shall be designed for a maximum temperature of 75

degree celsius.
1.3.2 Bus-bars shall be supported on suitable non-hygroscopic, non-

combustible, material such as DMC / SMC at sufficiently close intervals to
prevent busbar sag. Ridges shall be provided on these supports to
prevent tracking between adjacent busbars. Large clearances & creepage
distances shall be provided on the busbar system to minimize the
possibility of fault. All busbar joints shall be provided with high tensile
steel bolts (electroplated with Nickel / Cadmium), spring washers & nuts
so as to ensure good contact. The joints shall be formed with fishplates on
either side of the busbars to provide adequate contact area. Bus supports
shall be provided on either sides of the joints (max. unsupported distance
from the joint shall be 400 mm).
1.3.3 Power shall be distributed to feeders in dual section by a set of vertical

busbars (phase & neutral). Individual module shall be connected to this
vertical busbar through sleeved connections. All busbars shall be
insulated with PVC tapes / tubes (heat shrink type) with colour coding
(Red / Blue / Yellow / Black).
1.3.4 The busbars & the connections to the functional circuits from the busbars
& their supports shall be able to withstand thermal & dynamic stresses
without any damage or deformation, due to the system short circuits. The
neutral and the earthbar should also be capable of withstanding the above
level.
1.3.5 The contractor shall furnish calculations along with his drawings
establishing the adequacy of busbars both for continuous duty & short
circuit rating. The panel manufacturer should have CPRI test certificate for
IP52 & short circuit rating.
1.4 AIR CIRCUIT BEAKERS
The standard draw out ACB shall have two parts namely:
i) Draw out carriage with TP / FP incoming & outgoing power terminals &
Controls sliding contacts.
ii) Basic breaker with mechanism & releases mounted on sliding rails. The
sliding contacts shall be provided for control circuit.
iii) When the ACB is in test position, the power circuit shall be disconnected
and control circuits shall be engaged through sliding contacts.
iv) This test position shall permit a ready inspection of all the mechanism,
interlocks, automatic devices and electrical indicators.
v) Automatic safety shutters shall be provided for personal safety against

accidental live contact to terminal when the breaker is fully drawn out.

vi) The incoming terminals of the breakers shall be connected to the bus-bar
by suitable links. The outgoing terminals shall be extended in the cable
chamber for direct Bus Trunking / cable connections. These shall be
identified by colored PVC tape /paint, wherever required link extension to
form bus-duct entry from top shall also be provided. Adequate shrouding
and caution notice plate shall be provided to prevent the accidental
contact to live terminals.
vii) The ACBs shall be mounted on the channel frame and shall be partitioned
at the top by insulated barrier on the either side by sheet metal barrier
with necessary cutout for power linking for control wiring. The control
equipment, fuses, timers, contactors, etc., shall be laid out in standard
fashion on a painted base plate and fixed with screws to the frame at
appropriate location.
viii) Each ACB module compartment shall be provided with front access door
made out of 14SWG (2 mm.) sheet steel. All closing and opening
operation of ACB (mechanically or electrically) of draw out ACB up to test
position shall be performed from the front without opening the door. The
breaker can be left in TEST position with the door fully closed.
ix) Basic instrument such as ammeter, voltmeter with selector switch, Lights
and Meters such as KW, Hz, PF, if specified, shall be provided in a
separate module compartment. Meters/relays shall be identified with
feeder identification name plates when they are located away from feeder
module.
x) Suitable inscription plates shall be provided to identify the feeders,

function of the doors mounted devices and caution plate shall be provided
at appropriate locations.
xi) Cubicle illuminating Light, 240V, 6A, 3 pin plug and socket shall be
provided with MCB for protection in cable chamber a standard item in
each compartment.
xii) Suitable M.S. removable, un-drilled gland plates shall be provided. For
single core cables non magnetic gland plates shall be provided.
1.4.1 Safety Interlocks
The following safety interlock shall be provided for each module:
i) When ACB is ON door cannot be opened - electrically or mechanically.

(Defeat interlock to be provided.)
ii) Padlocking in OFF position (locks to be provided)
iii) Castle interlocks for feeder co-ordination as per B.O.Q. / Drawings.

iv) ACB shall be fitted with all the accessories & safety devices mainly,
automatic safety shutters, arc chutes, auxiliary contacts, CT s with dual
ratio / multiple taps etc.
v) Detachable arc chutes shall be provided on all the poles & having tool
less removal/fitting & interlocking with breaker operation.
1.4.2 The Air Circuit Breaker shall be Horizontal draw out or non-draw out type
as indicated in the Schedule of Quantities.
The air circuit breakers shall comply with IS 13947 and type tested &
certified form recognized test authorities like CPRI.
The air circuit breakers shall have 100% certified rating when mounted in
the panel. (All de-rating factors shall be clearly indicated by the contractor
in his offer).
The air circuit breakers shall be (as indicated in the schedule of

quantities) either manually operated or with motor operated store
charged, spring closing mechanism in which case the motor shall be
suitable for 230V A.C. supply. The motorized mechanism shall charge a
closing spring upon circuit connection. This charged spring may be
electrically or manually released effecting the closer of the breaker. The
closing spring shall automatically be recharged for the next closing
command. An Operator shall also be in position to manually charge the
closing spring. The spring condition `Charged' or `Free' shall be visible
through the indicator.
The draw-out type ACBs shall have 3 distinct positions Service / Test /
Isolated.
Rated service breaking capacity (ICS) =100% ICU =ICW shall be

minimum 50 ka rms for one second at 415 volts, 50 Hz and rated short
time withstand (ICW) should be equal as ICS latest type test certificates
shall be provided on similar rating.
ACB shall be fully rated at ambient temperature of 50 degree Celsius.
ACB opening and closing time should be as minimum as possible.
ACB should be provided with self powered microprocessor based

releases along with required CTs & wiring having mainly following inbuilt
features along with other standard features as per BIS or as per BOQ.
i) Over load, short circuit & earth fault protection with high set.
ii) Displays for all the parameters on front.
iii) Computer compatible on front and fitted with RS-485 port & should be
operable from the fascia of releases and from computer.
iv) Discrimination.
v) Measurement & display of phase & neutral currents.
vi) Neutral protection / Relay.
vii) Indication through LEDS.

viii) Annunciation.
ix) Event recording & fault history.
x) Time delay Current setting 50% to 100%.
Electrical and Mechanical life of the ACB shall be minimum 20000

operations for ACB ratting up to 2500 Amps & 10000 operations for ACB
rating 3200 A & above.
Displays information of all electric accessories on front fascia of ACB.
Easy tool less fixing of releases from front along with other accessories.
Easy on site conversion of electric spring charging, fixed to draw out

version, Quick termination of control wires.
ACB terminal sizes shall be as per IS-13947 should be suitable for

aluminium and copper links directly.
Depth & Height should be uniform for all the ratting of ACB.
Manual ON- OFF with indication.
ACB should be provided with door interlock.
Pole design should be such to ensure lower watt loss & energy saving
watt loss to be informed by supplier for approvals.
ACB for DG set shall be provided with reverse power relay.

The breaker shall meet IP 53 /54 Protection.
All 4pole ACB to have full rated neutral pole.
ACB can be tested from remote & from local on test position of ACB i.e.
operation & electrical interlock etc.
Fault lock out/anti-pumping device shall be provided on each breaker so

that it could not be re-closed after tripping on fault without manual
resetting being done.
The incoming and the outgoing breakers shall be provided either with
microprocessor / static trip release as per BOQ, integrally mounted on the
breakers / or other suitable relays. This release / relays should have the
following adjustments:
i) Over current pick-up.

ii) Inverse tripping time at 6 times the current setting.
iii) Short time delay pick-up at various current settings.
iv) Short time delay - instantaneous.
v) Earth fault pick-up at various current settings.
vi) Earth fault delay - instantaneous.
The incoming breaker shall also have an under-voltage the voltage of

which shall be calibrated for pick-up and drop off in accordance with IS
2576 1977.
The breakers being used as bus couplers shall be without integral

release.
The air circuit breaker being used as incomer shall have the following
accessories, indications, and meters, provided on its housing and as per
BOQ;
i) 3 No. Phase indicating Lights.
ii) 1 No. power factor meter 0.5-1-0.5 range or as per BOQ.
iii) 1 No. 0-500 V range voltmeter with selector switch or as per BOQ.
iv) 1 No. ammeter of suitable range and C.T.s as indicated on the
drawings with selector switch or as per BOQ.
v) 4 No.s Indicating Lights for the following;
a) Red for ACB ON.

b) Green for ACB OFF.
c) Orange for Auto Trip.
d) Blue for Spring Charged.
vi) Spring return T-N-C breaker operating switch,
a) Yellow for trip alarm cancellation.

b) Blue for Non Trip alarm cancellation.
The air circuit breaker being used on out going feeder shall have the
following accessories, indications, meters, provided on its housing and as
per BOQ;
i) 1 No. ammeter of suitable range and C.T.s as indicated on the

drawings with selector switch or as per BOQ.
ii) 4 No.s Indicating Lights for the following;
a) Red for ACB ON.

c) Orange for Auto Trip.
d) Blue for Spring Charged.
iii) Spring return T-N-C breaker operating switch.

iv) 3 No. Phase indicating Lights.
The air circuit breaker being used as Bus Coupler shall have the following
accessories, indications, meters, provided on its housing;
i) 2 No.s Indicating Lights for the following;
a) Red for ACB ON.

ii) Spring return T-N-C breaker operating switch,
1.5 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BEAKERS

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be incorporated in the Panels where
ever specified. MCCBs shall conform to IS13947-2, EC-947-2-1989 in all
respects. MCCBs shall be suitable for three phase 415 Volts.
The MCCB cover and case shall be made of high strength heat treatment
and flame retardant thermo-setting insulating material. extending type
Operating handle shall be quick make/quick break, trip-free type and shall
have suitable ON ,OFF & TRIP indicators .MCCBs shall have common
operating handle for simultaneous operation and tripping of all poles. Door
rotary mechanism with door interlock facility & extendable handle.
MCCBs shall be provided with phase barriers
Suitable extinguishing device shall be provided for each contact. Tripping

unit shall be of thermal-magnetic type provided in each pole and
connected by a common trip bar such that tripping of any one pole
operates all the poles to open simultaneously. The thermal-magnetic
device shall have IDMT characteristics for sustained over loads and short
circuits.
Contact tips shall be made of suitable arc resistant, sintered alloy for long
electrical life. Terminals shall be of liberal design with adequate
clearances.
The MCCBs shall have a Breaking capacity of not less than 25kA RMS at
415 volts or otherwise specified. For all MCCBs Ics=ICU=100%.
Original test certificates of all MCCBs as per IEC and IS shall be

furnished.
1.6 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS FOR METERING

GENERAL
o Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conforming to IS

1248. The accuracy of direct reading shall be 1.0 for voltmeter and
1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments shall have accuracy of
1.5. The errors due to variations in temperature shall be limited to a
minimum. The meter shall be enclosed in a dust tight housing. The
housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. The design and
manufacture of the meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of
instruments glass. Instruments meters shall be sealed in such a way
that access to the measuring element and to the accessories within
the case shall not be possible without removal of the seal. The meters
shall be provided with white dials and black scale markings.

o The pointer shall be black in colour and shall have zero position
adjustment device which could be operated from outside. The
direction of deflection shall be from left to right.
o Suitable selector switches shall be provided for all ammeters and

voltmeters intended to be used on three phase supply.
o The specifications herein after laid down shall also cover all the
meters, instruments and protective devices required for the electrical
works.The ratings-type and quantity of meters, instruments and
protective devices shall be as per the schedule of quantities.
AMMETERS
Digital ammeter shall be with solid state circuit having bright Red 31/2
digit LED display readable from distance .The single phase & three phase
parameters should be displayed & read by selection selector switch .The
meters should be with built in transducers and field settable standard of
full scale for amperage. Class of accuracy shall not be less than 1.0.
o Analogue ammeters shall be moving iron or moving coil type. The

moving part assembly shall be with jewel bearing. The jewel bearing
shall be mounted on a spring to prevent damage to pivot due to
vibrations and shocks, the ammeters shall be manufactured and
calibrated as per the latest edition of IS: 1248. Ammeters shall be
instrument transformer operated and shall be suitable for 5A
secondary of instrument transformer. The scales shall be calibrated
to indicate primary current, unless otherwise specified.
o All digital & analogue ammeters shall be instrument transformer

operated and shall be suitable for 5A secondary of instrument
transformer. The ammeters shall be capable of carrying sustained
overloads during fault condition without damage or loss of accuracy.
VOLTMETERS
o Digital Voltmeter shall be with solid state circuit having bright Red
31/2 digit LED display readable from distance .The single phase &
three phase parameters should be displayed & read by selection
selector switch .The meters should be with built in transducers and
field settable standard of full scale for voltage. Class of accuracy shall
not be less than 1.0.
o Analogue Voltmeter shall be of moving iron or moving coil type. The

range for 415 volts, 3 phase voltmeters shall be 0 to 500 volts.
Suitable selector switch shall be provided for each voltmeter to read
voltage between any two lines of the system. The voltmeter shall be
provided with protection fuse of suitable capacity.

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
o Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS: 2705 (Part I, II &

III) in all respects. All current transformers used for medium voltage
applications shall be rated for 1kv. Current transformers shall have
rated primary current, rated burden and class of accuracy as required.
However the rated secondary current shall be 5 A unless otherwise
specified. The acceptable minimum class of various applications shall
be as given below:
Measuring : Class 1.
Protection : Class 5 P10.
o Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without

damage, magnetic and thermal stresses due to short circuit fault of
50KA on medium voltage system. Terminals of the current
transformers shall be marked permanently for easy identification of
poles. Separate CT shall be provided for measuring instruments and
protection relays. Each C.T. shall be provided with rating plate.
o Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily

accessible for inspection, maintenance and replacement. The wiring
for CTs shall be copper conductor, FRLS insulated wires with proper
termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and
fixed to the panel structure in a neat manner.
o The current transformers to be selected for this panel will have at

least 20% extra VA capacity available over the normal capacity based
on the following details:
- For ammeters : 3VA

- For current coils of KW & KWH : 5VA
- For current coils of PF. meters : 5VA
- For all recorders : 5VA
- For all normal wiring : 2VA
- For current coil of protection relays : 10VA
Under no circumstances the VA rating of the CTs will be less than 15 VA.
1.7 MISCELLANEOUS
Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type with escutcheon
plates clearly marked to show the operating position. They shall be semi-
flush mounting with only the front plate and operating handle projecting.
Indicating Lights shall be of the multiple LED type of low watt
consumption, provided with series resistor where necessary, and with
translucent light covers. Bulbs & lenses shall be easily replaced from the
front.

Push buttons shall be of the momentary contact, push to actuate type

fitted with self reset contacts & provided with integral escutcheon plates
marked with its functions.
1.8 CABLE TERMINATIONS
Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the switch board to suit
the number, type and size of aluminium conductor power cables and
copper conductor control cable specified.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required

through separate removable gland plates. Generous size of cabling
chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland and terminals
such that cables can be easily and safely terminated.
Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the

terminals of one circuit without accidentally touching that of another live
circuit.
Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of

rated short circuit currents without damage and without causing
secondary faults.
1.9 CONTROL WIRING
All control wiring shall be carried out with 1000/660V grade single core
PVC/FRLS cable conforming to IS 694/ IS 8130 having stranded copper
conductors of minimum 1.5sq.mm for potential circuits and 2.5sq.mm for
current transformer circuits. Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately
supported and properly routed to allow for easy access and maintenance.
Wiring shall be identified by numbering ferrules at each end. All control
fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily
accessible.
1.10 TERMINAL BLOCKS
Terminal blocks shall be 500Volts grade. Insulating barriers shall be

provided between adjacent terminals. Terminal blocks for Power Circuits
shall have a suitable current rating (minimum of 10Amp) and of the stud
type. as per the cable schedule and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall
be made for label inscriptions.
Terminals for control circuits shall be of spring loaded, screw-less type.
1.11 LABELS
Labels shall be of anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black

background. They shall be properly secured with fasteners.

1.12 TESTS AT MANUFACTURES WORK
All routine tests specified in IS: 8623-1993 shall be carried out and test
certificates submitted to the Engineer In charge.
1.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Commissioning checks and tests shall be included all wiring checks and
checking up of connections. Primary/Secondary injection tests for the
relays adjustment/setting shall be done before commissioning in addition
to routine megger test. Checks and test shall include the following.
a) Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.
b) Interlocking function check.
c) Insulation test: When measured with 1000V megger, the insulation
resistance shall not be less than 100 mega ohms.
d) Trip tests & protection gear test.
e) Continuity test
2.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.

2.1. GENERAL:
Distribution boards for power and light circuit distribution shall be factory
built and shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase or 230 volts single phase
supply as specified in BOQ. The distribution boards shall conform to IS
8623 (for factory built assembles)
2.2 TYPE:
Distribution Board shall be double door type suitable for flush installation.
The boards shall be of cabinet design, totally enclosed and shall provide
protection against ingress to IP 42/ IP43 of IS 2147. However, if none of
the types available from the approved makes meets the above
requirement, alternative makes can be offered with technical literature and
copy of test certificate with the approval of the Engineer In charge.
2.3. COMPONENTS:
Distribution boards shall generally be provided with the following major
components:-
a. Miniature circuit breakers
b. Residual current circuit breaker.
c. Insulated Bus Bars
d. Neutral links/bus
e. Earth Bus
f. Loose Wire Box
Distribution board shall be provided with MCB and or Residual current

circuit breaker as mentioned in drawings and BOQ. Residual current
(earth leakage) circuit breaker shall be current operated type and of 30mA
sensitivity unless otherwise stated. RCCB shall be mounted within
distribution board box. Distribution board box, MCBs, RCCBs used shall
be of one same manufacturer/make. Standard size DB manufactured by
approved manufacturer shall be used. In case size specified in BOQ is

not standard size of manufacturer, in that case next higher standard size
distribution board box shall be used with incoming & outgoing MCB as
specified in BOQ. Additional cutout/space for outgoing MCB shall be
plugged with blank plates. No extra cost shall be paid for using
bigger/higher size distribution board box and blank plates.
2.4. Miniature circuit Breakers:
Miniature Circuit Breakers for lighting circuits shall be of B curve.

Where as the circuits feeding discharge lamps (HPMV / MH / HPSV)
halogen lamps, all power outlet points, equipment/machinery shall be
of C Curve (Motor circuit) types. All miniature circuit breakers shall
be of 10 KA rated rupturing capacity unless otherwise stated. MCBs
shall generally conform to IS 8828. The miniature circuit breakers shall
be suitable for snap fixing on a standard DIN rail. The MCBs shall be
suitable for operating under full load under ambient temperature
condition (i.e. 10 Dg C to 55 Dg C in India).
MCBs shall have terminals suitable for receiving Aluminium cables of

adequate cross-section (upto 32 Amp rating 16 sq mm and for 40, 50,
63 Ampere rating 35 sq mm cable). Three phase MCBs shall have
common trip bar so that all the poles make and break simultaneously.
Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make & quick break type with
trip free mechanism. MCB shall have thermal & magnetic short circuit
protection.
2.5 RESIDUAL CURRENT Circuit Breakers:

Residual current leakage circuit breakers shall be used as incomers in
distribution boards only wherever specially called for in BOQ, RCCB
shall be suitable for incorporation in standard DB manufactured by the
approved manufactures. RCCB shall be of core balance type and shall
not cause nuisance tripping the RCCB shall be rated for 30mA fault
circuit tripping. RCCB shall be provided with test push button to test
the healthiness of the circuit.
2.6. Bus Bars
The bus bars shall be flameproof insulated copper and duly tinned or
plated. The bus bar rating shall be at least 100 amperes.
Three phase DBs shall have single piece bus bar and coupling link
avoiding drilling and bolting of bus bars.
However, if the above ùnique bus bars' system is not available from
the approved manufacturers alternative makes can be offered with full
technical particulars.
Neutral busbars shall be provided with the same number of terminals

as there are single ways on the board, in addition to the terminals for
incoming mains. An earth bar of similar size as the neutral bar shall
also be provided. Phase barrier shall be fitted and all live parts shall
be screened from the front.
2.7. CABINET
The DB cabinet shall be made of at least 1.6mm thick sheet steel duly
stove enameled or powder coated (as per standards manufacturing
product). The cabinet shall be suitable for either recess mounting or
surface mounting. The cabinet shall be provided with conduit / cable
entry knockouts at top and bottom or plates shall be of detachable
construction. The cabinet shall be dust and vermin proof with proper
gaskets for the front door.
The DB cabinet and internal mounting arrangement shall be such that

the entire bus and MCB assembly can be easily detachable from the
cabinet.
Distribution Board shall be double door type and suitable for flush
installation. All distribution boards shall be of three phase (415 Volts),
[Three row 24/30/42 Module, 4 Pole modular I/C] or single phase (240
volts) [One row 8/10/14 Module] type with incoming MCB and/or
RCCB as in Schedule of quantities. Three phase DBs shall have 4Pole
MCB as incommer (this MCB shall not be accommodated in the three
rows) and each row shall have one 2PoleRCCBand balance MCBs or
Blanking plates. e.g. A 3 row, 24 module DB shall have 1 No. 4Pole
MCB as incommer, 3 No. 2Pole RCCB / ELCBs (one for each phase)
and 18 No. SP MCBs or Blanking Plates. (Six for each
phase).Similarly a Single Phase DB shall have a 2Pole MCB as
incomer and 2PoleRCCBand balance MCBs or Blanking plates.
Ample clearance shall be provided between all live metal and the earth
case and adequate space for all incoming and outgoing cables. All
distribution board enclosures shall have an etched zinc base stove
painted followed by synthetic stove enameling, colour light grey.
2.8. DIRECTORY
Distribution boards shall be provided with a write and protect directory

indicating the area of loads served by each circuit breakers, the rating
of breakers, size of conductors etc. The directory shall be in front of
the cabinet.
2.9. INSTALLATION:
Distribution boards shall be surface mounted or recessed mounted as

required. DBs shall be mounted at the locations as shown on the
approved execution drawings.
Surface boards shall be fixed with suitable angle iron clamps and bolts. All
the cables/conduits shall be properly terminated using glands/ check nuts
etc. Wiring shall be properly terminated using crimping lugs/ sockets and
PVC identification ferrules. Distribution boards shall be bonded to the
earth at least at two points using brass bolts and lugs. Suitable name
plate and danger plate, indicating the voltage shall be fixed to the front
cover.
2.10. TESTING:
Distribution boards shall be tested at factory as per I.S. 8623 and original
test certificate shall be furnished.
3.0 Battery Charger with Batteries
3.1 Batteries:
The Battery shall be lead acid stationary type with Plane or Tubular
positive plates 24 volts consisting of 12 cells of 2 V each, 180 AH each
with capacity @ 10 hours rate of discharge to and voltage of 1.85 volt per
cell supplied complete with inter cell connectors acid level indication floats
dry charger conforming to IS: 1651 double row two tier execution
arranged in wooden stand and insulators with following accessories: -
Syringe type hydrometer - 1 No

Spanner - 1 No
Acid resistive funnel - 1 No
Acid resistant jug of two pints capacity - 1 No
Rubber syringe - 1 No
Connectors from battery of charger - 1 No
Voltmeter (-3.0 + 3 V) with lead - 1 No
Electrolyte shall be filled as per manufactures instructions. Inter row

connections shall be made with lead Charging discharging and recharging
cycles of batteries shall be carried out under supervision of the Engineer
in charge. Suitable device for discharging shall be provided by the
contractor.
3.2 Battery Charger
The battery charger shall be natural air cooled, solid state type with full
wave, fully controlled, bridge configuration. Charger shall be provided with
automatic voltage regulation, current limiting circuitry, smoothing filter
circuit and soft start feature. The voltage control shall be step less,
smooth and continuous. It shall be self protecting against all AC and DC
transients and steady state abnormal current and voltages. The Charger
AC input and DC output shall be electrically isolated from each other and
also from panel ground. Isolation shall also be provided between power
and control circuits. Self contained battery charger with housing suitable
for 24 volts 180 AH with incoming supply 230 V AC floating supply voltage
2.18 V per cell. The Charger Panel shall be made of sheet metal of
thickness not less than 2mm and shall conform to protection IP: 44.
Switches, Meters, Relays, etc shall be flush mounted on the front of the
panel. The charger shall be designed for continuous output of 10 A
complete with following accessories:
AC input toggles switch with fuse.

Pilot lamp to indicate AC mains ON
Variac for step less DC output.
Double wound impregnated naturally air cooled single phase
transformer.
a) Ballast choke to give trickle charge.
b) Float cum boost charger.
Single phase full wave bridge connected silicon rectified stack.
Moving coil ammeter and voltmeter of Dc output.
DC fuses.
3.3 Capacitors
Power factor correction capacitors shall confirm in all respects to BS. The
capacitors shall be suitable for 3 phase 500 V Hz and shall be available in
units of 25 & 50 KVAR size to form a bank of capacitors of desired
capacity. All these units shall be connected in parallel by means of solid
aluminum bus bars of adequate current carrying capacity. Each capacitor
bank shall be provided with a terminal chamber and cable gland suitable
for PVC insulated aluminum conductor armoured cables. Two separate
earthling terminals shall be provided for earth connection for each bank.
Capacitor of 500 V shall be suitably rated in series with 189 Hz Harmonic

block reactor to offer requisite rating of 25 & 50 KVAR at 433 Volts.
Capacitor so chosen shall be able to suppress the harmonics generated
in the system due to various utilities viz. computers, drivers and flour cent
lamps etc and shall avoid resultant unbalancing of load.
The capacitor bank shall be subject to routine tests as specified in

relevant Indian standards and the test certificate shall be furnished the
capacitor shall be suitable for indoor use up to ambient temperature of +
50 & - 20 degree C. The permissible over loads shall be as given below:-
a) Voltage overload shall be 10% for continuous operation and 15%

for 6 hours in 24 hours cycle.
b) Current overload 15% for continuous and 50% for 6 hours in 24
hours cycle.
c) Overload 30% for continuous and 45% for 6 hours in 24 hour
cycle.
The capacitor bank shall be floor mounting type. Capacitor shall be of

aluminum foil and craft paper hermetically sealed in sturdy corrosion
proof sheet steel 2mm thick containers and impregnated with non-
inflammable synthetic liquid. Every element of capacitor unit shall be
provided with its own built in silvered fuse. Capacitor shall have suitable

discharge device to reduce the residual voltage from crest value of the
rated voltage to 50V or less with in 1 minute after capacitor is connected
from the source of supply. The loss factor of capacitor shall not exceed
permissible value as per BS. The capacitors shall with stand voltage of
2500 V AC supply for 1 minute. Insulation resistance between capacitor
terminals and containers when test voltage of 500V is applied shall not be
less than 50M Ohms.
The capacitor control panel shall generally comprise the following:-

i) Automatic power factor correction relay time relay.
ii) Step controller with reversing motor.
iii) Time delay and no volt relays.
iv) Protection fuses.
v) Contractor for individual capacitors of suitable rating.
vi) Change over switch for either automatic operation of manual operation
with push control.
vii) CTs with ammeter and selector switch.
viii)Voltmeter with selector switch.
Above shall be housed in sheet steel enclosure cubical type free standing
front operated with lockable doors. The panel shall be fabricated from
CRCA sheet steel of 1.6mm thick and shall be folded and braced as
necessary to provided a support for all components joints of any kind in
sheet steel be seem welded. Panel shall have IP 42 or more protection
and to be equipped with necessary heat dissipation arrangement. It shall
be totally enclosed design completely dust tight and vermin proof.
Neoprene gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall
be used for the purpose.
3.4 LT BUS DUCT:

Totally enclosed low impedance ventilated electrolytic copper conductor
bus duct sandwich type shall be used between transformer secondary and
incoming of LT panel as well as from DG alternators to incoming of LT
panel. Conductor size shall suit the bus bar rating of 1800 A and 500 A at
400 V AC supply. Rated short circuit withstand capacity for 1 sec shall not
be less than 60 kA and the max. temperature rise permissible shall be 55
degree C above an ambient of 40 degree C. Bus duct shall be suitable for
three phase four wire system. Neutral conductor shall be full capacity as
the phase conductor. Each conductor shall be insulated minimum class B
insulation over its entire length. The bus duct shall be complete with
necessary bends, flanges, adopter boxes, offsets, flexible joints, end
covers and MS supports for hanging arrangement as per approved
drawings and requirement at site. . Double earth bar of aluminum shall run
along the entire bus duct. Degree of protection for the bus duct shall be
minimum IP-54. contacts shall be silver plated at joints and tap off points.
Bus bar trunking should pass seismic test certified complying with UBC
seismic Zone-4 conditions by any international recognized body.

4.0 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

4.1 GENERAL:
Medium voltage distribution system shall be applicable for wiring 3 phase,
4 wire 415 volts. 50 Hz, AC supply and single phase, 2 wire 230 volts, 50
Hz, AC supply.
This section covers the general technical requirements & measurement of

the various components in internal electrical installation works.
4.2 REGULATION & STANDARDS:
4.2.1 The system shall be governed by the requirements of IS: 732 and I.E.
Rules and NEC.IS Standards and Codes applicable for medium voltage
distribution is also listed in specification.
4.2.2 The definitions of terms shall be in accordance with IS: 732-1989 (Indian
Standard Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring), except for the definitions
of point, circuit, & sub-main wiring, which are defined in clauses hereunder.
5.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR L.T CABELS
5.1 GENERAL
L.T. Cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid tested and commissioned

in accordance with drawings, specifications, relevant Indian Standards
specifications and cable manufacturers instructions. The cable shall be
delivered at site in original drums with manufacturers name clearly
written on the drums. The recommendations of the cable manufacturer
with regard to jointing and sealing shall be strictly followed.
5.2 MATERIALS
The L.T. Power cables shall be XLPE insulated PVC sheathed type
aluminum conductor armored cable conforming to IS : 7098 : 1988 (Part-
I) with up to date amendments where as control cable shall be XLPE
insulated and PVC sheathed copper conductor armored / unarmored
cable conforming to IS:7098 (Part-I) 1988.
5.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
Cables shall be laid directly in ground, pipes, masonry ducts, on cable

tray, surface of wall/ceiling etc. as indicated on drawings and/or as per
the direction of Engineer-In-Charge. Cable laying shall be carried out as
per CPWD specifications.
5.4 INSPECTION
All cables shall be inspected at factory premises before dispatch at site

and checked for any damage during transit.
5.5 JOINTS IN CABLES
The Contractor shall take care to see that the cables received at site are
apportioned to various locations in such a manner as to ensure
maximum utilization and avoiding of cable joints. This apportioning shall
be got approved from Engineer-In-Charge before the cables are cut to
lengths.
5.6 LAYING CABLES IN GROUND
Cables shall be laid by skilled experienced workmen using adequate

rollers to minimize stretching of the cables. The cable drums shall be
placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. With great care it shall be
unrolled on over wooden rollers placed in trenches at intervals not
exceeding 2 meters. Cables shall be laid at depth of 0.75 meters below
ground level. A cushion of sand total of 250mm shall be provided both
above and below the cable, joint boxes and other accessories. Cable
shall not be laid in the same trench or alongside a water main.
The cable shall be laid in excavated trench over 80mm layer of sand
cushion. The relative position of the cables, laid in the same trench shall
preserved. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes,
the cables shall be bent smooth with a radius of bent not less than 12
times the diameter of cables. Minimum 3 meter long loop shall be
provided at both end of cable.
Distinguishing marks may be made on the cable ends for identifications
of phases. Insulation tapes of appropriate voltage and in red, yellow and
blue colors shall be wrapped just below the sockets for phase
identifications.
5.7 PROTECTION OF CABLES
The cables shall be protected by bricks laid on the top layer of the sand
for the full length of underground cable. Where more than one cables is
laid in the same trench, the bricks shall cover all the cables and shall
project a minimum of approximately 80mm on either side of the cables.
Cable under road crossings and any other places subject to heavy traffic,
shall be protected by running them through Hume Pipes of suitable size.
5.8 EXCAVATION & BACK FILL

All excavation and back fill required for the installation of the cables shall
be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the drawings and
requirements laid down elsewhere. Trenches shall be dug true to line
and grades. Back fill for trenches shall be filled in layer not exceeding
150mm. Each layer shall be properly rammed and consolidated before
laying the next layer.
The Contractor shall restore all surfaces, roadways, sidewalks, Krebs

wall or the works cut by excavation to their original condition to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
5.9 LAYING OF CABLES ON CABLE TRAY/SURFACE OF WALL/CEILING
Cable shall be laid on G.I. perforated Cable tray. Cables shall be properly
dressed before cable ties/clamps are fixed. Wherever cable tray is not
proposed, cables shall be fixed on surface of wall or ceiling slab by
suitable MS clamps/ saddles. Care shall be taken to avoid crossing of
cable.
5.10 TESTING OF CABLES
Prior to installation, burying of cables, following tests shall be carried out.

Insulation test between phases, phase & neutral, phase & earth for each
length of cable.
5.10 Before laying.
5.11 After laying.
5.12 After Jointing
On completion of cable laying work, the following tests shall be

conducted in the presence of the Engineer-In-Charge.
a. Insulation Resistance Test (Sectional and overall).
b. Continuity Resistance Test.
c. Earth Test.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Indian Standard
code of practice and Indian Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall
provide necessary instruments, equipments and labour for conducting
the above tests & shall bear all expenses of conducting such tests.
6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING

6.1 SCOPE
This section covers the essential requirements of earthing system

components and their installation. for details not covered in these
specifications, IS Code of Practice on Earthing (IS : 3043-1987) shall be
referred to.
6.2 APPLICATION :
i) The electrical distribution system is with earthed neutral (i.e. neutral

earthed at the transformer/ generator end). In addition to the neutral
earthing, provision is made for earthing the metallic body of
equipments and non-current carrying metallic components in the

substation, as well as in the internal/ external electrical installations.
ii) Earthing system is also required for lightning protection, computer

installations etc. for function reasons.
iii) Earthing requirements are laid down in Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
as amended from time to time, and in the Regulations of the
Electricity Supply Authority concerned. These shall be complied with.
7.0 TESTING OF INSTALLATION

7.1 SCOPE
This section describes the details of test to be conducted in the

completed internal electrical installation, before commissioning.
7.2 GENERAL:
7.1.1 TESTS
On completion of installation, the following tests shall be carried out:-
i) Insulation resistance test.

ii) Polarity test of switch.
iii) Earth continuity test.
iv) Earth electrode resistance test.
7.1.2 WITNESSING OF TESTS
Testing shall be carried out for the completed installations, in the

presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge by the
Contractor.
7.3 TEST CERTIFICATE
On completion of an electrical installation or an extension to an

installation, a certificate shall be furnished by the Contractor,
countersigned by the certificate supervisor under whose direct
supervision the installation was carried out. The certificate shall be in the
prescribed form in addition to test certificate required by the local
Electricity supply authorities.
FORM OF COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
I/We certify that the installation detailed below has been installed by
me/us and tested and that best of my/ our knowledge and belief it
complies with Indian Electricity Rules 1956, as well as the Contract
Specifications.

Electrical Installation at ______________________________________
Voltage and system of supply _________________________________
8.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
8.1 Lighting Fixtures - General
Luminaries shall be supplied as per the design specified in the Schedule

of Quantities. Luminaries shall be complete in all respects with basic
mounting channel, lamp holders, starter with holder, copper / electronic
ballast, connector block, internal wiring and decorative attachments, if
any.
The light fixtures shall be assembled and installed in position complete

and ready for service in accordance with the detailed drawings,
manufacturers instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer In
charge.
All the materials used in the construction of luminaries shall be of such

quality, design and construction that will provide adequate protection in
normal use, against mechanical, electrical failure/faults and exposure to
the risk of injury or electric shock & shall withstand the effect of exposure
to atmosphere.
A suitable capacitor to improve the power factor of luminaries to at least

0.9 lag shall be provided. Capacitors shall be hermetically sealed.
Erection of fixtures shall include assembling of all components of the

fixtures such as chokes, condensers, starters, igniter, decorative
attachments, etc.
External and road light fittings shall be weather proof fittings of approved
design so as to effectively prevent the admission of moisture. An
insulating distance piece of moisture proof material shall be inserted
between the lamp holder nipple and the fitting. Flexible cord conductors
and cord grip lamp holders must not be used where exposed to weather.
8.2 LAMPS
Lamps shall conform to IS in all respects. Lamps shall be of screw type
pattern. The colour of the light shall be as required & as per BOQ.
8.3 LAMP HOLDERS.

Accessories for light such as lamp holders shall be in conformity with
requirements of relevant IS Specifications & shall be able to sustained
heat generated inside. Only approved make of accessories shall be
supplied.

8.4 BALLASTS
All ballast in general shall be silent in operation. Ballast shall have a long
life and shall be highly reliable High frequency and suitable to work on DG
as well as on inverter power supply, hum free, flicker free, copper ballast
shall be used for lamps. The ballast provided shall be suitable to work on
0.98 power factor on voltages between 180V to 270 V, protection against
spike, high voltage & disturbance in circuit. The ballast shall be tested as
per IS 13021 for high voltage insulation resistance.
8.5 FLOOD LIGHT FIXTURES
The flood light fixtures shall be of the totally enclosed weatherproof
and dust proof type manufactured from aluminum alloy with a stove
enameled finish having minimum rating of IP-55. The fixture shall give
an asymmetric distribution to suit the installation and be complete with
aluminum reflector, lamp holders, heat resisting glass and internal heat
resistant wiring. The fixtures shall be equipped with:
a) 150/2 x 250 / 400 /1000W high pressure sodium lamp

b) 1000W Halogen lamp
c) Aviation obstruction lights.
Internal baffles to aviation standards shall be incorporated in the
lanterns to screen light emission in unwanted directions. It shall also
have the means to facilitate horizontal and vertical adjustments and
looking. Control gears for 150W/250 W / 400 W/1000W HPSV lamps
shall be provided in remote weatherproof boxes. The control gear
boxes shall be fixed to the lantern carriage and so positioned to act as
a counter balance.
HPSV lamps shall be suitable for external use and 220 volt operation.
Ballasts shall be totally enclosed and proofed against condensation,
leak proof and either sealed in heat resisting cable tails or a terminal
block suitably shrouded to prevent live parts being exposed during
operation. They shall be symmetrically wound and be of the solid filled
type and have voltage tapping in suitable steps from 195 volts to 265
volts. They shall comply with standards and suitable for working with
the specified lamp and for mounting on the baseboard of the column.
The capacitance shall be sufficient to produce a power factor of not
less than 0.84. Capacitance shall be as per standards. Ballasts shall
not cause any radio interference or television reception. The contractor
shall be responsible for the correct adjustment of the voltage tapping
at each light position.
The obstruction light fixture shall be of omni directional red in

compliance with ICAO Annex 14 and FAA L-810 specifications. The
light shall be equipped with a Neon spiral lamp having 100,000 hour of
life. in case the main one burns out. All components shall be of cast
aluminum alloy and yellow epoxy painted and suitably protected
against corrosion and the lantern shall be waterproof. Intensity shall
not be less than 3000 candela.
9.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EXTERNAL LIGHTING

9.1 CABLE JOINTS
Cable joints will not be permitted in straight runs of cable.

Junction boxes shall be used for all tee offs as only two / three cables are
permitted within or on any one pole.
9.2 EARTHING
SWG GI earth wire shall be laid with the feeder cables. This GI wire shall
be connected to the earth bar of the appropriate feeder pillar, and shall be
bonded to each metal streetlight pole.
Earth connections will be installed on terminal poles and as indicated on

the drawings
9.3 ERECTION AND POSITIONING

The streetlight poles / lighting towers will be positioned as indicated on the
drawings. Any obstruction or difficulties must be brought to the immediate
attention of the Engineer. Pole/ lighting towers positions shall follow the
line of the road. Poles shall always be positioned in a true line where the
road is straight. The poles shall be fully upright and perpendicular when
viewed from any angle.
The erection procedure shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

Precautions shall be taken to ensure no damage occurs to the poles or
other structure, power line or property in the area.
9.4 STEEL STREETLIGHT POLE

This system includes cable feeding luminaries mounted on galvanized
poles.
The cable must terminate in an internal / external termination box 800 mm

above ground level.
The pole shall be of octagonal cross section, single / double arm out
reach, base plate, with top spigot suitable for fitting a single / two
luminaries/flood lights.
The poles shall be either continuously tapered or made up in sections

pressed together to form neat tapered joints complying with IS 2713-
1980((Part I & II). All steel tubes used in construction of the poles shall
comply with IS1239.
The outreach shall be inclined at 15o to the horizontal, and shall terminate
in 40 mm nominal diameter spigot.

Base bearing plates shall be provided on the foot of each pole.
9.5 POST TOP POLES

Supply and install 65mm dia galvanised steel poles or as specified in
BOQ complete with base plate, 2.5mm2 3Core FRLS / PVC cable,
junction boxes and accessories.
9.6 JUNCTION BOXES

Supply and install a totally weatherproof, outdoor with slanting top or
inside the poles for outdoor uses, corrosion resistant cable joint junction
box.
Suitably rated block connectors (60 Amps) shall be used internally for all
connections. Cables shall be made off using compression glands.
Unused spouts shall be sealed with blanking plugs. The junction box must
contain a 6 Amp 10 kA C curve MCB mounted on DIN rail alongside 4#
60 Amps terminal blocks. Two earth studs suitable for connection of three
10 mm2 cable lugs shall also be provided. A 2.5 mm2 3 core PVC/FRLS
cable is to be used from the terminal box to the lamp. The openings shall
be fitted with a steel cover retained by 1No lockable lock & key and with
two nos. bolts.
The out junction box shall be made out from 1.6mm thick CRCA sheet
steel, duly painted with Epoxy primer & paint in approved shade,
adequately sized for the number and size of cables to be terminated,
mounting clamp fixing arrangement by providing 25x6mm MS strips on
back of the Pole Box , two clamps with hardware for mounting of pole box
on the pole.
9.7 CABLES & EXCAVATIONS

Cables and excavations shall be as specified elsewhere in the relevant
specifications.
This section of the documents shall comprise of the supply and

installation complete including earthing, testing and commissioning of
Flood Lighting for parking areas and approach road through galvanized
steel high masts with lowering lantern carriage and tubular poles with
fixed luminaries all as specified and/or indicated on the drawings. The
work shall generally be carried out in accordance with the CPWD
Specifications.
The distribution boards for this section of the works shall be as specified
in other sections of this specification.
Individual high mast shall have a dedicated earthing system.
The contractor shall submit for the engineers approval full physical,
mechanical and electrical details of the equipment he proposes to use
prior to placement of order. Full details of concrete foundation for high
mast columns as recommended by the manufactures shall also be

submitted for approval.
All concrete foundation shall be provided by others, under a civil

engineering contract unless, specified otherwise. The contractor shall be
required to provide the civil engineering contractor with the approved
details of masts foundation, foundation bolts, template and associated
installation instructions together with accurate mast locations and cable
sleeve requirements plus the sleeves required inclusive bends and boxes.
9.8 Supply System
The supply system for the external lighting installation will be 415/220 V, 3
phase, 4-wire 50 HZ with neutral solidly earthed. The main distribution
panel feeding external lighting supply from the Electric Sub Station shall
be fed to the feeder pillars located near the load centers to minimize the
voltage drop and for even distribution. The feeder pillars shall be rain and
dust proof and suitable for operation in humid atmosphere. They shall be
made of at least 2.0 mm sheet steel having hinged lockable doors. They
shall have pedestals of suitable height which are grounded on concrete
foundation raised above the ground level by 300 mm. Feeder pillars shall
be painted with one coat of water proof paint and two finished coat of
spray stove enamel paint of Grey colour. Feeder pillars shall be complete
with cable boxes, glands, and clamps, for incomer and outgoing cables.
All cables entries shall be from below. All switchgears shall be as per
BOQ. Incomer shall be a 4P MCCB. All openings in the feeder pillar and
distribution boards etc. shall be vermin and rodent proof. The operation of
all external lighting shall be actuated through photosensitive switches
capable of setting at a predetermined level.
9.9 General illumination requirements

General illumination requirements on the road network and parking areas
shall be 15 lux and shall be achieved with high pressure sodium vapor
and tungsten halogen lamps.
For parking areas and cluster of processors, illumination shall be

achieved through 30M/20M high masts and 10 M high GI Octagonal poles
with 250W/400W/2x400W / 1000W & 150W HPSV luminaries shall be
installed on the road network within the ICP as per drawing. Photometric
characteristics of the fixtures offered by the tenderer shall be so chosen
and fixtures arranged so as to give minimum glare to moving motorists
and following minimum illumination levels measured in the horizontal
plane.
A minimum average of 15 lux vertical luminance at a height of 2 meters in

relevant directions.

Each high mast shall be provided with lightning protection to comply with
relevant Indian Standards including providing an earth station adjacent to
each mast with an inspection chamber etc.
Each high mast shall also be provided with a twin obstruction light
mounted on an up stand fixed to the lantern carriage.
Important: Power supply to mast and aviation obstruction lighting lamps

shall be actuated through photocell in a manner that even if mast lighting
is switched off manually, power to obstruction lights would remain on, so
that they could be activated during dark.
9.10 High Masts

The high mast shall be continuously tapered presenting a good visual
appearance. They shall be designed for an assumed maximum reaction
arising from a 3 second gust of 45 m/s measured at a height of 10m from
the ground level. Design shall be such that oscillations caused on account
of wind speed are damped as far as possible and an adequate allowance
is made for the stress due to these oscillations. Full calculations on the
design shall be made available by the manufacture. Masts shall be
constructed from mild steel plates cut and folded to form a multi sided
polygonal section, telescope jointed. Steel used for the construction shall
comply with INDIAN STANDARS of appropriate grade. Welding shall be
of the best possible quality and in accordance with standards. A door
opening of adequate size in the base of each mast shall be provided to
permit clear access to equipment mounted therein complete with a close
fitting vandal resistant weatherproof lockable door.
The base flange shall be free from lamination and welded to the mast the
connection shall develop fully the strength of the section. Supplementary
gussets shall also be provided between bolt holes.
A cable entry of not less than 25 cm. diameter shall be provided centrally
in each base plate to coincide with the cable duct in the mast foundation.
Any space left between the underside of the mast base plate and the top
of the foundation shall be dry packed with cement mortar.
Masts shall be delivered to site in manageable section and joined onsite.

The manufacture shall supply detailed instruction relating to site
assembly. Bolted connections shall not be permitted.
Holding down blots shall be supplied complete with anchor plates for
casting into the foundation. They shall be guaranteed performance
medium tensile steel bolts. A precision made steel template with tubed
holes to ensure correct vertical and horizontal bolt alignment shall also be
provided. The entire mast shall be hot dip galvanized internally and
externally in accordance with IS specification unless manufactured from
intrinsically non-corrosive steel.

For installation and maintenance purposes it shall be possible to raise or

lower the lantern carriage using a double drum winch in the base of mast.
The steel wire rope supporting the canteen carriage shall be in tension at
all times. The top pulley assembly shall be of large diameter, pulleys
appropriate to the multicore flexible cable being used. Sufficient pulleys
shall be provided to cater for the requisite number of riser cables as well
as steel wire ropes. They shall be of non-corrodible material and shall run
on self lubricating bearing with stainless steel axles. Arrangement shall
exist to ensure that the electric cables and steel wire ropes are separated
before passing over their respective pulleys and close fitting guides shall
protect the pulleys to prevent ropes and cables leaving the pulleys
grooves. The pulley shall be housed in a chassis integral with a sleeve
which slips over the top of the mast and is secured axially and in azimuth.
Guides and stops shall be provided for docking the lantern carriage and
an anchor point shall be securely welded to the assembly to receive the
safety maintenance equipment. Chassis assembly shall also be hot dip
galvanized and shall be covered by an approved weather proof cover.
Winches of the double drum type shall be warm driven with a gear ratio of
not less than 50:1. Winches shall be self lubricating by means of an oil
bath. At least four turns of rope shall remain on the drum when the lantern
carriage is fully lowered. Dimensions of the winch shall be such to enable
its installation or removal through the door opening. Winch drums shall be
grooved to ensure a tidy rope lay. A test certificate issued by an
independent laboratory shall be supplied with each winch. The capacity
and operating speed of the winch shall be clearly marked on each winch
on an indelible label together with the specification of the recommended
lubricant. The winch shall be capable of operation by hand or by means of
a power tool. The driving spindle shall be positively locked when not in
use by automatic means.
Steel wire ropes shall be flexible stainless steel of at least 7/19

size/construction. Thimble and terminals shall be of compatible material.
The winch drive portable power tool shall be multi-speed reversible tool
incorporating a torque limiting device which can be readily adjusted and
locked. A remote control switch shall be incorporated to allow the
equipment to be operated from a distance of 5 meters. Suitable
arrangement shall be made to support the power tool accurately and
securely during operation. The power tool shall be radio suppressed.
Handless shall to provide for hand operating the winches and they shall
incorporate a torque limiter which can be readily adjusted and locked. A
limit switch shall be provided adjacent to the winch to cut off the supply to
the operating tool when the lantern carriage is approximately 30 cm from
the locked position. Winch shall also be capable of manual operation over
the whole raising and lowering cycle if necessary.
The lantern carriage shall be of durable steel construction fitted with

lantern and lamp control gear fixing and junction box mounting plates. It
shall be in two halves jointed by bolted flanges to permit removal from the
erected mast. It shall incorporate arrangements to prevent damage to the
galvanized finish of the mast and such arrangements shall preferably not
require rollers or other moving parts. It should be capable of carrying load
not less than 215 kgs.
Junction boxes of heavy duty weather proof type shall be provided and
positioned on lantern carriages each to accommodate the termination of a
multi-core flexible supply cable riser. Each junction box shall contain
adequate live, neutral and earth terminals to facilitate outgoing final wiring
connections to a maximum of three fixtures per phase or to obstruction
lights. The load shall be properly balanced. The junction boxes shall be
provided with MCB/HRC fuses for protection of each fixture. The metal
work of all fixtures, carriage and control gear shall be efficiently earthed
by means of separate earth conductors. The wiring of the lanterns and
associated control gear shall be carried out with multi-core copper flexible
600 V grade high temperature insulated and sheathed cable of 6 mm
size. Each multi-core cable shall terminate in the base compartment with
a metal cased multi-pin plug and socket coupler fitted with a guard ring
and at the mast head at terminals provided in the junction boxes via nylon
glands. Two sets of extension leads shall be provided to facilitate testing
equipment when the carriage has been lowered. The base compartment
shall house switches, cable terminal boxes and other related equipment.
A 12 mm diameter stainless steel stud shall be attached to the mast
structure within the base compartment to provide a lightening and cable
earthing point.
The mast shall be fitted with lightening protection comprising an air

terminal at the mast head, hard drawn down tape or conductor bonded to
each section of the mast and test link, all efficiently bonded to an adjacent
earthing station.
9.11 Flood light fixtures

The flood light fixtures shall be of the totally enclosed weatherproof and
dust proof type manufactured from aluminum alloy with a stove enameled
finish having minimum rating of IP-55. The fixture shall give an
asymmetric distribution to suit the installation and be complete with
aluminum reflector, lamp holders, heat resisting glass and internal heat
resistant wiring. The fixtures shall be equipped with:
a) 1x250 / 1x150 / 1x400 / 2 x 400 / 1000 W high pressure sodium

lamp
b) Aviation obstruction lights.
Internal baffles to aviation standards shall be incorporated in the lanterns

to screen light emission in unwanted directions. It shall also have the
means to facilitate horizontal and vertical adjustments and looking.
Control gears for 150 / 250 W / 400 W / 1000 W HPSV lamps shall be
provided in remote weatherproof boxes. The control gear boxes shall be
fixed to the lantern carriage and so positioned to act as a counter

balance.
HPSV lamps shall be suitable for external use and 220 volt operation.
Ballasts shall be totally enclosed and proofed against condensation, leak
proof and either sealed in heat resisting cable tails or a terminal block
suitably shrouded to prevent live parts being exposed during operation.
They shall be symmetrically wound and be of the solid filled type and
have voltage tapping in suitable steps from 195 volts to 265 volts. They
shall comply with standards and suitable for working with the specified
lamp and for mounting on the baseboard of the column. The capacitance
shall be sufficient to produce a power factor of not less than 0.84.
Capacitance shall be as standards . Ballasts shall not cause any radio
interference or television reception. The contractor shall be responsible
for the correct adjustment of the voltage tapping at each light position.
The obstruction light fixture shall be of omni directional red in compliance

with ICAO Annex 14 and FAA L-810 specifications. The light shall be
equipped with a Neon spiral lamp having 100,000 hour of life. in case the
main one burns out. All components shall be of cast aluminum alloy and
yellow epoxy painted and suitably protected against corrosion and the
lantern shall be waterproof. Intensity shall not be less than 3000 candela.
9.12 Foundation details

Complete details of required foundations to suit the approved masts shall
be submitted for the Engineers approval. The foundation shall be of
reinforced concrete type for flanged base plate mounting as
recommended by the mast manufacture. The incoming duct arrangement
shall be adequate for incoming cables and outgoing lightening conductor.
Foundation bolts shall be supplied by the manufacture with a fixing
template.
9.13 Control
Control of the high mast flood lighting shall be by photo cell operated
switch which would actuate with the intensity of day light. The obstruction
lights shall also be controlled through a photocell relay. The photoelectric
unit with relay shall be housed within the switchboard with the detector
head externally mounted. The unit shall be preset for 70 lux ON and 150
lux OFF.
9.14 Testing
The complete installation after commissioning shall be tested as regard to
their earthing, insulation resistance values, continuous operation for at
least 12 hours, illumination values, aiming, glare and mechanical /physical
requirements to the satisfaction of Engineer. The galvanizing of the mast
shall be tested to be not less than 64 microns. Manufacture shall produce
a test certificate with regard to wind load stability test to meet the specified
conditions.

9.15 Guard Rails

Each mast shall be protected against damages by collision by a guard rail
cage, of 2.4 m by 2.4 m mounted on vertical angle steel sections of the
size 200 mm by 16mm, solidly founded to or in the concrete foundation of
the flood light pole. The top of the guardrail shall be 750 mm above
ground level and the corners shall be suitably rounded off so that no
sharp edges are protruding.
All parts of the cage, angle iron and bolts are to be galvanized in
accordance with IS Specification.
The contractor shall compare the dimensions of the lantern carriage with
the guard rail cage and ensure that unrestricted maintenance access
would be available. He shall make adjustments to the guard rail cage
dimensions if necessary and allow for it in his rates.
9.16 Road Network Lighting:

10M high Galvanized Iron Octagonal poles with lockable built-in cable end
box, GI cover, 16A SPN MCB for each fixture, incoming and outgoing
cable termination arrangement and 3 core 2.5sqmm copper conductor
PVC cable/wire up to the luminaries shall be used for the purpose. The
poles shall have a GI base plate and foundation of concrete of approved
specifications. There shall be a hole of 50mm at the bottom of poles for
entry and exit of cables. Each pole shall have a spike of GI at the top for
lightning protection. An earthing bolt shall be welded inside the cable end
box for earth connectivity. The poles shall be manufactured and tested as
per standard.
The HPSV luminaries shall be of semi cut-off type for maximum area
coverage and yet have minimum glare. It should be weather, dust and
vermin proof having a minimum rating of IP-65. Twin core 4sqmm copper
PVC wire shall be drawn from control box to the luminaries.
As per the site requirement and drawing, few poles shall have double and
others will have single overhang of 1.5M for mounting fixtures.
HDPE pipe shall be used in foundation for laying of cables for each pole.
10.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR H.T. EQUIPMENT

SPECIFICATIONS
10.1 FINISH
The entire equipments shall be tropically finished.
10.2 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Tenderer shall supply full descriptive literature and technical particulars of
the equipment offered. General arrangement and wiring drawing shall
also be supplied by the tenderer

This specification covers HT switch gear Panels suitable for 11000 volts
50 Hz. 3 phase 3 wire alternating current solidly earthed electric supply
system, complete with all accessories and inbuilt power pack unit as per
this specification.
The panels shall be complete with interlocking features, automatic safety

shutters, internal connections for interconnections of the panels, bus bar
chamber, ON and OFF indicators, earthing sockets, with all the
instruments and relays in position and duly wired up with copper
conductor cables and any other accessories to complete the supplies in
all respects.
10.3 SITE CONDITIONS.

Height above sea level- below 1000 meters
Maximum temperature in shade in summer 50 c
Minimum temperature in shade in summer 30 c
10.4 PARTICULARS OF ELECTRIC SUPPLY.

A. Main supply 11000 volts 3 phase 50 Hz. AC.
B Supply for trip circuits 24 volts from power pack
C. Supply for indicating 110 volts from 11000/110 V potential transformer.
10.5 DETAILS OF PANEL
10.5.1 HT VCB PANEL 11000 VOLTS 630 AMPS

o The panel shall be indoor type, metal clad, extensible horizontal
draw out type complete with interlocking features, automatic safety
shutters, handle for arising and lowering the switchgear and rollers
for the rolling out, draw out truck etc. and manually operated, trip
free type, Vacuum circuit breaker ; incorporating mechanical as
well as Electrical ON/OFF LED indicator. The closing mechanism
shall be as per the following:-
Independent Manual spring assisted, and
(b) Spring charged electrically & manually closed,
and shall consist of :
i. Triple pole vacuum circuit breaker, 11000 volts 630 amps
capacity ( as required), rupturing capacity 18.4KA at 11 KV
(Symmetrical).
ii. 630 amps rating (as required) air insulated but encapsulated,
high conductivity Copper bus bars of uniform cross-section for
electrical purposes, suitably insulated with sleeves and extensible
type on the both ends.
iii. ON & OFF (RED and GREEN) indicating light.
iv. Isolating plug contacts.
v. IDMT (equivalent to CDG-61 Relay) induction type non-
directional, triple pole combined over current and earth fault relay
having over current setting 50% -200% earth fault setting 10% -
40% short circuit setting 200% - 800% with flag indication with
Series Trip/Shunt trip on 24 V operating off Power Pack supply.
vi. 24 volts DC shunt trip release.

vii. CT chamber with Three - Current transformers dual ratio, rating
as per attached data-sheet., 15 VA burden for protection, 15 VA
burden for metering. accuracy 5P-10 for protection and class 0.5
for metering as per Schedule of Quantities and Data-sheets.
viii. Ammeter range suitable to CTs offered dial size 144mm x
144mm with selector switch.
ix. 3x11000 /110 volts resin cast potential transformer withdraw able
type with automatic shutters, 100VA burden, accuracy class -1
with protective fuses. The secondary for PT shall have terminals
on terminals block where from 110 volts power supply can be
extended to adjoining panels through an extra set of HRC fuses
provided for the purposes.
x. One Voltmeter range 0-15 KV dial size 144mm x 144mm with
selector switch.
xi One - Cable box complete with accessories to suit 11 KV 3 phase
XLPE (E) cable size 300 sq. mm suitably mounted on the panel
for incoming cable.
xii Test terminal block, fuses, circuit labels, Indication light etc. as
per standard practice.
xiii Necessary strip heaters to prevent absorption of moisture during
winter and monsoon.
xiv. Under voltage, over voltage, auxiliary and master trip relays as
required.
xv. Necessary trip supply healthy indicator lamp and switch and other
standard accessories.
xvi. HT panel shall be provided Anti pumping devices, Auxiliary relays
for Temperature scanner & door interlock of transformer.
10.6 Type Test:

Test certificates with all the details to IS- carried out on similar type shall
be furnished along with the tender, without which the offer may not be
considered for acceptance.
DATA SHEET FOR 11 kV HT VCB PANEL
1 Rated Voltage 11000 Volts

2 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
3 System Neutral Effectively Earthed
4 Fault Level 18.4 kA
5 Closing Coil 24V DC using rectifier unit (Power pack)
6 Tripping Coil 24V DC using rectifier unit (Power pack)
7 Indication CKT. 110 V AC
8 Heater 230 V AC
9 Applicable Standard IS 13118 /1991
10 Mechanism Trip Free, Fully Horizontal draw out type,
11 Breaking Capacity 18.4 kA at 11 kV
12 Short Time Rating 18.4 kA for 1sec.
13 Basic Insulation Level 28 kV power frequency withstand, 75 kVp

lighting impulse
14 Bus Bars Copper
15 Rated Current 630 Amps
16 VCB Mechanism Motor Operated
17 Location of Installation Indoor, floor mounting
18 Wiring Multistrand Copper wire of size 2.5 sq. mm.
PVC 1.1 kV grade for CT secondary circuit and
1.5 sq. mm. for others circuits.
19 CT (i) 150/75/5-5 for Feeder Controlling Circuit
Breakers (Burden: 15 VA, Accuracy Class: 5P
10 for protection and 0.5S for metering)
20 VT (i) 1 No., 11 kV/110 V, 100 VA, accuracy
class 1.0 to be connected at bus bar side for
indication & protection (supply to Power pack
Unit)
21 Misc. Ammeter, Voltmeter, Control Switch (TNC),
Indication Light (ON, OFF, Spring Charge, Trip
Circuit Healthy)
RELAY ON 11 KV HT PANEL
1 Current Rating 5A
2 Settings 50-200% in seven equal steps of 25% for O/C
& 20-80% in seven equal steps of 10% for E/F
3 Operating Time 0-3 second at 10 times current setting
4 Type of relay (i) CDG-31 DC shunt Trip, 2 element O/C &
1 element E/F relay for other 2 nos. Feeder
controlling Circuit Breakers.
(ii) CDG-61 DC shunt trip 2 element O/C & 1
element E/F for Transformer controlling Circuit
Breaker
(iii) VAA-33, 2 Nos for Transformer controlling
Circuit Breakers
5 Auxiliary Contracts Self Reset
6 Type of Mounting Flush, 3D Horizontal case suitable for Flush
mounting trip isolating switch and CT shorting
switch provided on the craddle assembly.
10.7 INSTALLATION :
Proper leveling of all the Breaker panels to be done.
All Panels /accessories are efficiently earthed and connected to the

required number of earth electrodes.
Clearances in the front, rear and sides of the Panels shall be as per
drawings & specifications.

Automatic safety shutters, Door interlock, handle interlock in all the panel
shall be operative.
10.8 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING :

Insulation Resistance,
Earth continuity,
The operation of the Protection devices shall be tested by means of

secondary & primary injection test & the Primary injection test will be
preferred of relay through CTs.
o breaker operation.
The entire Switch Board / Panel shall be withstanding high voltage test
after installation.
Any other tests as may be required by the inspector shall be conducted.
11.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER

11.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
Transformers shall comply with the latest editions of Indian Standards no.
IS 2026 Part I to Part V (Power Transformers) and IS 11171 (Dry Type
Power Transformers). In case the provisions of Indian Standards are not
directly applicable to Dry Type Transformers, the provision of Latest IEC -
726 & any other relevant IEC shall apply. Latest Standards as applicable
shall be followed for Insulating Materials, Bushing, Installation and
Maintenance of Transformers.
11.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS
Altitude : Less than 1000 meters
Maximum Ambient Temperature : 50 deg C
Minimum Ambient Temperature : 0 deg C
Relative Humidity : 100%
Installation : Highly corrosive, dusty, humid and
tropical
11.3 RATING AND TYPE
The Transformer shall be of 11/0.433KV, and Cast Resin dry type. The
transformer shall have core type construction, 3 phase and shall be
suitable for Indoor / Outdoor service under the climatic conditions
prevailing at site. The transformer shall be capable of withstanding
thermal & mechanical effects of Short circuit at terminals of any winding
with full voltage maintained on other winding as per IS 2026. .
NATURE OF ELECTRIC SUPPLY:
Primary 11000 Volts, 3 phase, 3 wire 50 C/S.

Secondary 433 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire 50 c/S
Solidly earthed neutral.
11.4 NATURE OF LOAD:

Mixed load of lights, fans and motive power and shall be suitable for
balance & unbalance load. Power factor at full load 0.85 (Approx.)

11.5 EARTHING:
The star point on the low voltage side shall be brought out for solid
earthing. The transformer tank & cable end box should be provided with
two suitable earth terminals for earthing.
11.6 WINDINGS
The windings shall be manufactured from electrolytic grade copper
conductors and fully insulated for rated voltage by HIGH QALITY
INSULATED nomex calendared paper. The high and low voltage windings
shall be totally encapsulated and should be Cast under vacuum in moulds
with fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin laminate. Both HV & LV windings of
each phase shall be separately cast as a rigid tubular coil with no
mechanical & electrical connection between their co-axial arrangements.
The transformer shall be free of partial discharges at least up to 1.1 times
the rated voltage.
The windings shall absorb no moisture under the worst tropical conditions.
11.7 CORE
The core shall be built up with high grade, non-aging low loss & high
permeability CRGO Silicon Steel Lamination. CRGO sheet shall be
coated with inorganic material like carlite or equivalent insulation to
reduce eddy current to minimum. After shearing, the laminations shall be
treated to remove all burrs & shall be annealed to remove all the residual
stresses.
Core framework and clamps shall be arranged and tightened to securely
hold laminations in order to prevent any settling or displacement in case
of heavy shocks during transport, handling or short circuits. All the iron
parts, except the core shall be galvanized and treated with high
temperature resistant paint. Core fastening bolts shall be insulated to
reduce losses and avoid hot spots. Transformer shall be designed to
withstand 10% over fluxing corresponding to rated voltage.
Suitable lugs shall be provided for lifting the complete core & coil
assembly of the transformer.
11.8 INSULATION
Inter-turn and inter coil insulation shall be designed such that di-electric
stress is uniformly distributed throughout the windings under all operating
conditions. The winding shall be provided with Class 'F' insulation or
better.
11.9 TEMPERATURE RISE
The temperature rise of the windings shall not exceed 90 Deg C by
resistance on continuous full load above maximum ambient temperature
of 50 Deg C and in no case shall reach value that may damage the core
itself or other adjacent parts.
11.10 TAP CHANGING
Off Circuit Bolted Tap changing Links shall be provided on High voltage
side for tapping from +5% to -10% of the input voltage in steps of 2.5%.
Inspection window with glass and neoprene gasket shall be provided on
the transformer enclosure to view the tapping position.

11.11 VECTOR GROUP

Transformer shall have vector group of Dyn 11.
11.12 IMPEDANCE
The desired Impedance shall be as mentioned in the IS 2026
11.13 FLUX DENSITY

The maximum flux density at any point in the core and the winding shall
not exceed 1.6 Tesla on the normal rated tap voltage & frequency.
11.14 CURRENT DENSITY

The maximum current density at any point in the winding shall not exceed
2.5 Amps per sq. mm at the rated full load, voltage and frequency.
11.15 COOLING
The transformer shall be designed for natural cooling (AN).
11.16 ENCLOSURE:
Transformers shall be provided with a sheet steel enclosure with
adequate provision for ventilation. The degree of protection of enclosure
shall be IP-21 for indoor installations & IP - 44 for outdoor installations.
The sheet steel thickness of enclosure shall be minimum 2 mm & shall be
treated for anticorrosive panting.
11.17 END TERMINATION

11.17.1 HV End:
Cable end box with terminals and bus bars shall provided suitable to
receive one run of 11KV (E) 3Cx 240 sq. mm, Aluminium conductor,
Armoured, XLPE cable. Cable entry shall be from bottom / sides.
11.17.2 LV End:
Terminals/bus bars shall be suitable to receive BUS DUCT. The complete
details shall be given on finalization of the order. Alternatively, termination
shall be through the side / top of the enclosure to the bus duct. The flange
details for mounting of the bus duct shall be given after finalization of the
order.
11.18 UNDERCARRIAGE
Transformers shall be supported on structural base equipped with bi-
directional rollers suitable for moving the fully assembled transformers.
11.19 ACCESSORIES
The following fittings shall be provided on the Dry Type Transformers:
i) Rating & Terminal marking plate
ii) 4 nos. bi-directional flat rollers
iii) 2 nos. earthing terminals with lugs on the transformer base channel on
diagonally opposite ends
iv) Lifting arrangement
v) Extra Neutral bushing brought out of Enclosure
vi) 1 no. PT-100 sensor in each LV windings wired up to the Winding

temperature indicator Scanner. The instrument shall have two sets of
adjustable contacts for alarm & trip. Instrument shall have scanner to
read and show temperature of all the three phases sequentially.
vii) On the doors of the enclosure a set of the sensor / device shall be
provided with the potential free auxiliary contacts to make the
interlocking between the transformer door and the incoming HT
breaker:
viii)High Tensile Steel bolts and nuts exposed to the atmosphere
shall be either galvanized / zinc passivated 0r preferably Stain less
steel bolts to make them as rust free.
ix) The incoming HT breaker should not be get closed if the transformer
doors are open.
x) The transformer doors should not be getting open if the incoming HT
breaker is in closed (ON) position.
11.20 TESTS
Transformers shall be subjected to routine & type tests as specified in IS
2026, IS 11171 IEC - 726 & given below:
11.21 Routine tests

a) Turns ratio measurement at various taps
b) HV and LV winding resistance
c) Checking of vector group
d) Insulation Resistance Test
e) No Load Loss & No Load current measurement
f) Measurement of Load losses
g) Impedance voltage
h) Separate source voltage withstand test
i) Induced over voltage withstand test
11.22 Type Test:

Test certificates to IS-2026 carried out on similar type shall be furnished
along with the tender, without which the offer may not be considered for
acceptance.
a) Heat Run Test.
b) Impulse voltage withstand test.
11.23 Technical and other particulars to be furnished by the tenderer.

All the tenderers shall furnish the technical particulars of their offer in the
form shown in below. Tenders not accompanied by this form duly filled in
shall not be considered complete and are liable to be ignored.
(a) Rated KVA of transformer.
(b) Rated voltage ratio
(c) Voltage ratios corresponding to tappings other than the principal
tapping.
(d) Load loss at rated current and rated voltage on the principal
tapping corrected to the appropriate reference temperature.
(e) Impedance voltage at rated current (on the Principal tapping).
(f) Short circuit impedances at least on the extreme tapping if the

tapping range of the tapped winding exceeds 5 per cent.
(g) Diagram of connections and connection symbol, and
NOTE : Transformers complete with all accessories and shall be as per

relevant latest IS etc.
11.24 INSTALLATION:
Installation shall conform to Indian Standard Code of Practices IS: 1886-
1967 and meet with the approval of the Electrical Inspectorate and other
statutory bodies.
Transformers shall be positioned with acceptable clearance all round & its
wheels shall be either locked or provided wheel stoppers.
Visual inspection shall be conducted for mechanical damage to any part
or parts, leaking tanks, tubes or bushings. Suitable steps shall be taken
to rectify the defects immediately.
The star point of L V winding shall be earthed by means of two separate
and distinct earth conductors copper strip.
11.25 COMMISSIONING:
The following pre-commissioning tests shall be conducted and test results
recorded.
a) Continuity of the windings.
b) Operations of sensors shall be proper.
c) Setting of temperature sensor & Tap
d) Insulation resistance between windings and also between windings
and earth & other test as required checking the healthy ness of the
transformer.
After energising, transformer shall be kept on `No Load' for a period of 24
hours before load is switched. Thereafter Transformers shall be brought
up to full load over a period of one hour.
The contractor shall provide the necessary data as per Annexure-À'

along with the Tender
DATA SHEET TO BE FILLED IN BY THE BIDDER

TRANSFORMER
1. Nomenclature Outdoor / indoor type Oil immersed
Outdoor / indoor type Dry (Cast Resin )
2. Quantity As per schedule
11 / 433 KV, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-wire, AC
3.
System supply
4. Rating ,--------KVA
5. Cooling ONAN ( Natural air cooling ) Or AN
6. Duty Continuous
7. Losses App.1 % of rating
0
Guaranteed load loss at 75 C To be filled by bidder along with tender
( Watts )
Guaranteed NO load loss

(Watts) To be filled by bidder along with tender
8. Winding Electrical grade Copper
9. Flux density To be filled by bidder along with tender
10. Temperature rise
a) In oil by thermometer 50 oC above ambient
b) In winding by resistance 55 oC above ambient
11. Rated line voltage HV : 11 OR 33 KV :: LV : 0.433 KV
12. Basic impulse As per IS: 2026
13. Inter phase connection HV : DELTA : : LV : STAR
14. Vector group DYN 11
Off load manual operated on HV side
15.
Tap changer upto 7.5%
rated voltage ) OR
ON load Auto / manual operated on HV
side upto
7.5% rated voltage
16. System earthing HV unearthed
Cable end box with copper
17. bus-bars
a) HV X..X.. sqmm HT Al, armoured cable
b) LV XXXXX LT, Al, armoured cable
or as per cable schedule
18. Impedance Maximum 5%
19. Over all dimensions To be filled by bidder along with tender
20. Total weight of transformer To be filled by bidder along with tender
21. Quantity & weight of oil To be filled by bidder along with tender
Thickness of side walls of tank,
22. top, To be filled by bidder along with tender
Bottom
23. Lightning impulse level To be filled by bidder along with tender
24. Efficiency at 75 0c at unity P. F.
a) At 100% load To be filled by bidder along with tender
b) At 75% load To be filled by bidder along with tender
c) At 50% load To be filled by bidder along with tender
25. Efficiency at 75 0c at 0.8 P. F.
a) At 100% load To be filled by bidder along with tender
b) At 75% load To be filled by bidder along with tender
c) At 50% load To be filled by bidder along with tender
26. Neutral Provided

12.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR WEIGH BRIDGE

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (PIT LESS TYPE)
The Weigh Bridge shall consist of a Platform which shall be mounted on load
cells. The No. of load cells may vary from 4,6 & 8 depending on the size of
the platform.
The load cells shall be double ended shear beam type which shall a
protection level of IP-68 which means the load cells shall be totally
unaffected by Dust, Water & Hostile atmosphere.
The outputs of these load cells shall be connected to a junction box, which
shall have a sealing confirming to IP_65. from the junction box the load cell
cable shall be connected to a digitizer.
The Digitizer should be state-of art system, which should be micro-controller
based and works on a SIGMA DELTA converter based analog to digital
conversion.
The digitizer shall have a RS232C port for linking to a computer.
The computer should be complete with all the software required to operate
the Weigh Bridge. And a 80 column Dot Matrix Printer shall be connected to
computer to give the printout details as follows:
a) Date
b) Time.
c) Serial No.
d) Vehicle No.
e) Commodity.
f) Party name.
g) Tare Wt.
h) Cross Wt.
i) Net Wt.
The entire record as above shall be also stored in the memory and the
summary of the Weigh Bridge operation may be taken at any time in the
following manner.
a) Date-wise
b) Truck-wise
c) Commodity-wise
d) Party-wise
e) All
Any number of operators should be permissible to be assigned to the Weigh
Bridge with their independent user name and pass word. Thus monitoring the
operation of the Weigh Bridge under each operator, separately.
SALIENT FEATURES
1) The only weighbridge with SIGMA-DELTA converter based digitizer, the

best available technology in the world today.
2) Load cells are ladder-trimmed to the last Micro-Volt, ensuring high level
of performance and steady calibration.
3) Load cell protected to IP-68, which means, water and dust has no
influence on performance.
4) Load cells field tested and proven for more than two decades.
5) In-Built lightning protection.
6) High-level of security provided and hence totally tamper proof.

7) Installation and support handled y the finest technical crew available.
8) Over 1000 installations.
9) Requires the lowest or no maintenance. Our clients will vouch by this.
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM : ELECTRONIC WEIGH BRIDGE
CAPACITY : 80 T
PLATFORM SIZE : 18 x 3 METER
ACCURACY : 10 Kg
NO.OF LOADCELLS : 8
LOADCELL : DOUBLE ENDED SHEAR BEAM TYPE
LOADCELL PROTECTION : IP-68
OPERATING VOLTAGE : 230V Single Phase
LOAD CELL SPECIFICATION
a) Type of load cell -- Double ended Shear Beam
c) Load cell sensitivity -- 3mV/V
d) Maximum Load cell out put -- 30m V
e) Load Cell Excitation -- 10V dc
f) Load Cell protection -- IP-68
g) Safe Over Load -- 200%
h) Ultimate Over Load -- 300%
i) Installation Resistance -- Above 1000M ohms at 30v dc+
DIGITIZER SPECIFICATION
a) Model -- DH340A9
b) Range -- 60,000 counts.
c) Excitation out put -- 10v dc to Load Cell.
d) Display -- 5 Digit, 13mm, 7segment LED.
e) Operation Voltage -- 230V, 50HZ,Single Phase, AC.
f) Operation Temperature -- 5 to 55 Deg. C
g) Input -- mV from Load Cell.
h) Outputs.
i) RS232C FOR PC
ii) BCD output for Out Door Display.
i) Programmable features
i) Resolution.
ii) Over-range
iii) Decimal Point.
iv) Zero limit.
v) Calibration.
vi) Time Constant.
vii) Tare.
viii)System re-set.
ix) Security -- Combination of Password & Hardware lock.

13.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SILENT DIESEL GENERATOR SET

13.1 Scope:
Work covered by this contract shall include supply, transportation, delivery,
installation, testing and commissioning of automatic start direct coupled
Diesel Generator Sets and shall include but not limited to the following.
Radiator cooled engine with alternator mounted on a rigid fabricated
steel base frame with resilient anti-vibration mountings.
Daily and outdoor storage fuel tank with oil piping and filters.
Air intake filter.
Exhaust piping with thermal insulation and with residential type
silencer.
Obtaining necessary permission from relevant Deptt. for installation
and operation of DG Sets.
Obtaining statutory approvals from Chief Electrical Inspector.
Obtaining approvals from Pollution Authorities as required.
Associated civil works
The Contractors scope of work shall include supplying and fixing of complete
work as set down in these tender documents, material and components not
specifically stated in the tender documents but which are necessary for
satisfactory installation and operation of the system shall be deemed to have
been included in the Contractors scope of work.
13.2 Ambient Conditions:
DG sets and auxiliaries shall be capable of operating continuously and delivering the
rated output at ambient conditions prevailing at site. The anticipated maximum and
minimum extremes at site, which is at an elevation of 300 mts above sea level are as
below:
Maximum - Ambient temperature + 50C RH 90%

Minimum - Ambient temperature - 5C RH 90%
13.3 Supply System:

The equipment supplied shall be suitable for operation on a 415V, 3 phase, 4 wire,
and 50 Hz systems.
13.4 Standards:
The equipment offered shall conform to the latest revision of relevant
standards. Tenders shall clearly state the standards to which the equipment
conforms.

13.5 Engine And Accessories:

13.5.1 Engine:
The engine shall have the following characteristics:
Type - Suitable for generating set application, multi-cylinder, solid injection,

cold starting.
Cycle - Four stroke
Speed - 1,500 r.p.m.
Speed variation - Within 2% for operation between 1% and 10%
Method of starting - Battery
Net site output - As per schedule of quantities. The output shall be based on
base duty application i.e. continuous operation around the clock with varying
loads.
The engine rating shall be stated in the tender in accordance with the latest revision
of relevant INDIAN STANDARS.
13.5.2 Accessories for Engine
The accessories to be provided with the engines shall include the following:
Flywheel to suit flexible coupling.

Flexible coupling with guard.
Air cleaner dry type
Corrosion resistor
Fuel pump
Governor electronic
Fuel filter
Lub oil filter
Heavy duty batteries with leads and battery charger.
Exhaust silencer residential type
Interconnection wiring cabling and piping as required
Cooling system
13.6 Fuel Consumption
The engine shall be suitable for satisfactory operation on HSD as per
standards. The tenderer shall declare the guaranteed fuel consumption in
liters per BHP/hr. at 60%, 80%, 100% load under the maximum output after
de-rating to ambient conditions.

Such guaranteed fuel consumption is also to be expressed for convenience

in subsequent checking of performance in liters per net kWh output from the
alternator at full load and at 0.8 and unity power factor.
If guaranteed fuel consumption is exceeded, the contractor shall make such
amendments or alternators as are necessary to bring the consumption within
the guaranteed figures.
Minimum guaranteed fuel consumption on 100% load should be specified.
13.7 Lubricating Oil Consumption
The tenderer shall state the guaranteed lubricating oil consumption in liters
per hour.
13.7.1 Governing
The governor shall be of electronic type with governing class A direct.
13.7.2 Mounting
The engine and direct coupled alternator shall be rigidly secured to a common
truly rigid fabricated steel base frame of substantial and proven design. The
DG sets shall be installed on isolated inertia foundation to be provided. Ant
vibration mountings shall be provided between the base frame and the
foundation. The tenderer shall confirm the type of mountings and mounting
arrangements provided and state the guaranteed vibration isolation efficiency
in the tender.
Approved vibration isolation shall also be provided between DG sets and all
rigid piping connected to the DG set such that transmission of vibration to the
piping system is less than 1%.
13.7.3 Air Filters
The engine air intake shall be fitted with substantial clearable air cleaner of the
dry type. The filter shall be suitable for operation under dusty conditions for
periods of not less than 200 hours between cleaning operations.
13.7.4 Crank Case Breather

The crankcase breather outlet of the engine shall be fitted with a filter cap
capable of preventing entry of dust.

13.7.5 Fuel and Lubricating oil Filters

Filter for fuel and lubricating oil systems shall be of dual type to permit removal
of one strainer if necessary whilst the engine is running. Lubricating oil filters
shall be of an efficient full flow type of ample capacity and suitable for use with
detergent oils. They shall be capable of removing all foreign matter above a
particle size of 5 microns and shall also operate for at least 200 hours between
cleaning operations.
13.7.6 Lubricating Oil System
The engine shall be of the totally enclosed type and fitted with a positive
pressure system of lubrication to all working parts. There shall be no moving
parts which require lubrication by hand prior to the starting of the engine or
whilst in operation.
13.7.7 Engine Controls
(a) Speed control
Control shall be so arranged that a 12-1/2% increase over normal rated speed
shall cut off fuel supply, thus stopping the engine.
(b) Overload Protection

The engine shall be adequately protected against operating under overload
conditions. The requirements shall be met by the provision of a fixed overload
limit stop on the pump rack control rod to prevent the set being subjected for a
load exceeding the site rating plus 1%.
(c) Excess Starting Time

The starting circuit for the automatic mains failure diesel generator sets shall
be arranged to attempt upto three starting cycles, each not exceeding 1
seconds duration with a similar OFF period between each cycle. If the set fails
to start upon completion of the third attempt the starting circuit shall be locked
out until it is restored manually. An alarm shall be given and Set failed to start
indication given on the panel.
(d) Low Lubricating Oil Pressure

Pressure switches shall be fitted such that in the event of a fall in the lub oil
pressure, an alarm and indication shall be actuated. In addition, the engine
shall be automatically shut down in the event of lub oil pressure dropping to a
predetermined low value.
(e) High Water Temperature

An alarm shall be given if the water temperature exceeds the safe limits and
the engine shall be shut down when a pre-determined set water temperature is
reached.

(f) Fuel Level Operation

In the daily service fuel tank, a float control shall be provided to allow the flow
of fuel from main fuel tank under gravity.
A clearly visible graduated fuel level indication shall be provided in the day as
well as main tank.
(g) Exhaust System

The engine shall provide with an exhaust pipe carried out of the substation
building and fitted with a residential type silencer to reduce the noise level to
the minimum. Height of exhaust shall be as per the requirement of Pollution
Control Authorities.
Exhaust piping shall be fabricated from class A MS pipes of size suitable to

limit backpressure to permissible limit as per CPCB norms. Flanged joints in
the exhaust piping shall be covered with removable moulded asbestos
sectional muffs or similar composition.
Exhaust piping shall be fitted with a flexible section or an expansion joint.

Inspection chambers at the bends shall be provided for removal of carbon
soot.
13.8 Alternator:
13.8.1. Rating
The alternators shall have the following rating and characteristics:
Type - Drip Proof Screen protected for power generation
Speed - 1500 R.P.M.
Net Site Output - AS per Schedule of quantities.
Voltage Regulation - Within 1.0% of the rated voltage from no load to full
load
Overload - More than 10% of the nominal for 1 hour every 12 hours without
excessive heating
Harmonics Max 1% between phase and neutral and total max 3%
Voltage - 400V 1.0%, 3 phase at 50 Hz
13.8.2. Construction
A direct coupled, screen protected drip proof type, self excited and self
regulated alternator shall be provided with the diesel engine. The combined
engine alternator unit shall be mounted on a common rigid fabricated base
frame, and the alternator shall be continuously rated. The alternator shall
have its windings star connected with the neutral connection brought out to a
separate terminal. The alternator shall fully comply with the latest Standard
in respect of winding insulation and fast response to maintain steady voltage.
13.8.3. Temperature Rise
The Max temperature rise of the various components of the alternator shall
not exceed those permitted under IS with full output and under the ambient
temperature conditions specified in Clause 1.3 above.
13.8.4. Rating and Regulation
The alternator shall be directly coupled to the diesel engine through a flexible
coupling and shall be suitable to deliver the rated output at 0.8 P.F. lagging,
on a 3 phase 4 wire 415 volts 50 cycle system. The alternator shall be of the
self-regulated and self excited type in a screen protected, drip proof
enclosure. The alternator shall be with static excitation system and the
voltage regulation from no load to rated load shall be within 1% of rated
voltage.
13.8.5. Alternator Insulation
The alternator should have class H insulation to withstand tropical conditions.
13.8.6. Auto Mode
(a) A line voltage monitor shall monitor supply voltage on each phase.
When the main supply fails completely or falls below set value or any
phase, the monitor module shall initiate start up of diesel engine. To
avoid initiation due to momentary dips or system disturbance, a time
delay adjustable between 0.5 to 5 seconds shall be incorporated in the
start up initiation.
(b) Under this event, main breakers of DG set will be opened & breakers of
transformer will be closed.
(c) Suitable adjustable timers shall be provided which will make it feasible
to vary independently ON-OFF setting periods from 0-10 seconds. If
the alternator does not build up voltage after the first or any start, as the
case may be, further starting attempt will not be made and the starting
facility will be reset.
(d) When the main supply is restored and is healthy as sensed by the line
voltage monitor setting both for under voltage and unbalance, and after
the quality is monitored by a suitable time which can be set between 1
minute to 10 minutes, the alternator supply circuit breaker shall open

before mains circuit breaker closes.
(e) The diesel alternator set reverts to stand by for next automatic operation.
13.8.7. Manual Mode
Under manual mode it shall be possible for the operator to start up the
generator set by pressing the (START) push button.
(a) Three attempt starting facility shall also be operative for the start up
function.
(b) The CLOSE and TRIP operation of Mains, Alternator and Bus-coupler
circuit breakers as required shall be manual by pressing the appropriate
push button on the panel. Closure shall be feasible only after alternator
has built up full voltage. If the load is already on MAINS pressure on
CLOSE button shall be ineffective.
(c) When running under manual mode, if the mains supply has failed, the
load shall automatically get transferred to the alternator immediately
overriding the stipulation of pressure on CLOSE button.
(d) Engine shut down, other than due to faults shall be manual by pressing a
STOP button.
13.8.8. Test Mode
(a) When under TEST mode pressure of TEST button shall complete the
start up sequence simulation and start the engine.
(b) Engine shall build up voltage but the set shall not close alternator circuit
breaker when the load is on the mains. Monitoring performance for
voltage/frequency etc should be feasible without supply to load.
(c) If during TEST run the power supply fails, the load shall automatically get
transferred to alternator.
(d) Bringing the mode selector to auto position shut down the sets.
13.9 Fuel Oil System
13.9.1 Daily Service Fuel Tank
Daily service fuel tank shall be provided of rated capacity.
The tank shall be waterproof and dust proof and shall be fabricated from not
less than 2mm MS sheet.
A float operated fuel level indicator, fuel draw off connection, drain cock and
overflow connection shall be provided on the tank. A removable cover of
ample size with lock shall allow free access to the interior. The tank shall be
mounted on steel supports. An on-line fuel filter shall be provided at the inlet
of tank.
13.9.2 Fuel Transfer Hand Pump
A semi-rotary hand transfer pump shall be provided with necessary piping
as required for filling the main fuel tank to be installed outside the substation
at a height for gravity flow.
13.10 Engine Auxiliary Motors and Wiring
The contractor shall supply, install and test all engine axillaries. This shall include
the supply and installation of all electrical and control wiring between the Main LV
Switchboard and the individual auxiliaries. Wiring shall be with copper conductor
PVC insulated wires in flexible/rigid conduits including loop earthing or armored
cables.
13.11 Starting Battery And Protection

A 24 volt heavy duty battery of adequate capacity, 180 AH. Complete with battery
charging equipment shall be supplied and installed by the supplier to energies
electric starting equipment. The battery shall be contained in an approved steel
frame. The charging unit shall be contained in the control cubicle and be, complete
with ammeter and voltmeter, fuses, charging rate adjustment and interconnection.
13.12 Radio Interference

All equipment provided under this specification shall be so designed that it will not
cause interference with radio equipment. In the event of the inherent characteristics
of the equipment being such that radio interference is possible, efficient devices to
nullify the same shall be provided. Suppressors shall be as per the relevant
standards.
13.13 Piping
13.13.1 Piping Materials
Unless otherwise specified, pipes shall be medium class MS as per standards
suitable for welded joints. Wherever so specified, class B GI pipes with screwed
joints could be used for pipes up to 50mm dia. Pipes shall be given one primary coat
of rust inhibiting paint being installed.
Fitting shall be new and from approved manufactures, Fitting shall be of pressure
rating suitable for the piping system. Flanges shall confirm to standards. Supply of
flanges shall include bolts, nuts, washers, gaskets etc; as required. All equipment
and valve connections shall be through flanges.
Gate valves and Check valves shall conform to standards. Gate valves shall have
non-rising spindles unless otherwise specified. Valves up to 40 mm dis shall have
gunmetal body and valves of more than 40 mm dia. cast iron body unless otherwise
specified. Valves shall be suitable for test pressure as per piping system
requirements and as per standards. Butterfly valves shall conform to standards. The
valves shall be suitable for flow in either direction and seal in both directions. The
valves shall be of integral moulded design.
Pressure gauge shall be duly calibrated not less than 100mm dia and of appropriate
range and with shut off gauge cock etc.
Gauges shall be provided at the following locations:

a) Suction and discharge of pumps
b) Inlet and outlet of heat exchangers
Thermometer shall be either 100mm dia dial or direct reading industrial type of
appropriate range duly calibrated. Thermometer shall be provided on supply and
return of heat exchangers.
13.13.2 Piping Installation

The contractor shall submit detailed working drawings showing the piping route,
typical sections, location and detail of fitting, valves strainers and instruments.
Pipes shall be supported from wall mounted or ceiling suspended supports at an

interval of maximum 2 mtrs unless otherwise stated/approved using 12mm thick
ribbed rubber pad or any other approved resilient material.. Pipes supports shall be
of steel, adjustable for height and primer coated with rust preventive paint and finish
with 2 coats of enamel paint of approved colour. Pipe hangers shall be fixed on walls
and ceilings by means of dash fasteners.
Pipe sleeves of 50mm or larger diameter shall be provided wherever pipes pass
through wall and the annular space filled with felt and finished with retaining rings.
Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner as not to put undue pressure
on the insulation.
13.13.3 Testing
All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and a half times
the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 7Kg/sq cm for a period of not
less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be
rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Engineer-in-charge shall be notified well in advance by the contractor of his

intention to test a section of piping and all testing shall be witnessed by the
Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative. The contractor shall make sure
that proper noiseless circulation of fluid is achieved through all coils and other heat
exchange equipment in the system concerned. If proper circulation is not achieved
due to air bound connections, the contractor shall rectify the defective connections.
He shall bear all the expenses for carrying out the above rectification.
No insulation shall be applied to piping until the completion of the pressure testing to
the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

After the piping is installed, tested and run for at least ten days of eight hours each,
the piping shall be given two finish coats of approved color.
13.14 General
The DG sets with support systems shall be complete with all equipment, visual and
audible alarms, indications and controls required for fully reliable and safe operation
of the DG sets whether specifically stated in these specifications or not. It is
essential that the operation of all protection equipment be completely reliable in all
respects.
Whenever the engine is shut down due to over speed, low lubricating oil pressure,
high water temperature or excess starting time, the circuit breaker shall also be
tripped and the starting systems of the engine shall be locked out until the respective
protective relay is reset.
13.15 Performance Testing At Site

After completion of erection at site and a preliminary warm up period and
acceptance trial run of minimum 10 hours duration, 2 hour at 60%, 3 hour at 80%
and 4 hours at 100%, followed by 1hour at 110% shall be conducted at site for each
DG set for providing performance to the stipulated site ratings. The trial shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer-in-charge and the test results shall be
recorded in an approved format. Test results shall be recorded at 30-minute
intervals. All facilities, labour instruments, material and consumables including fuel
and lubricating oil required for the test shall be provided by contractor at his cost.
Load as required shall be arranged by the Contractor for Performance Testing of the
DG sets.
Tests proving the satisfactory performance of all operating gear and safety functions
and controls shall be carried out.
Performance test at site shall include (but not limited) the following:
S.I No Test Acceptance criteria
1. Fuel consumption at 60%, 5% of guarantee performance.
80% and 100% load Actual DG set efficiency as
determined in the manufactures
works tests shall be used as the
basis of calculation of specific
fuel consumption ratio.
2. Luboil consumption at 60% 5% of guaranteed performance
80% and 100% load
3. Voltage variation 433 V 1%
4. Voltage regulation 1%
5. Frequency regulation 50 Hz 0.5%

6. Max water temp 5% of guaranteed performance
7. Max Luboil temp 5% of guaranteed performance
8. Max Luboil pressure 5% of guaranteed performance
Contractor shall carry out any further tests/trials that Engineer may desire to satisfy
themselves that the Generator Set and associated equipment fully comply with the
conditions as set out in these Specifications.
All calibrated instruments, materials, load configurations, fuel, lubricating oil and
labour required for carrying out of the test shall be provided by the Contractor free of
cost. The Contractor shall give ample notice of the test to the Engineer-in-charge.
14.0 Technical specification for Fruits & vegetable Cold Storage

Cold Storage Capacity : 500 M.Tons
Chamber Size (A) : 19.0 m x 7.0 m x 7.0 m (2 Nos.)
Heavy duty Ammonia Compressor of following rating (With one no. compressor
100% standby)
Capacity : 42000 Kcal/hr (+ - 5%)
Suction Temperature : - 5 Centigrade
Condensing Temperature : + 40 Centigrade
Permissible speed : 750 RPM
Reciprocating, Industrial, single stage, suction & discharge manifold

assembly having followings -
Accessories: Main Service Valves (Suction & Discharge) pressure gauges set
with gauge board, stand oil charging valve indicator, ferrule pipefitting & tool box.
Drive Set: Flywheel, Motor Pulley, V-belt, foundation bolts, plain base plate, keys,
HP, LP & OP Cut-off switches, belt guard, end plate with lock & bolt.
Oil Separator Vertical Type complete with standard connection & hydraulically
tested.
Ammonia Evaporative Condenser complete with G.I. Coils, eliminators, water

drain, gas inlet & outlet connection & hydraulically tested up to 25Kgs.
Ammonia Liquid Receiver horizontal type complete with standard connection &
hydraulically tested.
Ammonia Air Cooling Coils Unit completes with aluminum finned cooling coils
pipes, ammonia accumulator, axial fans with electric motor
Kirloskar/GEC/Crompton make.
Ammonia valves and Ammonia fittings for the low & high side of the complete
refrigeration plants as per our design.

Temperature thermometer dry and wet & one set pressure gauges for low, high
sides of the plants.
Gas charging pipe with standard connection.
Refrigeration compressor oil 210 (Lubricant) Liters.
Driving Accessories consisting of V-belts, motors rails and belt guard for
compressor.
Insulation of suction header, suction pipe line and ammonia accumulator with
Thermo Cole material including fixing components but without cladding work.
Ammonia pipe Line for the Low & high sides of complete plant as per design.
G.I. pipeline & fitting for the complete plant to interconnect as per design.
Cooling Tower bottle type (15 LPM) complete with inlet & outlet connections.
15 K.W. Induction Squirrel case Kirloskar/GEC/Crompton make electrical motor

suitable for operation on 3Ph/50HZ/Ac/400v/1440 RPM for Compressor. (One
motor for 100% standby Compressor).
0.75 K.W. Squirrel case electrical motor with pumping set suitable for operation on
3Ph/50 HZ/Ac/400v/1440 RPM for Compressor water jacket. (One pump 100%
standby)
1.5 K.W. squirrel case electrical water pumping set suitable for operation on
3Ph/50 HZ/Ac/400v/1440 RPM for EAC Condenser. (One pump 100% standby)
Suitable panel board with standard accessories for above motors, as per metro
design including wiring, fuses, MCB, Ampere meters, MCCB & Starters.
Electronic Liquid Level Controller with Solenoid Valve.
Temperature/Thermostat Electronic Controller.
Erection of the complete Refrigeration system and putting the plant in operation.
15.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM

SYSTEM
15.1 TECHNICAL DATA

15.1.1 The Tenderer shall submit comprehensive technical information for all the
equipment and material.
15.1.2 Technical catalogues and performance Tables/ Curves of all equipment
and machines must be submitted with the offer.

15.1.3 Information given herein is meant for general information only. In case of
discrepancies between tender specifications and details given hereunder,
the decision of Engineer-in-charge will be final and binding to the
Contractor.
15.2 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AND TESTING
15.2.1 The Contractor shall execute the work on the basis of indicative designs
provided hereunder, however, the detailed working drawing shall be
prepared by the contractor for approval by the Engineer in charge prior to
execution of work. All Variations, i.e. additions, omissions or substitutions
necessitated at anytime for any reason whatsoever, shall be deemed to
have been accepted by the Contractor. The work will be carried out by the
authorized agent of manufacturer.
15.2.2 All equipment shall be tested at manufacturer's Works as per latest relevant
governing specifications and Test Certificates/ Reports be submitted to the
Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall intimate 15 days in advance the
schedule date of such tests to the Engineer-in-charge to enable their
representatives to witness the tests. But under no circumstances factory test
shall absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for Performance of the
Equipment or System.
15.2.3 In addition to the above, all equipment and systems shall be tested after
installation as required by various statutory authorities, certifying agencies
and cost for the same shall be borne by the contractor.
15.2.4 The Contractor shall take full responsibility for proper operation of the entire
system.
15.2.5 It is the sole responsibility of Contractor to obtain all the necessary

approvals from the statutory authorities, either prior to, during or after
installation as required and cost for the same shall be borne by the
contractor.
15.2.6 On completion of erection, the contractor shall thoroughly clean all the
equipment, inspect and check the entire installation for correctness and
completeness and furnish a detailed report on all components of the
installation to Engineer-in-charge.
15.2.7 The Contractor shall intimate in writing to Engineer-in-charge, the
proposed date of initial startup.
15.2.8 All equipment shall be capable of performing the duties specified in these
specifications without damage, distortion or failure of any component.
15.2.9 All test instruments shall be calibrated for accuracy prior to taking the
performance tests.
15.3 CODES & STANDARDS
15.3.1 The Fire Alarm system shall comply with latest requirements of CPWD/IS
standards/NFPA/ National Building Codes etc.

15.3.2 In general the system and all components shall have EN54 / UL 9th
Edition Certification/Approval.
15.4 INSTALLATION:
15.4.1 Installation shall be in accordance with the local and state codes, as
shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer.
15.4.2 All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote
enunciators shall be flush mounted or surface mounted as per instructions
of the Engineer-in-charge.
15.4.3 Manual call boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush
mounting and shall be installed at a height of not less than 1,000 mm, or
more than 1200 mm above the finished floor level.
15.4.4 At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the
manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system
functions properly in every respect.
15.5 DEMONSTRATION:
15.5.1 The Contractor shall completely check out, calibrate and test all
connected hardware and software to ensure that the system performs in
accordance with the approved specifications and sequences of operations
submitted.
15.5.2 This demonstration shall consist of the following:
a) Display and demonstrate each type of data entry to show site specific
customizing capability.
b) Demonstrate parameter changes.
a) Demonstrate scan, update and alarm responsiveness and any other
demo which may be deemed fit.
15.6 MANUALS
The following manuals shall be provided at the time of Handing over:
15.6.1 An Operators Manual shall contain graphic explanations of keyboard use
for all operator functions specified under Operator Training.
15.6.2 Computerized printouts of all data file layouts including all point
processing programming details, flowcharts, etc.
15.6.3 On completion of works "As Built" drawings for completed
installation shall be prepared by the Contractor and (5) Five copies (in
hard and soft form) of the same will be supplied to the Engineer-in-
Charge. In addition, (5) Five sets of all Operation Manuals, Technical
Literature for the various components of equipment, Controls and
Accessories installed, Recommended Spares and Services Manuals will
be supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-charge.
15.7 TRAINING & HANDING -OVER

15.7.1 A comprehensive training for the operability of the system shall be
provided by the contractor.
15.7.2 Operator training shall include:
a) Sequence of Operation review
b) Sign ON - Sign OFF

c) Selection of all displays and reports

d) Commanding of points, keyboard
e) System initialization
f) Trouble shooting of sensors (determining bad sensors)
g) Password modification
15.7.3 Supervisor training shall include:
a) Password assignment/modification
b) Operator assignment/modification
c) Operator authority assignment/modification
d) Point disable/enable
e) Terminal and data segregation/modification
15.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
15.8.1 SCOPE OF WORK
15.8.1.1 The scope of work includes all items of work as per specifications,
drawings, terms and conditions of contract etc. required for successful
commissioning of the system. This shall include, but not limited to the
following:-
a) Intelligent Addressable Optical /Thermal type Multisensor Smoke
Detectors
b) Intelligent Addressable Thermal Detectors
c) Addressable Manual Call Points ( Resetting Type )
d) Microprocessor Based Modular Intelligent Addressable Main Fire

Alarm Control Panel for connecting and monitoring the Fire
Detectors and other devices.
e) Low /High Intensity Hooters activated from the Panel.
f) Providing suitable compatibility in the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel for
the Public Address System, audio Amplifiers, speakers & required wiring.
g) Electrical works, including Cabling, Earthing etc. for the installation.
h) All other works associated with above items as per specifications,
drawings and conditions of contract and obtaining NOC from State
Fire Department.
15.8.2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF INTELLIGENT FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM
15.8.2.1 The detectors shall be Addressable Intelligent optical/ Thermal
detectors.
15.8.2.2 The number of detectors and location shall confirm to relevant
standards. Addressable intelligent optical detectors shall be used. The
detectors shall give the visual and audible alarm at the respective
control Panel. The panels shall be located in the respective ground floor
control rooms.
15.8.2.3 The fire alarm panel shall operate at 240V+ 10% 50Hz. The FDAS
shall also be provided with a dedicated standby power supply system
(battery and charger) capable of maintaining the system for a period of

not less than 24 hours after failure of ac power supply after which
sufficient battery shall remain to provide full load operation for at least
30 minutes in line with IS 2189.
15.8.2.4 The FRLS cables shall be used from detectors to the alarm panel.
15.8.2.5 The system should be able to detect any type of smoke, fire and heat in
the respective site area.
15.8.3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM COMPONENTS:
BASIS OF DESIGN
An Intelligent Modular/ Expandable Fire Alarm System (IFAS) shall be
provided to effect total control over the life safety services required in the
building.
The system shall be provided with Addressable fire alarm initiating,
annunciating and control devices.
The addressable and intelligent system shall be such that smoke sensors,
thermal sensors, manual call points, etc., can be identified with point address.
The FAS shall be able to recognize normal and alarm conditions, below
normal sensor values that reveal trouble condition, and above normal values
that indicate either a alarm condition or the need of maintenance.
The operator shall also be able to adjust alarm and alarm thresholds and
other parameters for the smoke sensors.
Provide a maintenance/pre-alert/fault alarm capability at smoke sensors to
prevent the detectors from indicating a false alarm due to dust, dirt etc.
Provide alarm verification of individual smoke sensors. Alarm verification shall
be printed on the printer at the Control Stations printer to enhance system
maintenance and identify possible problem areas.
Provide local numeric point address and LED display of device and current
condition of the point.
Each detector shall use state-of-the-art Microprocessor Circuitry with error,
detector self-diagnostics and supervision programs.
The detection of the fire shall be taken at the detector level.
Multi-Criteria Detectors shall be offered where by the system logic activation
is based on any three inputs from the detector i.e. smoke, fixed heat or rate
of rise heat.
Provide outputs that are addressable, i.e. outputs shall have point address.
The operator shall be able to command such points manually or assign the
points to Logical Point Groups (Software Zones) for pre-programmed
operation.
In the event of a fire alarm, but not in a fault condition, the following action
shall be performed automatically.
a. The System Alarm LED on the main fire alarm control panel shall
flash.
b. A local sounder shall be sounded.
c. The LCD display on the main fire alarm control panel shall indicate
all information associated with Fire Alarm condition including the
type of alarm point and its location within the premises.
d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information

associated with the Fire Alarm Control Panel condition, along with
the time and date of occurrence.
e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event
programs that are to be activated by a particular point in alarm shall
be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification
appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
15.9 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

The Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall be networkable
type. FACP shall has its own microprocessor, software and memory. In
the event of failure of the central or communication breakdown between
the central station and the FACP, the FACP shall automatically operate
on stand-alone mode without sacrificing any functions.
The networking should be peer to peer type wherein all information is

available on all the panels
The panel should be modular microprocessor based in nature and should
be expandable from single loop to up to 20 loops with each loop
capable of up to 200 detectors or devices.
FACP shall supervise detection circuits and shall generate an alarm in
case of abnormal conditions.
FACP shall provide general purpose inputs for monitoring such functions
as low battery or AC power failure. FACPs shall provide tamper protection
and commendable outputs, which can operate relays or logic level
devices.
Smoke detectors shall be powered using the FACP-based smoke
detection circuits. FACPs shall provide for resetting smoke detectors,
fault-isolation and sensor loop operation. It shall be possible to mix
different fire devices within the same FACP to optimize field wiring.
It shall be possible for the panel to have a loop length with different
modules offering up to 2 km Loop length of devices from the panel.
FACPs shall provide monitoring and control of one floor or area or for
multiple floors or areas. FACPs shall meet the following requirements to
assure the integrity and reliability of the system :
a. The FACP shall be UL 9th Edition/ VDS/ EN54 listed
independently as a fire alarm control panel.
b. The FACP should have integrated power distribution module
and fixed cabling done internally to guarantee a clear and tidy
cable feed.
c. The panel should have a LCD touch screen with white
background lighting and keypad. The display should enable a
flexible design of the operating menu with variable keys and
message windows.
d. FACP should have menu Based operation.

e. All materials and components used in the panel are specified as

per UL 9th Edition/VDS/ EN54 Certification.
f. The panel should have a 230V AC power supply unit in plug-in
design with rack and panel connector is a 24VDC single output
power supply. The module should be protected against overvoltage
and reverse polarity. The output voltage is monitored and regulated
externally.
g. LCD display at the FACP shall be provided to indicate point in
alarm or trouble. In such systems, means for manually scanning
the points in trouble shall be provided and a trouble and alarm LED
shall be used to indicate that there are points in alarm/trouble. The
alarm/trouble LED shall only extinguish when all alarm/troubles are
cleared from the loop.
h. It shall be possible to command test, reset and alarm silence from
the FACP .FACP should have freely configurable detector zone
displays.
i. FACP should have a programmable software timer for automatic
switching of day operation mode to night operation mode, switching
of mode of operation of automatic multi-criteria fire detectors
j. FACP one freely programmable key switch with 2 switch positions
for code mode, day operation, switch-off and reset
k. FACP modules encapsulated for rugged handling as EMC
protection for electronics.
l. Programming & logging in of all panels in network is possible from
any panel.
m. FACP should have at least 10,000 history logs.
n. The fire panel must display the mixed operation of bidirectional,
digital data transmission between detector and control panel for
uniform switching of fire peripherals via a two-wire stub and/or loop
topology in a local security network (LSN) and direct current line
technology (conventional zone
o. Direct connection of a stub line to a loop at any location without
additional interfaces.
p. Graphics-capable touch screen with white background lighting and
screen size of at least 14 cm for display and operation of alarm
messages, malfunctions, switching and control procedures and
plain text displays of customer-specific data such as location data
q. Programmable software timer for automatic switching of day
operation mode to night operation mode, switching of mode of
operation of automatic multi-criteria fire detectors
r. Individual detector and detector zone switch-off
s. Output of stored messages in plain text on touch screen.

t. Linking of detector information for generating switch commands,

e.g. to panels, as well as activation of monitored LSN control
elements
u. one freely programmable key switch with 2 switch positions for
code mode, day operation, switch-off and reset
v. The FACP shall have Drift Compensation facility to compensate for
environment.
w. The display on FACP shall provide indication for AC Power,
System Alarm, System Trouble/Security Alarm, Display Trouble
and Signal Silence. This would mean that in the event of change of
any logic, detector / zone sequence alteration, the operator can
initiate these by use of the LCD touch pad & alpha-numeric keys
on the FACP panel to reconfigure the above parameters.
15.10 DETECTORS & ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

General features common to all detectors:
Built-in-response indicator: Each detector shall incorporate indicator LED
at the detector which shall link in normal condition and glow steady on
actuation of the detector to locate the detector which is operated while on
fire. The detector shall not be affected by the failure of the response
indicator lamp. The LED should be visible from a 360 deg view
Maintenance: All detectors shall be fitted either with plug-in system or
bayonet type connections only, from the maintenance and compatibility
point of view.
Construction: The components of the detectors must not be damaged by
static over voltage.
Addressable Optical/Thermal Smoke Detectors
Smoke detectors shall be addressable devices, and shall connect with two
wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel loops. The detectors shall be
ceiling mounted type
The detectors shall provide electronic address-setting by means of
configuration software.
The area covered by each smoke/heat detector shall be as per EN
54/VDS/UL 9th Edition guidelines.
Each detector shall have in built fault isolation unit.
Addressable Thermal Detectors
Thermal detectors shall be intelligent and addressable devices, and shall
connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel loops.
The detectors shall use an electronic detector to measure thermal
conditions caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel,
send data to the panel.
Addressable Optical/Thermal/Chemical Detectors (Multi Criteria)
Smoke detectors shall be addressable devices, and shall connect with
two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel loops. The detectors
shall be ceiling mounted type The main function of the gas detector is to

detect carbon monoxide generated due to fire, after the service life of a
gas detector it should continue to function as OT detector.
The detectors shall provide electronic address-setting by means of
configuration software.
The area covered by each smoke/heat detector shall be as per EN - 54
guidelines.
Beam Type Smoke Detectors :
With transmission, receiver, and evaluation units, for detecting light and dark
smokeover a distance of min. 10 m and max. 100 m with extra width of up to 14 m
- Stable metal housing
- Volume control with 15 increments for self-activated Compensation for
contamination and intentional aging
- Separate outputs for alarm and malfunction
- Measurement output for calibration and service mode
- Connection to detectors primary line using potential-free relay double-throw
contacts
Protection category: IP 54
Operating temperature range: -20 C to +55 C
Response sensitivity: 40%
Response time: Alarm 5s
Malfunction 1s
Addressable Manual Stations
Addressable manual stations shall be provided to connect to the Fire Alarm
Control Panel loops.
The manual stations shall on command from the Control Panel send data to
the panel representing the state of the manual station.
Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting.
Addressable Control Module :
Output should electrically isolated from loop
Switching of currents and voltages
owner supply to interface via two-wire line (line supply)
Addressing of interface either automatically or via code switch (allowing
unique assignment of installation location to address)
Addressable Sounder Base for Detectors
The Addressable Sounder Base shall be compatible with the Fire
detection and alarm panel offered.
It shall be roof mounted or wall mount type.
It shall be microprocessor based intelligent, addressable type .
It shall work at the same operating voltage of detectors.
It shall generate audio alarm on command from the fire detection and
alarm panel.
It shall be able to carry out self diagnosis and automatic device mapping.

It shall be able to withstand ambient temperature upto 50 deg.C.

It should be able to generate different types of tones.
Technical specifications
Operating voltage 15 V DC. . 33 V DC
Current consumption < 5 mA at maximum sound pressure level
Maximum sound pressure level is 100 dB(A) according to EN54-3
different tones programmable from the fire detector control panel
Frequency range of 450 Hz to 2 900 Hz
Various signals for pre-alarm and alarm
Protection category according to min IP 42
Operating temperature range min -25C to +85C
High resistance to electromagnetic effects.
Flasher
The flasher should support have flexibility to accept detector base or
Sounder base with no additional cabling or power supply, synchronized
flash rate of 1Hz.
Response Indicators
Remote Response Indicator shall be installed outside the areas normally
kept closed to identify the detectors response even if the room is locked.
These indicators shall be able to indicate the status of the corresponding
detectors in these areas.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with the IS 2189, NEC, NFPA 72, EN 54, local and
state codes, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.
All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators
shall be flush mounted or surface mounted as per direction given by E-in-C.
Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush
mounting.
Commissioning Procedure shall be carried out in a methodical sequence as
follows
Start-up,
Configuration,
Operability adjustment, Stable operation, Final adjustment
The Contractor shall finalize captured FDAS data to be recorded and the
manner in which the data is to be taken.
Instruction
Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on
demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system
including program changes and functions shall be provided.

The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a

type written "Sequence of Operation."
16.0 IP BASED VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

16.1. SCOPE:
16.1.1 The specification of Video Surveillance System covers technical

specification and requirement of IP based Video Surveillance
Systems consisting of indoor & outdoor fixed box type IP cameras,
fixed dome type IP cameras, indoor & outdoor P/T/Z IP dome
cameras, single/multi channel video encoders, video management
hardware & software, recording servers, switches, colour monitor etc.
for surveillance of ICP & other establishments from centralized location
at station.
16.1.2 Video Surveillance System shall be end to end IP based with IP

cameras as per site requirement.
16.1.3 The system shall be able to work on both wired as well as wireless
network. The wireless network is envisaged for extreme areas like,
yards, foot over bridges and any other area in the station where cable is
difficult to lay and maintain.
16.1.4 The entire system shall be based on open architecture where the
Cameras should be ONVIF Complaint and can work and integrate
with any m a ke of IT hardware.
16.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
16.2.1 Video Surveillance System to be provided at stations and other

railway establishment shall consist of fixed IP cameras, P/T/Z IP
dome cameras, single/multi channel encoders, recording servers and
PCs to view on LCD monitors and associated ethernet cable, fiber
cable, video cable, power cable, twisted pair cable etc.
16.2.2 It shall be possible to integrate the surveillance system using the

existing LAN / WAN infrastructure on optical / microwave backbone
network of ICP
16.2.3 In IP based video surveillance system, the cameras shall be provided at

different locations so that the output is available as ethernet and
connected to the backbone to the control room.
16.2.4 Each camera shall have a video at 4 CIF (Common Intermediate

Format) and 25 frames and a dual stream capability such that the
viewing and recording at different resolutions and frames per second
are possible.
16.2.5 IP based video surveillance system and cameras shall offer dual
streams of H.264 video compression standards at 4 CIF, 25 fps
simultaneously.
16.2.6 System shall provide secured recording for evidence purposes and user
authentication to protect data integrity.
16.2.7 The storage device for recording shall be external and of standard
make with RAID 5 protection.
16.2.8 The recording shall be preferably stored for at least 30 days at CIF, 25
frames per second. However the system should be capable of
recording at 4 CIF 25 frames per second for all cameras.
16.3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
16.3.1 Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) of video surveillance system

shall have office in India. OEM or its authorized representative shall
have service facility in India.
16.3.2 Manufactured products shall have quality system compliance and shall
be UL or EN and FCC certified.
16.3.3 All IP cameras and video management software should be from the same
manufacturer as all these equipments communicate directly with each
other.
16.3.4 All the IP cameras shall be freely accessible and programmable from the
control room.
16.3.5 It shall be possible to view any camera or group of cameras from the
MHA Headquarters, or any other locations at the time of emergency or
when ever desired with no extra hardware & software. Connectivity for
same shall be provided by ICP. Atleast 10 number of users licenses (or
as specified by purchaser) shall be provided to view a camera from
anywhere using the network viewing management software.
16.3.6 Every control room of surveillance system shall be capable of getting

connected to the optical or other communication backbone of ICP.
16.3.7 The power supply available at the locations shall be 230 V / 50 Hz AC

which may vary from 160 Volts to 270 Volts. All modules of the
surveillance system should work using this power supply only with
requisite converters & voltage stabilizers of suitable capacity, if required.

16.3.8 All the cameras and other modules of video surveillance system shall be
modular in construction. In case of up gradation of such modules in
future, it shall be possible to upgrade them without replacing the entire
product.
16.4 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
16.4.1 IP based Video surveillance System for all type of stations should
mainly consist of the following:
a) High resolution fixed box type IP colour camera with vari focal lens
along with housing and mount
b) High resolution fixed dome type IP colour camera
c) P/T/Z dome IP colour camera
d) Single/multi channel video encoder to convert existing analog camera to
IP enabled camera
e) Wireless Transmitter/Receiver Unit for yards
f) 40 LCD monitor for monitoring on large screen
g) 20 LCD monitor for workstations
h) Digital keyboard for P/T/Z functionality
i) PC Work Station for viewing, monitoring & system management
j) Server Hardware for Network Video Management & Recording
k) External Storage Device with RAID 5
l) Layer 2 Field Switch
m) Layer 3 Switch for the control room
n) UPS System
o) Various types of cables
p) Accessories for terminating optic fiber cables
q) Copper to Fiber Media Convertor
r) Network Video Management Software
s) Network Video Recording Software
t) Graphical User Interface Client Software
16.4.2 Fixed box type IP colour cameras should preferably be provided in

parking area, entrance/exit points, platforms, yards etc. or any other
locations as decided by purchaser.
16.4.3 Fixed dome type IP colour cameras should preferably be provided in

waiting halls, ticket counters, offices etc. or any other locations as
decided by purchaser.
16.4.4 High speed P/T/Z IP dome cameras should preferably be provided in

parking area, circulating area, platforms, foot over bridges etc. and for
general perimeter surveillance or any other locations as decided by
purchaser.
16.4.5 Wireless system should preferably be used for yards, where laying &
maintenance of cabling is difficult. As far as possible optical fiber network
shall be used.
16.4.6 For video surveillance system, there shall be required number of

workstations for monitoring, one server for video management and
required number of servers for video recording along with external
storage array with RAID 5 protection for recording all the cameras.
Minimum 16 cameras should be preferably viewed on one large monitor
or as specified by purchaser.
16.4.7 At locations where video surveillance systems of multiple stations are to

be viewed from one centralized location, the video surveillance system
shall be integrated with the available backbone of the ICP, details of
which shall be provided by ICP. The vendor shall supply all the
necessary interface equipments required for such integration.
16.4.8 At each location of video surveillance system, there shall be a local

control room with provision for monitoring & controlling cameras,
recording and playback.
16.4.9 Administrator of centralized control room shall have right to create or

delete any user from the system.
16.4.10 The Administrator shall be able to allow or deny a user access to some
specified camera/ control and playback at any given point of time.
16.4.11 CAT-6 cable shall be laid between IP cameras and switches installed in
the field.
16.4.12 From field switches, optical fiber cable is to be laid to central switch. If
distance between field switch & central switch is less than 90 meters,
CAT-6 cable may also be used. The field switches shall have
10/100/1000 SFP port for fiber interface for switch to switch
connectivity. All field switches should be connected to central switch in
star configuration. Media converter can be used for fiber connectivity to
remote IP camera.
16.4.13 Separate power cable is to be laid from central location to each

camera location, for powering all the cameras and other devices installed
in the field.
16.4.14 Monitoring & viewing work stations, video management server,

recording server, storage device, central switch & UPS are to be kept in
the main control room in AC environment.
16.4.15 All the equipment installed in outdoor conditions shall be housed

in IP 66 enclosure and such electronic items shall be able to withstand
00 C to +500 C (with or without housing) and humidity of 80% RH non-
condensing.
16.4.16 Suitable housing enclosures fitted with heater & blower kit shall be
provide to all outdoor equipments i.e. IP cameras, switches, encoders
etc. to satisfactory work upto temperature of -100C, if required due to
local weather conditions and specified by purchaser.
16.4.17 The system shall support activity controlled frame rate control. This is
required to automatically adjust frame rate depending on motion & scene.
During periods of negligible motion, the frame rate should drop to 1fps
and when motion occurs, the frame rate should return to 25 fps.
16.4.18 The system shall be compliant to global standard ONVIF (Open

Network Video Interface Forum) for the interface of network video
products.
16.5 2 MEGAPIXEL FULL HD 60fps IR NETWORK DOME CAMERA
The camera should have multi codec streaming facility with having power
over Ethernet features. It should be having the 3x zoom facility through
the software i.e. the optical zoom of the camera can be operated from the
video management software through the PC/ Server. Also further digital
zoom to be possible.it should have the following image enhancement
features like -- Backlight Compensation, 2D+3D DNR, Exposure Control,
Defog, AGC, White Balance, Privacy Masking, EIS, Sharpness, x3 optical
zoom., Smart IR. The camera should be intelligent camera with having
the in-built video analytics features like Motion detection, Tampering
alarm, Face detection.
DESCRIPTION
A. Multi-Codec (H.264, MJPEG) Steaming
B. PoE (Power over Ethernet) Support (802.3af)
C. PoE Support
D. Audio Support (G.711, G.726 Full Duplex)
E. Pre/Post Alarm Support
F. Auto White Balance
G. Integrated IR LEDs
H. WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)
I. 3-9 mm (x3 Zoom)
J. Built-in IR LED, viewable length of 20 mtrs
K. X3 Compact Zoom
L. Defog function to support clear image in all weather conditions
M. Max frame rate 60fps @ 1920 x 1080
N. Video Analytics - Motion detection, Tampering alarm, Face detection
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Image Device 1/3 Type CMOS
B. Lens Type 3-9 mm (x3 Zoom)
C. Focus Auto
D. Day & Night ICR (IR Cut Removable)
E. IR Distance 20m
F. Min. Illumination Color : 0.05 (F1.2)
B/W : 0 lx (IR LED on)
G. Image Enhancement Backlight Compensation, 2D+3D DNR,
Exposure Control,
Defog, AGC, White Balance, Privacy Masking,
EIS, Sharpness, x3 optical zoom.,
Smart IR
H. Max Resolution 1920 x 1080
I. Output RJ-45 (Network), BNC (Installation)
J. Frame Rate (Maximum) 60 fps @ 1920 x 1080
K. Compression H.264(High profile supported), MJPEG
L. Multi-Streaming Multi-Streaming
M. Audio Compression G.711, G.726
N. 2-way Audio Support
O. SD Slot micro SD
P. Event Alarm In/out : 1/1
Motion detection : Supprot
Event Notification : Relay Out, Email, FTP
Pre Event Buffering : Support
Q. Video Analaytics Intelligent Motion Detection
Tampering Alarm, Face Detection
R. Integrated Client VMS Suite

S. System Update VMS Suite or Web Client
T. Connections Up to 20
U. Security Password Protection, HTTPS(SSL, TLS)
V. Ethernet RJ45 10/100 Base-T
W. Protocol IPv4/6 - TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP,
RTSP, DHCP, ICMP, QoS IPv4 - FTP, SMTP,
NTP, ARP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, DDNS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Power Source PoE

B. Power Consumption 10.6 W
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Operation Temperature/Humidity -10C to 50C / 0% RH to 80 % RH
General
Optical Zoom Min 3 x
16.6 2 MEGAPIXEL FULL HD 60fps IR NETWORK Bullet CAMERA
DESCRIPTION
A. Multi-Codec (H.264, MJPEG) Steaming
B. PoE (Power over Ethernet) Support (802.3af)
C. PoE Support
D. Audio Support (G.711, G.726 Full Duplex)
E. Pre/Post Alarm Support
F. Auto White Balance
G. Integrated IR LEDs
H. WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)
I. 3-9 mm (x3 Zoom)
J. Built-in IR LED, viewable length of 30 mtrs
K. X3 Compact Zoom
L. Defog function to support clear image in all weather conditions
M. Max frame rate 60fps @ 1920 x 1080
N. Video Analytics - Motion detection, Tampering alarm, Face detection

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Image Device 1/3 Type CMOS
B. Lens Type 3-9 mm (x3 Zoom)
C. Focus Auto
D. Day & Night ICR (IR Cut Removable)
E. IR Distance 30m
F. Min. Illumination Color : 0.05 (F1.2)
B/W : 0 lx (IR LED on)
G. Image Enhancement Backlight Compensation, 2D+3D DNR,
Exposure Control, Defog, AGC, White
Balance,
Privacy Masking, EIS, Sharpness, x3 optical
zoom., Smart IR
H. Max Resolution 1920 x 1080
I. Output RJ-45 (Network), BNC (Installation)
J. Frame Rate (Maximum) 60 fps @ 1920 x 1080
K. Compression H.264(High profile supported), MJPEG
L. Multi-Streaming Multi-Streaming
M. Audio Compression G.711, G.726
N. 2-way Audio Support
O. SD Slot micro SD
P. Event Alarm In/out : 1/1
Motion detection : Supprot
Event Notification : Relay Out, Email,
FTP Pre Event Buffering : Support
Q. Video Analaytics Intelligent Motion Detection
Tampering Alarm, Face Detection
R. Integrated Client VMS Suite
S. System Update VMS Suite or Web Client
T. Connections Up to 20
U. Security Password Protection, HTTPS(SSL, TLS)
V. Ethernet RJ45 10/100 Base-T
W. Protocol IPv4/6 - TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP,
RTSP, DHCP, ICMP, QoS IPv4 - FTP, SMTP,
NTP, ARP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, DDNS

A. Power Source PoE

B. Power Consumption 10.6 W
A. Operation Temperature/Humidity -10C to 50C / 0% RH to 80 % RH

General
O. Ingress Protection IP66,IK10
P. Optical Zoom Min 3 x
16.7 2 MEGAPIXEL Network PTZ Camera 30x zoom with Auto Tracking
DESCRIPTION
The camera is designed for installation in an outdoor video surveillance

system.
The camera provides the high quality picture with 6.49mm (1/2.8 Type)
CMOS Sensor.
The network camera offers 2M resolution (1920 x 1080).
The camera provides video compression dual codec(H.264 and MJPEC).
The camera supports IP66.
The camera must always be operated by AC24V, PoE(IEEE 802.3at)
The camera provides Auto Tracking function.
Image Sensor 1/3 Type CCD/CMOS

Lens x30 Zoom, F1.6-F5.0, f=4.3-129mm
Resolution Up to 1920 x 1080
Min. Illumination Color : 1 Lux (AGC High, Sens-up Off)
B/W : 0.1 Lux (AGC High, Sens-up Off)
Day & Night ICR (Auto / Day / Night) * ICR : IR Cut
Reduced
Image Enhancement Backlight compensation, 3D-DNR, Exposure
Control / Sens-up / AGC / White
Balance / Privacy masking/ EIS /
sharpness / Auto Digital Zoom
Optical Zoom x30
Panning Range & Speed 0~360, Max. 500/Sec
Tilting Range & Speed 0~180, Max. 500/Sec
Auto Panning 2 8 Points
Preset 256
Group Touring Max. 10 Groups
Pattern 4ea
Video In / Out 1 BNC Out
Audio In / Out 1 In / 1 Out
Alarm In / Out 4 In / 2 Out
SD Slot YES
NETWORK
Video Compression H.264, MJPEG
Frame Rate 30 fps @ 1080p
Multi Streaming Dynamic Profile
Open Protocol ONVIF 2.2 Profile S, PSIA 1.1
Audio Compression G.726,G.711
Two-way Audio Yes
Motion Detection Yes
Event Notification Relay Out / Email / FTP / Go to Preset
Pre Event Buffering 5/5 Seconds
Ethernet RJ-45 10/100 BASE-T
Security Password Protection, HTTPS(SSL,
TLS)
Protocol
IPv4/IPv6 : TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP,
RTSP, DHCP, ICMP
IPv4 : FTP, SMTP, NTP, ARP, SNMP
v1/v2c/v3, DDNS (LG)
Web Viewer Microsoft Internet Explorer above the
version 7.0 and below the
version 9.0.
Power Source AC24V, PoE(IEEE 802.3at)

Power Consumption 25W(AC24V, PoE)
Operating Temperature/Humidity -20 ~ 50 / 0% ~80%RH

Storage Temperature/Humidity -30 ~ 60 / 0% ~90%RH
Ingress Protection Vandal Proof / IP66
16.8 28x Network PTZ Camera
DESCRIPTION
The camera is designed for installation in an outdoor video surveillance

system.
The camera provides the high quality picture with 4.5mm (1/4 Type) CCD.
The network camera offers 704x480(NTSC), 704x576(PAL) resolution.

The camera provides video compression dual codec(H.264 and MJPEC).
The camera supports IP66.
Image Sensor 4.5mm (1/4 Type) CCD
Lens x28 Zoom, F1.5-F3.0, f=3.5-98mm
Resolution Up to 704 x 480 (NTSC)
Up to 704 x 576 (PAL)
Min. Illumination Color: 0.2 Lux (Sens-up : 0.003 Lux)
B&W: 0.01 Lux (Sens-up X128 :
0.00001 Lux)
Day & Night ICR(Auto / Day / Night), * ICR : IR Cut
Removal
Image Enhancement Backlight Compensation / Exposure
Control / Sens-up Control / AGC / White
Balance / Privacy Masking / Digital
Zoom / EIS
Optical Zoom x28
Panning Range & Speed 0~360, Max. 500/Sec
Tilting Range & Speed 0~180, Max. 500/Sec
Auto Panning 2 8 Points
Preset 256
Group Touring Max.10 Groups
Pattern 4ea
Video In / Out 1 BNC Out
Audio In / Out 1 In / 1 Out
Alarm In / Out 4 In / 2 Out
NETWORK
Video Compression H.264, MJPEG

Frame Rate 30 fps @ 4CIF + 30 fps @ CIF (NTSC)
25 fps @ 4CIF + 25 fps @ CIF (PAL)
Multi Streaming Dual Streaming
Open Protocol ONVIF 1.02, PSIA 1.1
Audio Compression G.726,G.711
Two-way Audio Yes
Motion Detection Yes
Event Notification Relay Out / Email / FTP / Go to Preset
Pre Event Buffering 5/5 Seconds
Ethernet RJ-45 10/100 BASE-T
Security Password Protection, HTTPS(SSL,
TLS)
Protocol
IPv4/IPv6 : TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP,
RTSP, DHCP, ICMP
IPv4 : TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTP, RTSP,

UDP, DHCP, ICMP, FTP, SMTP,
NTP, ARP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
DDNS(LG)
Web Viewer Microsoft Internet Explorer above the
version 6.0 and below the
version 8.0.
Video Management Software VMS
Suite, Mobile Application (iPhone, iPad,
Android) Connections Up to 10
Power Source AC24V

Power Consumption Max. 25W
Operating Temperature/Humidity -20 ~ 50 / 0% ~80%RH

Storage Temperature/Humidity -30 ~ 60 / 0% ~90%RH
Ingress Protection Vandal Proof / IP66
16.9 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE --

Sr.No Required Parameters
1 The VMS shall have the following licensing policies:
The VMS shall not have base licenses and standard channel modules. The
1.1 VMS shall be flexible to provide and support licenses for any number of
cameras.
The VMS licensing shall allow changing any and all of the cameras at any
1.2
time without extra cost or license key change
1.3 The VMS shall not require online licensing process
The VMS shall support instant device replacement using original IP
1.4
address
2 Recording redundancy and fail over levels supported
The VMS shall support software inbuilt modified RAID 0 for fault tolerance -
2.1
continuous recording even after disk failure
2.2 Redundant recording
i. Warm standby recorder: in case of a recorder hardware failure, it is
possible to restore the backed up settings of the failed recorder into the
spare recorder server where the VMS is also installed
ii. Redundant recorders: have two recorders with same settings in different
locations. One is primary and the other is secondary. Primary server is
used to configure cameras, secondary server is used only to receive
streams and record. Camera stream can be multicasted to preserve
network bandwidth

The VMS described in this specification is highly scalable Multi Site

enterprise level (IP) based Video Management (VMS) Software.The NVMS
shall have at present capacity to switch, control and record up to 64
3 cameras per server. One master server shall have the capacity to control
99 slave servers.The system shall be able to Support Minimum 1000
cameras and shall be expandable to unlimited cameras in future by adding
more slave and master servers.
The proposed solution shall not require proprietary camera,computer,
server,network or storage hardware and shall provide seamless integration
4 of third party security infrastructure,wherever possible. Software shall be
Onvif and PSIA compliant with APIs and SDKs available without any
additional charge
5 The VMS shall support inbult Video Analytics.
The VMS shall be Windows based supporting native or virtualized
Windows Server 2008R2 and Server 2012 and Windows 7 and 8. The VMS
6
shall allow operation with PC Keyboard,Mouse and DirectX
compliantCCTV Keyboard(Joystick)
The VMS shall be able to support cameras at upto 60 frames per second
and any resolution supported by the camera and the camera driver. The
7
VMS shall automatically offer only supported fps and resolution
combinations for user convenience.
The system shall allow the recording, live monitoring, playback of recorded
8
video audio,and data simultaneously
9 The VMS software shouldn't require additional Database Server.
10 The VMS shall allow bidirectional audio communication with the cameras
The VMS shall be able to integrate with other systems using video, data or
11
digital I/O
12 The VMS shall not limit the storage size.
The VMS shall support Network Attached Storage (NAS) systems and shall
13
have the ability to directly record in NAS
14 The VMS shall support H.264, MPEG-4 and MJPEG compression methods
15 The VMS shall support multi streaming
The VMS shall support exporting video in a tamper proof format. The
16 media player provided in the software shall automatically notify if the video
or audio has been modified
The VMS shall provide file export tool for export of single frame of video in
17 BMP, GIF, TIF, JPG and PNG formats and export of video files in ASF,AVI
and MKV format
18 Live Display of Cameras
19 Various layout configurations(2X2,3X3&4X4etc.)
20 Recording of Video and Audio
21 Playback of Video and Audio
22 Should support multicast communication
23 Configurable recording rate per camera
24 Remote Administration,Monitoring & Management of Video
25 Archiving Support
26 Logical camera grouping
27 Quick review of the recorded video
Support any video resolution like CIF, 2CIF, 4CIF & HD up to 8MP and
28
above
Support for IP Cameras & Encoders (for analog camera interface) The
29 VMS shall also have a hybrid solution where both analog and IP cameras
can be directly connected to the PC recorder without use of encoders
30 Quick search of devices in the viewing application
31 Extended camera viewing on multiple monitors
32 Multi camera sequential tours
33 Digital zooming feature for live video and playback
Facility for exporting the video on a portable media such as
34
pendrive/DVD/portable hard disk etc
35 Alarm pop ups for the associated cameras
36 Virtual camera views
37 PTZ Support
38 Video search on the basis of date, time, event, camera, location & alarm
39 Post recording motion search analysis
40 Image enhancement tools for live and playback
41 Object virtual PTZ following
Ability to Define a Virtual camera that focuses in the part of camera view be
it live or playback. using Virtual Cameras one can view chosen parts of the
full recorded Camera View in a Separate Window. View Specific Area of
42 interest in a virtual camera and choose per virtual camera for zooming,
View , Aspect Ratio and resolution. Virtual cameras may overlap each
other. Atleast 8 such Virtual camera can be made from one single camera
view.
Recording Software
Software shall operate in server-client architecture. The servers shall
1 include recorders, system management server(s) and possible
gateway/web server(s).
Software should be of enterprise level and able to handle up to 64 cameras
with one recorder. One master recorder shall manage a system of up to
2 100 recorders with the possibility to expand the system to include multiple
master recorders. Recorder Software should have a spare of minimum 15
%
The system management server shall run as a Windows service on one of
the recorders. The system management server shall control the following:
a) Overall system operation.
b) Data communication between recorders and client programs.
3
c) Maintain user and profile lists.
d) Authenticate and authorize users and applications.
e) Maintain system logs.
f) Handle system diagnostics.
Software shall allow the recording, live monitoring, playback of archived
4 video,audio and data, network transmission and changes to settings
simultaneously.
Server software shall enable the client to dynamically create connections
5
between Cameras and workstations and view live or recorded video on the
digital monitors(audio, video,serial ports and digitalI/Os)
Server software shall provide the client seamless operation of all cameras
6 and workstations available in the system regardless of the actual
connection to different archive servers
The recorders shall support multistreaming between the recorder server
7
and the client machines
Offered software shall use standard servers for all the processing and shall
8
not need any proprietary server hardware
The alarms may be triggered by the following events:
a. Motion (or lack of motion) in camera view
b. Change in sound level
c. Text data string
9
d. Digital input signal from an external device
e. Missing camera signal (resulting for example from sabotage)
f. Custom event from 3rd party application.
g. Video Content Analytics (VCA) event from inbuilt.
The alarm management shall support the following automatic responses:
a. Pre- and post-recording of video and audio
b. Opening an alarm camera window or audio window (real-time or
playback) on the workstation screen
c. Displaying the alarm on the alarm list
10 d. Activating a digital output
e. Turning a dome camera to a preset position
f. Starting a dome camera tour
g. Sending an alarm e-mail message
h. The alarm management shall be able to acknowledge alarm
automatically or manually
The alarm management shall support the following alarm viewing features:
a. It should provide the facility to assign the priority level to different alarms.
b. It should allow pass the specifical arms to specified users rather than
sending all alarms to every user.
11 c. Users in same user group should see and be able to manage received
alarms assigned for the same user group. All users should see the alarm
status in real time.
d. System should have single alarm stack even though there are multiple
recording servers
Software should allow creation of multiple camera sequences.It should be
12
possible to set the dwell time for the cameras within the sequence.
Software should allow taking the backup of the recorder server
13
configuration and restoring the same if required.
Software should allow easy and user friendly menus for camera
14 configurations. It shall allow changing settings for multiple cameras of the
same type simultaneously
Software should provide totally configurable user privileges with
15 independent user rights. The user privileges are saved in profiles which
can be assigned for the required users

Software should support the export of video clips.It should allow the export
of multiple camera videos simultaneously. Export should be possible in
16 ASF, AVI and MKV format.The video clips shall be playable either using
the software specific player or Windows Media Player. The software
specific player shall support authenticity check for the media clips
Software should provide the utility to interface the recorder servers with
internet.Internet Gateway server shall allow clients to view live and
17
playback video streams, control PTZ cameras and control digital I/O
devices over the internet
Software shall allow the client applications to interact with multiple recorder
18 servers simultaneously and allow the simultaneous display cameras from
different recorders on the same monitor
The VMS shall support reporting tool with the following features:
a. Alarm reports, for example daily or weekly alarm statistics.
19
b. Audit trail search with filters for time, user, action, device and application.
c. The reporting tool shall be web based for easy access.
The VMS shall support baggage scanner integration using screen capture
20
from the baggage scanner workstation.
The VMS shall support at least 20 different Camera manufacturer, ONVIF
21 and PSIA
ClientSoftware
The client programs shall include end user client program, system
1 management client program, browser-based client program and mobile
client programs, atleast 10 concurrent client license to be provided
2 The end user client program shall support multiple profiles for each user
Client applications shall provide an authentication mechanism,which
3 verifies the validity of the user through the selected system management
server
Client shall perform the following applications simultaneously without
interfering with any of the Archive Server operations (Recording,
Alarms,etc.)
a. Live display of cameras and audio
b. Live display of camera sequences
4 c. Playback of video and audio
d. Media search tools
e. PTZ control
f. Display and control of Maps
g. Alarm management
h. Digital I/O control
Client applications shall support any form of IP network connectivity
5
including:LAN, WAN, VPN, Internet and Wireless
Client applications shall support IP Multicast (RTP) and Unicast (TCP or
6 RTP) video and audio streaming as required depending on the network
capabilities
7 Client application should support multi monitor workstations
Client application should support both dynamic and predefined Video
8
display layouts, for example Fullscreen, Quad ,3x3 ,4x4 ,1+5,1+12 etc.
Client application shall enable playback of audio along with video.The

9 monitor shall enable the user to work with multiple Audio layouts containing
collections of audio clips
Users shall be able to define and store their own layouts, which they will be
able to recall later through a layout list. Each layout shall contain
10
information about the dimensions and positions of all windows along with
image filter data and data about the active profile
Client application shall enable playback of audio mixed from both live and
11 recorded audio sources, allowing the user to control the volume of each
source independently as well as mute them
Client application shall be able to control the playback with play, pause,
12
forward and speed buttons
Client application shall allow operators to save bookmarks with description
13
of the recorded video, audio and text data
Client application shall provide drag and drop facility for selection of the
14
devices to be viewed in the viewing layout
Client application shall support Graphical Site Representation (Maps)
functionality,where digital maps are used to represent the physical location
15 of cameras and other devices throughout facility. Maps should have the
capability to add the hyperlinks to create interlinked maps. It should allow
the selection of any camera for display from the map
Client application shall support digital zoom on a fixed/PTZ cameras live
16
and recorded video streams
Client application shall provide management and control over the system
using a standard PC mouse, keyboard or CCTV keyboard. The client
application shall support area zoom and click to center functions for PTZ
17
cameras if supported by the specific camera driver. Area zoom zooms into
the rectangle drawn by mouse and click to center means clicking anywhere
on the PTZ camera view centers the camera to that position
Client application shall be able to control pan-tilt-zoom, iris, focus, presets
18
and dome patterns of the PTZ camera
Software should provide the ability to play multiple video channels in time
19 sync with each other. Software shall support exporting a multichannel clip
with video, audio and text channel data
Any user can share layouts and should be visible to all users od same
20
profile
21 Ability to Autocrop
16.10 VIDEO ANALYTICS VCA

Sr.No Required Paramaeters
1 The video analytics (VA) shall be an inbuilt solution from the VMS
manufacturer where the video analytics software is included in the basic VMS
installation package.The VCA should run in the same Recorder as that of the
VMS . Separate Hardware shouldn't be required.
2 The Video Analytics (VA) shall be designed to provide Intelligent Video
Analysis for 24/7 surveillance with support for 3rd party devices
3 The VA configurator shall work as an independent windows application
4 The VA configurator shall have easy to use graphical user interface with live
alarms list for easy parameter fine tuning and feedback.
5 The VA shall work as windows service.
6 The VA alarms shall be recorded in the VMS similarly like other alarms, for
example motion detection, audio detection and digital input alarms.
7 The VMS shall store the VA alarm video and image files for export
8 The VA shall support video from any camera supported by the VMS.
9 The VA shall support cameras using any of the video compression formats
H.264/MPEG4/MJPEG.
10 The VMS shall support scheduling so that that VA alarms can be enabled or
disabled for a certain period of time
11 Calibration
The video analytics shall have an easy to use 3D calibration tool where 3D
calibration objects are matched to the actual camera viewing scene. The
calibration parameters include camera height, camera viewing angle and
camera tilt angle.
12 Object tracking
a. Tracks up to 100 targets simultaneously.
b. Tracks objects when they stop or move very slowly
c. Continues to track objects which pass each other, ensuring that the trail is
continuous and unbroken
d. Continues tracking when objects are partially or completely obscured
temporarily
e. Adjusts to image degradation caused by rain, fog, dirty camera lens and
low sun position causing dazzle
f. Ignores changes in light due to clouds and switching on artificial lights or
camera auto-iris operation
g. Ignores repetitive movement waving trees, rippling water
h. Ignores cloud shadows passing across the ground
i. Ignores video interference and missing video frames
13 Detection zones
Up to 40 detection zones that are polygonal with a variable number of
vertices so that any shape can be supported. Detection zone can also be a
line, which can have one or many segments
14 Presence
The Presence filter detects when an object, person or vehicle is inside or
crossing a zone or a line.
15 Camera tampering
Detects moving, defocusing or covering of the camera
16 Enter and Exit Detection
An object entered alarm is raised when an object crosses from the outside
to the inside of a detection zone. Conversely, an object exited alarm is
raised when an object crosses from the inside to the outside of a detection
zone.
17 Stopping Detection

Objects that are stopped inside a zone for longer than the defined amount of
time will trigger the rule and raise an alarm.
18 Dwell detection
Objects that dwell inside a zone for longer than the pre-defined amount of
time will trigger the rule and raise an alarm.
19 Directional Detection
Objects that travel in the configured direction (within the limits of the
acceptance angle) through a zone or over a line trigger the rule and raise an
alarm.
20 Tailgating Detection
Object tailgating is defined as two objects crossing a virtual line or zone
within in a pre-defined time frame. For example, a second unauthorized
vehicle enters a parking lot close to a first vehicle that has access
permission, or two people enter a security zone with a single access card.
21 Object Classification
VCA can perform object classification once the camera has been calibrated.
Object classification is based on properties extracted from the object
including object area and speed.
22 Objects Counting
Up to 40 counters linked to the detection rules, provide counting of all
detection objects.
23 Camera shake cancellation object tracker works even if the camera is on a
swaying pole
16.11 SERVER AND STORAGE

SERVER
Video Management -- 2U Rack server
Processor/Cache
Dual Socket LGA 2011
Dual Intel Xeon E5 -2620 v2 processor (Hexacore,2.1Ghz clock
frequency)
Cache upto 15 MB per Processor
QPI upto 7.2 GT/sec
System Memory
16 X 240 pin DDR3 DIMM sockets
Current memory of 32 GB DDR3 1600
Can scale upto 512 GB DDR3 ECC Registered
RAID Architecture
LSI SAS 2208 chipset with 1Gb cache Hardware RAID controller
for RAID 0,1,10,5,50,60
Onboard Devices
Intel C602 chipset
Support for Intelligent Platform Management Interface v.2.0
IPMI 2.0 with virtual media over LAN and KVM-over-LAN support
Network Controllers/ports
Intel i350 Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet (2 RJ 45 LAN ports)
Virtual Machine Device Queues reduce I/O overhead
Supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T, RJ45
output
1x RJ 45 (IPMI port)
Drive Bay Details
12x 3.5" Hot-swap SAS / SATA Drive Bays and optional 2x 2.5"
Hot-swap SAS/SATA Drive Bays on rear side of Chassis
E16: Single Expander SAS2 backplane
Hard Disk Details
Enterprise Hard Drives for 24 X 7 video surveillance
2 TB SATA 6 GBPS 7.2K rpm
64 MB cache , 5.90 watts
AFR(Annualized Failure Rate) < 1%
MTBF of > 1M hours
Power Details
920watts high-efficiency (94+%) power supply with PMBus
Windows Storage Server 2012 R2

Unlimited Number of users
Unlimited SMB connections
Iscsi target server
Updated DFS replication
Updated Failover Clustering
Updated Hyper V
Updated storage spaces
Updated Storage Management API
Microsoft SQL 2012
Powerful selfservice BI tools ; Built in Master Data
Management
High scale Complex Event processing ; Application and
Multiserver Management
Live Migration in Hyper V
17. 0 PUBLIC ADDRESS and VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

17.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

17.1.1 The design, supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of the Public Address System shall include, but not
limited to the following:
a Recessed mount (ceiling), surface mount, column and / or horn
speakers,, box c/w line matching transformers and volume
controls, where applicable;
b Termination of all cables to speakers, power amplifiers, etc.;
c Equipment rack complete with forced air ventilation fan(s),
mounting brackets blank panels, terminal boards, etc.;
d Main equipment and all associated auxiliary equipment;

e Distribution cabling, including fire rated cables, where applicable,
cable ladders, racks and cable supporting systems (cable trunking
and concealed metal conduits); and
f All other works and materials necessary for the efficient operation
of the whole audio system c/w power supply requirements and
surge arrestors and filters.
17.1.2 The primary objective of the system is to provide clear announcements
during public addressing and one-way voice communication during an
emergency; the secondary function shall be to provide background
music where required.
17.1.3 The system shall be capable of fulfilling the following requirements:
a Clear, un-distorted announcements to selected areas during public
addressing;
b Clear, un-distorted paging to all zones; either individually or
collectively. Selection of groups of zones shall be programmable from
time to time; and
c Background music to selected areas when the other functions are
not selected.
17.1.4 The zones shall further be grouped according to function so that it shall
be possible to make an announcement by depressing just one switch
on the call station/PC call station..
17.1.5 To allow flexibility in the system, it shall be designed to cater for input
switching. Switching of the zones shall be done on the input side, with
each zone having its own amplifier.
17.1.6 When the zones are selected for public addressing, a chime shall first
be heard, followed by the announcement. The system shall have a
range of tones such that it shall be possible to programme different
tones for different call stations.
17.1.7 It shall be possible for the system to function with different call stations
in operation simultaneously, provided there is no conflict in the zones
being called by the call stations. A minimum of simultaneous 28 audio
channels shall be allowed for routing of audio to the power amplifier.
17.1.8 The central network controller shall have a system of priorities such
that, should a conflict situation arise, the station or user key with the
top priority will override the others. This sequence of priorities shall
be determined and programmed during the commissioning stage; it
shall be possible to change the sequence by on-site as well as off-site
re-programming, as and when the need arises.
17.1.9 The system shall comply with country Public Address Evacuation Code
of practice or IEC 60849 for the one-way emergency voice
communication system in all aspects.
17.1.10 All control and switching equipment shall be centralised and
decentralized as specified and located in equipment racks which will be
placed in the customs building, passenger building and trade mart
area. No other equipment except the cable patch panel shall be
located outside the equipment rack.

17.1.11 All equipment supplied shall be from the same manufacturer.

Equipment supplied shall strictly be Standard Products from Public
Address Product Manufacturer. No tailor-made product shall be
acceptable. The tenderer shall submit catalogues of all equipment
offered and upon delivery; certificate of country of origin, Certificate of
Conformity and Certificate of Evacuation for the proposed PA
Equipment shall be submitted.
17.1.12 All equipments offered shall comply to safety standard IEC 65, CE,
FCC and EN60849 and other equivalent safety standard. Equipment
offered without safety protection shall be subjected to rejection.
17.2 MATERIALS
17.2.1 All materials shall be of new and unused quality. All equipment and
materials previously installed or used shall be rejected. Materials and
equipment shall be stored in such a manner-as to be in a new
condition when installed and to avoid damage from weather and site
conditions. Damaged, deformed and cracked equipment or materials
shall be rejected. Replacement shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor at no additional cost to the end user.
17.2.2 Materials and equipment to be incorporated into the works (as called
for in this specification) are required to meet the quality / testing
standards of designated institutes, societies and standards
associations. However, equivalent materials and equipment items
meeting other authoritative standards which ensure an equal or
higher quality than the standards mentioned may also be accepted if
the Engineer encharge. gives his approval.
17.2.3 Should the contractor propose to furnish materials and equipment other
than those specified as permitted by the or approval equivalent
clause, he shall submit a written request for any such substitution.
Such requests shall be accompanied by complete descriptive
(manufacturers, Certifications, brand name, catalog number, etc) and
technical data for all items, samples of both the specified and the
proposed substitute items.
17.2.4 Acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitutions shall be
subjected to the approval of the Engineer encharge.
17.2.5 The expenses incurred by any such exercise shall be borne in full by
the Contractor.
17.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
17.3.1 For general office and public areas, the system shall be capable of
delivering a sound pressure level of 85 dB at the listening level.
17.3.2 The listening level shall be taken to be 1.5 m above floor level.
17.3.3 The reinforced sound shall be distributed evenly throughout the
listening area; the total variation in each area shall not exceed 4 dB.
17.3.4 An articulation loss of consonants of less than 15% shall be
maintained. (Generally, the reverberation time of the various locations
shall be assumed to be not more than 1.9 seconds).
17.3.5 Paging announcements shall be possible from any of the microphone
call stations, or from the microphone paging station to any zones within
the network systems.
17.3.6 Each call station shall have LEDs, to monitor the status of the system
that signal an announcement may be made or the selected zone is
engaged (that is, with another announcement) ,to indicate the status of
the call station and to monitor the power to the call station.
17.3.7 The microphone paging station shall have the flexibility of selecting any
number of user keys (selection buttons) at any one time. It shall be
able to program each user key for any function.
17.3.8 The central network controller shall be a web-based controller. It shall
be using be using web technology for the user interfaces and system
interaction. It shall have a means of monitoring, to continuously monitor
the system from the microphone of the call station onwards; any faults
shall be displayed on the screen of the Alpha-Numeric Display as well
as the Central Monitoring, Configuration and Diagnostic PC.
17.3.9 It shall be able to deliver high quality signals to the loudspeakers; all
individual audio equipment shall have its own Digital Signal Processing
modules.
17.3.10 High quality signals shall be maintained at the output of the power
amplifiers( DSP based amplifiers) to compensate for losses in the
audio distribution lines.
17.3.11 Each power amplifier (DSP based amplifier) shall have a built-in self-
restoring protection circuit to guard against hazards of operation such
as mis-loading at its input, short-circuiting of its output and connection
mistakes.
17.3.12 The power amplifiers (DSP based amplifier) shall also have built-in line
transformers for 100V loudspeaker matching, DC input of emergency
operation, headphone monitor output, adjustable input sensitivity, and
shall conform to the safety standard of IEC 65489. It shall have
amplifier monitoring and auto-changeover over circuits & automatic
volume control features built-in.
17.3.13 The power amplifiers shall have control inputs and audio inputs for
interfacing for fire alarm signals. This control inputs shall be
supervised, freely programmable for any system actions and with
priorities setting. Each power amplifier shall have digital audio
processing to ensure good audio quality being delivered to the
Loudspeakers.
17.3.14 A built-in amplifier monitoring circuits shall continuously monitor the
functioning of the power amplifiers and shall automatically switch in a
spare power amplifier in case of failure of any of the amplifiers. Upon
detection, the status of the fault shall be indicated by the LED display
on the amplifier itself as well as in the Central Monitoring, Configuration
and Diagnostic PC. The number of spare power amplifiers to be
provided shall be ten percent of the total quantity of each range of
power amplifiers.
17.3.15 All speaker lines shall be supervised for open circuit fault, short circuit
fault, and short to ground fault. Upon detection, the status of the fault
shall be indicated by the LCD display the Central Monitoring,
Configuration and Diagnostic PC.
17.3.16 The loudspeakers shall be located such that they meet the necessary
requirements. Rooms with on / off volume control units as required are
indicated in the schedule of tables. Facilities shall be incorporated to

override these volume control units, including those in the off position
to enable emergency announcements to be broadcast. In general, one
ceiling speaker shall be provided for every 25 square meters in each
room such as offices and corridors, while a minimum of one ceiling
speaker shall be provided for areas less than 25 square meters such
as booths, pantry and toilets.
17.3.17 The system shall also have the means to cut-off the music sources
during emergency paging and shall enable the emergency
announcement to be heard in these areas. All volume controls as
specified shall be overridden during emergency announcements.
17.3.18 There shall be background music to selected areas. It shall be
possible to pre-program any of the input music sources to any of these
zones. Sources provided shall be an integrated compact disc player
with digital tuner.
17.3.19 All equipment such as the central network controller and power
amplifiers shall be housed in 19-inch equipment racks.
17.4 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
17.4.1 The Public Address System shall be network based and in digital
domain and shall be flexible and easy to operate. Specific functions
shall be easily programmed and changed by non-technical personnel
through User-Friendly Configuration software.
17.4.2 The main equipment shall be housed in standard 19 inch equipment
racks.
17.4.3 Cabling between amplifiers and the central network controller shall
merely comprise a two-core copper cable, while standard loudspeaker
cables shall be used between the power amplifiers and the
loudspeakers.
17.4.4 Cabling within the main equipment shall be via copper cable with
purpose built connectors located at the back of each equipment.
17.4.5 The system shall be designed to handle minimum of 40 different
commands simultaneously; as such, there shall be a system of
priorities to cope with conflict situations.
17.4.6 It shall be possible to program different priorities on different user keys
of the microphone call station; it shall also be possible to allow different
zones to be paged from different call stations simultaneously provided
there is no conflict situation.
17.4.7 The system shall be flexible in design that allows adding and removing
of equipment anywhere in the network without affecting the
performance of other units to meet the complete tender requirements.
17.4.8 A paging call station shall comprise a table stand fitted with a high
performance electric condenser microphone mounted on a flexible
stem for easy adjustability. It shall include three LED's, for monitoring
and 'engaged' and 'ready-to-talk' indication, and cascaded keypads
with 8 button user-keys each.
17.4.9 Each call station shall have a built-in amplifier for line level output, plus
a compressor / limiter in order to maintain signal strength regardless of
changes in the speaking distance from the microphone. A built-in
Speech filter improves intelligibility and prevents clipping of audio input.
17.4.10 Each user key on the call station shall be programmable via the Central
Configuration PC. Each key shall be capable of being programmed
with a priority hierarchy, signal tones, digitally stored messages and
routing instructions prior to a call. Each user key when depressed shall
activate a zone or group of zones of speakers according to type of
announcement to be made.
17.4.11 Supervised control inputs and audio inputs shall provide the interface
between the inputs and the central PA/EVC/BGM system. Each input is
supervised and freely programmable for any system actions with
priorities setting.
17.4.12 The central network controller shall manage the operation of the
system; that is, detection of the user keys being depressed, routing of
the microphone and attention signal tones, setting of the priority levels
and switching of the loudspeaker volume control override circuits. It
shall also acts as the 'watchdog,' continuously checking the system
hardware.
17.4.13 A digital message module shall be stored in the central network
controller for broadcasting of message in case of emergency. More
than one message shall be able to be played simultaneously and be
able to be scheduled at specific time. The status of these messages
shall be monitored.
17.4.14 For evacuation and emergency procedures, signals shall be
programmed to precede an announcement from a call station, or they
shall be capable of being broadcast independently by a defined user-
key or from a centralized PC call station.
17.4.15 Signals shall be capable of being programmed to precede an
announcement from a call station or may be used independently as
alarms for evacuation or emergency procedures.
17.4.16 Multi-program applications shall be made easy, with several channels
being used simultaneously to distribute music or radio broadcasts. The
system controller shall be capable of altering music programme
allocation where necessary.
17.4.17 Whatever signal is being transmitted, the emergency and alarm calls
shall always have top priority. They shall be broadcast immediately
and at full volume, even in those zones where loudspeaker are
currently switched off or set at a low volume.
17.4.18 Signal processing modules shall be provided for the call station inputs.
It shall act as a compressor, to supply uniform microphone output
levels, compensating for variations in voice volume, irrespective of
different voice strengths and speaking distances.
17.4.19 All equipment shall be housed in standard 19" racks; as far as
possible, all inter-connections shall be by means of standard cables
and connectors, for ease of service ability.
17.4.20 The contractor shall supply, install and wire up the proposed
loudspeakers. All speakers shall be designed for music and public
address application.

17.4.21 The uniformity of sound pressure level distribution at 1.5 metres above
the floor level shall not vary beyond 4 dB for frequency up to 4,000 Hz
and not more than 8 dB for frequency up to 8,000 Hz.
17.4.22 PC Call station shall be provided for making the live paging
announcements to any of the selected zones in the dedicated PA
Network, the PC call station should have Graphical based user
interface for easier user interface, It shall be possible to broadcast Pre
recorded messages in case of emergency
17.5 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
The system shall be a digital network based system configured from a
central PC through web browser. The system shall include a central
network controller, power amplifiers, paging call stations, interfacing
equipments, music sources and loudspeakers.
The PA system provides digital audio signal processing and
transmission of audio signals via a simple network system. The audio
transmission in the system is in digital form except for the 100V line
from the power amplifiers to the loudspeakers.
The PA system is comprised of the following basic elements:
Network controller
Power Amplifiers
PA call stations with keypads
Call Station Interface
TCP/IP interface
PC Call Station
Network cables
Loudspeakers
Background Music Source
The PA system elements are connected by the daisy chain principle. The
interconnection between the system units is achieved by using patchcords
and connector cables between controller and amplifier and copper cable
between speaker and controller . The system cabling between master and
slave units can be implemented in ring network whereby a single failure
on the network cable will not affect the functioning of the system.
The equipment for the PA system, i.e. network controller, power
amplifiers, and PA call stations, have built-in audio processing facilities,
the audio processing is done in the digital domain.
The distribution of PA cables is configured to ensure that the failure of an
amplifier, a cable or a speaker does not render the PA system inoperative
or result in the total loss of PA facility in any part of any zone
17.5.1 Network controller
17.5.1.1 The control unit is the heart of the public address system. The unit
shall be capable of routing minimum 40 audio channels, delivering
power to the system, fault reporting and controlling of the system. This
unit can work either in stand-alone mode or with a PC connected to it.

17.5.1.2 The network controller shall have a redundant network wiring

capability. Status/fault enquiries shall be made via the front panel
display and rotary control of the network controller. The controller
should provide fail safe all-call functionality to all call stations in case
the NCO breaks down.
17.5.1.3 The status of the digital audio storage and the messages shall be
monitored.The audio messages (stored as wav files) can be
downloaded from a computer via the Ethernet link. The call stations,
power amplifiers should be connected using plastic optical fibers
.
17.5.1.4 The network controller shall monitor the status of all equipment in the
system and report any status change as well as the microphone
capsule of a call station microphone and report any fault.
17.5.1.5 The controller shall have the LCD display in its front panel.
17.5.1.6 The network control unit shall have extensive audio processing
possibilities for audio inputs and audio outputs. Parametric
equalization, limiter, and gain can be adjusted with the configuration
software. Programmable delay of up to 1.5sec per channel.
Power Source : 48V DC
Power consumption : 14W with no load
150W with maximum load
Audio inputs : 28 channels
Audio output : Unlimited
Priority : 256
Fault messages : 200
Operating Temperature : -50C to +550C
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20 kHz (-3 dB)
17.5.2 Power Amplifiers:

The main function of the power amplifier is the amplification of audio signals for
the loudspeakers. It shall be possible to select the output voltage between 100V,
70V or 50V by changing jumpers. The power amplifiers are provided with a 2 x
16-character display for fault monitoring and status display.
The equipment can be used as tabletop or 19" rack mounting.

17.5.2.1 The power amplifiers shall have audio inputs with microphone/line level
selection.
17.5.2.2 The audio input of the power amplifier can be selected as automatic
volume control input in the configuration software.
17.5.2.3 The power amplifiers shall have supervised control inputs that are
freely programmable. These can be programmed for any action to be
initiated in the system and can be assigned with priorities.
17.5.2.4 The power amplifier shall have audio output that can be monitored by
connecting a headphone to the headphone socket. Status changes of

the unit shall be monitored continuously and reported to the network

controller for fault/status reporting.
17.5.2.5 The control input built-in the power amplifier shall have the ability to
monitor the cable between the control input and the external switch
against open and short circuits.
17.5.2.6 The power amplifier shall be designed for redundant network wiring.
17.5.2.7 The amplifier monitoring and changeover facility shall be incorporated

in the power amplifier. The changeover relays shall be included in the
unit. The unit shall be incorporated with digital audio processing and
audio delay.
It shall meet the following minimum requirements:

Interfaces 2 x system network connection
Indication & Controls LED display for status display,

Rotary /push control for selection of
system enquiry mode & headphone
volume
Power supply for ON/OFF switch
Inputs Control inputs & audio inputs selectable

between microphone & line
Outputs Selectable 100V, 70V or 50V; Control
outputs and headphones outputs
Audio inputs Mono, balanced
Frequency Response (audio inputs) Line :- -3dB at 20Hz and 20KHz
Mic. :- -3dB at 100Hz to 16KHz
Frequency Response (Audio 60Hz to 20KHz
outputs)
Mains Supply 220V or 240V 10% at 50 - 60 Hz
Emergency battery supply +48V (-earth)
Output power 4 x 125W, 2 x 250W, 8 x 60W, 1 x 500W
Type of Amplifiers Class D
Safety According to EN55103/FCC/CE
17.5.3 Configuration/diagnostic & Logging Software

17.5.3.1 Configuration software:
The configuration software shall be used for configuring the system
and shall User friendly. The configuration software shall be located in
the network controller except for the file transfer facilities.

Any PC with Internet Explorer version 5.0 or above will be able to

connect to the network controller to access the configuration and
logging functions.
11.5.3.2 Fault enquiries can be made via the diagnostic section of the web
interface. The configuration software shall be designed in such a way
that even first-time users can navigate through the configuration
easily.
11.5.3.3 Configuration of system shall be accessed at different authorization

levels, namely Administrator, Installer and User
11.5.3.4 The diagnostic & logging software shall have the main function of
monitoring and recording the status of all the units in the PA system. It
shall log all events such as calls and status changes of system units,
and provide a current view of the system status. This software section
shall be used for real-time logging by connecting a PC with GUI
software.
11.5.3.5 It shall be able to view historical log stored in the network controller
including logged events of monitored external devices. It shall be able
to acknowledged and reset the events and the acknowledgment and
reset actions shall be logged. It shall be able to view the last 200
faults, which are stored on the network controller
17.5.3 Paging Call Station

17.5.3.1 Call Station Remote
Connects to call station interface
Up to 1 km from digital public address optical network
Uses standard keypads for extension
Built-in limiter
Powered via CAT-5 and/or local power supply
Complete supervision
Electrical
External power supply : 18 to 56 VDC
Power consumption : 2.9 W at 48 V without keypads
Microphone
Nominal acoustic input level 75 to 90 dB SPL
S/N : >60 dB at 85 dB SPL
Frequency response : 340 Hz to 14 kHz (-3 dB)
Loudspeaker
S/N : 80 dB at max.
Sound pressure level : 85 dB (SPL) at 0.5 m and 1 kHz
Headset
Connector 3.5 mm jack

17.5.4.2 Call Station Interface

Call Station Interface between a single remote call station or a remote call
station kit and the fiber optical PA network. It uses CAT-5 cable for the
connection to the remote call station. The CAT-5 cable, carrying digital audio and
control data, can be as long as 1 km. The length of the CAT-5 cable is not a part
of the PA optical network length. This considerably increases the overall possible
length of the optical network, especially in cases, where the call station is located
far from the rest of the system.
Electrical
External power supply 18 to 56 VDC
Power consumption 3.7W
Control Inputs 2x
Operation Closing contact (with supervision)
17.5.4.3 Call station keypad
a. The call station keypad shall be used in combination with the call
station basic unit for making a manual or prerecorded call to any
pre-assigned zones or executing a predefined action. The call
station keypad shall have 8 keys.
b. The call station keypad keys can be freely programmed for recall of
selection, live speech call, cancel selection, BGM mute, BGM
volume control and each key at the call station keypad shall have 2
color LEDs
17.5.4.4 Numeric Keypad
The Call Station Numeric Keypad is used in combination with a basic

or remote call station. The call station provides the microphone and
press to talk key, while the numeric keypad can be used for user
access, zone and zone group selection. It works together with call
station keypads for preconfigured actions. The built n LCD provides
feedback to the user.
The call station numeric keypad has a 12 key numeric keypad,
providing a telephone like user interface with *, # and 0X9 keys. A
single numeric keypad connects directly to a basic or remote call
station and subsequently up to 15 other keypads can be linked for
controlling functions.
17.6 Cobranet Module
CobraNetTM, developed by Peak Audio, is a network protocol for real

time uncompressed digital audio distribution over industry standard
100Base-T Ethernet networks. It is used for audio distribution over long
distances The CobraNetTM Interface can simultaneously interface up to
four digital audio channels from CobraNetTM into an audio system and up
to four audio channels from an audio system into a CobraNetTM network.
This includes converting between the 44.1 kHz sample rate used by PA
and the 48 kHz sample rate that CobraNetTM uses, as well as conserving
volume levels. It can also route audio channels between itself and other
CobraNetTM Interfaces, in the same or in other audio system networks, or
to third party CobraNetTM units. Only audio channels are routed via the
interface, not control data. This means that if units are used to link
multiple systems, a PC master must always access the network
controllers through their open interfaces for control purposes.
Supply voltage 24 to 48 VDC
Power consumption 11W(DC)
Audio Transport Ethernet
Channels 4 in / 4 out per interface Max 64
Compliance IEEE 802.3
Sample Rate 48 kHz
Audio Transport 16/20/24-bit
Latency 5.33ms
Integrity Assurance Watchdog
17.7 PC Call Station
The PC Call station is used for making live speech or pre-record

announcements to any zone or a group of zones or to execute any
pre-defined actions. The PC Call Station is comprised of a stylish high
quality condenser microphone on a gooseneck, user-friendly operation
PC software and a PC with a 15 LCD monitor. The PC Call station
software provides the user with a powerful and easy-to-use tool that
brings all aspects of announcements to a single point control.
The on-screen configuration sections allow the user to enter the

properties of any combination of zones or individual zone such as
entering the name of a zone/group, pre-defined input/output relay
actions and selected attention/alarm tones or pre-recorded messages.
After configuration, the user can operate the system via the Operation
key layout section.
Microphone Performance
Sensitivity 2.5 mV/Pa
Maximum input sound level 110 dB SPL
Distortion < 0.6% (maximum input)
Equivalent input noise level 28dBA SPL
Frequency response 100 Hz 16 kHz

17.8 PC Call Server
The PC Call Server is a Windows service connected to one or more PA

network controllers via TCP/IP, using the open interface. It is used in
combination with one or more client applications, such as the PC Call
Station Client. Via the PC Call Server Configuration Client the
connections of the connected network controllers can be monitored and
set up. In case of multiple network controllers audio connections between
network controllers can be configured to enable calls from one PA
network to other PA networks..
17.9 Background Music Player
The CD-player shall play normal audio CDs and CD-Rs with MP3-encoded
files. The CD-player is designed to allow for high quality uninterrupted
music playback from a single MP3-disc.Music shall be organized on a disc
in multiple folders with music selection for different occasions, with
programming facilities for up to 999 tracks. Repeat and random play modes
are also provided. The digitally controlled FM/AM tuner uses a frequency
synthesizer for accurate capture of radio stations and 10 presets for FM
and 10 presets for AM to store favorite radio stations.Both the CD-player
and the tuner operate simultaneously on different outputs to facilitate two-
channel BGM distribution.
Frequency response (Tuner) 30 Hz to 15 KHz
Distortion <1%
S/N ratio >63dB
Output level 200mV
Frequency response (CD) 20 Hz to 20 KHz
Distortion <0.1%
S/N ratio >85dB
Output level 200mV
Combined outputs 200mV
17.10 Loudspeakers
17.10.1 Line Array Speakers of 30W

Speaker shall be wall mountable with 30 W RMS output, with multi tapping for
15/7.5W. It shall be ideal for speech and music reproduction
Maximum power 45W
Power handling capacity 7.5-15-30W
Sound pressure level at 106/91 dB(SPL)
30W/1W(1kHz,1m)
Rated voltage 100 V
Rated impedance 333 ohms

Effective frequency range (-10 dB) 190Hz-18kHz

Opening angle 1 kHz / 4 kHz (-6 dB)
Horizontal 220 / 130
Vertical 70 / 18
Safety standard According to EN60065
17.10.2 Cabinet Speakers of 6W
Speaker shall be wall mountable with 6W RMS output, with multi tapping for
3/1.5W it shall be ideal for speech and music reproduction
Maximum power 9W
Sound pressure level at 99/91 dB(SPL)
30W/1W(1kHz,1m)
Rated voltage 100 V
Rated impedance 1667ohms
Opening angle 1 kHz / 4 kHz (-6 95/73
dB)
17.10.3 Recessed Ceiling Speaker of 6W
The speakers shall be recessed ceiling speaker with multiple tapping of 3/1.5W
and spring clamps for mounting the speaker on the false ceiling. it shall be ideal
for speech and music reproduction
Maximum power 9W
Sound pressure level at 98 dB(SPL)
30W/1W(1kHz,1m)
Rated voltage 100 V
dB)

17.10.4 Out Door Horn Speakers of 15W
The Horn speakers should provide excellent speech reproduction and sound
distribution for a wide range of outdoor applications
Maximum power 15W
Power handling capacity 7.5-3.75W
Sound pressure level at 103 dB(SPL)
30W/1W(1kHz,1m)
Rated voltage 100 V
dB), horizontal & vertical
Safety standard Acc.to IEC60259 IP65
Water Protection Acc.to IEC60259 IP65
17.10.5 Network cables

These are special cables with two plastic fibers for data communication
and two copper cores for the power supply.The cables all have the
network connectors fitted. They connect the network controller to power
amplifiers, call stations etc.
17.11 POWER SUPPLY
17.11.1 The contractor shall make provision for all necessary power supply
units, voltage regulators, etc, to ensure that the equipment will perform
satisfactorily c/w necessary surge arrestors and filters.
17.11.2 All necessary power supply (s/s/os etc) required for the operation of
the sound equipment shall be designed, supplied and installed by the
contractor.
17.12 EMERGENCY OVERRIDE UNIT

The emergency override unit when activated from the Fire Command
Centre, it will override all incoming signals to allow emergency
messages to pass through.
17.13 SYSTEM TESTING
17.13.1 The contractor shall test the system in the presence of the
Superintending Officer to show that its performance satisfies the
requirement of this specification. All test equipments shall be
professional and supplied by the contractor. A sound pressure meter
will be required.
17.13.2 No claim is allowed for this test. The cost shall be deemed to be
included in the schedule of rates for the equipment.

17.13.3 The signal path that links all the Nodes together must be tested and
installed as per standard, using IT network switchers or a PC to
perform a method of connection between the nodes shall not be
acceptable. The entire link must be connected via redundant Fire
Rated Fiber Optic Cable.
18.0 Technical Specification for Server Based IP-PBX System
SCOPE OF WORK
Supply, installation, wiring, testing & commissioning of duplicated IP based ISDN

Telephone connectivity &development.
18.1. Brief Description of work
The work includes supply, installation, testing & commissioning of IP based

Telephone exchange along with laying, testing and termination of all outdoor PIJF
cables including with all associated work like trenching, refilling of trench and their
restoration etc..The work also includes OFC & Cat-6 UTP cable laying work at some
locations to create LAN for IP phone connectivity .The work also includes testing &
termination of both end of indoor cables on telephone jacks & on MDF & IDF.
18.1.1 GENERAL
The specifications cover requirements of state of art IP/SIP ready server based 19
rack mountable system suitable for catering to the needs Government Office
requirement. It is essential that the system shall be based on latest packet
switching technology for voice IP/digital technology suitable for working with digital
key telephones/IP telephone as well as analog telephones with modular design
based on minimum 32 bit Network RISC based Processor. It should also support
traditional TDM connection without any need of media gateways.
All the slots available for insertion of various trunk/subscriber line card should be
universal i.e. it should be possible to increase or decrease trunk lines or subscriber
line capacity of the system as per requirement.
(I) EPABX SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
1. The digital EPABX system shall be 100% Non-blocking switching system with IP
& ISDN compatibility. (Internet Protocol / Integrated Services Digital Network),
configured for as per BOQ Analog Extensions / IP Extension & as per BOQ.
2. The system shall be fully open Architecture server based Platform, Support for
open Operating system like Linux. It should be Pure IP solution as well as TDM
Switched Technology, all in one system. It should be 19 inch Rack stackable
Architecture and should also provide built in LAN Port thereby application
integration is easily accessed.
3. The system shall provide digital path for voice and data communication (IP
Protocol). The number of time slots should be double the no. of ports of the system.
The system shall also offer an in-built Ethernet Port (10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX).

18.2 SYSTEM FEATURE AND FACILITIES
18.2.1 System Architecture
The offered system shall be modular in design. The Architecture of the EPABX shall be
capable of seamless migration to its maximum capacity by simply adding peripheral
cards on the same set of control cards without compromising on any function / features
of this system or any degration of service. The EPABX shall support IP distributed
architecture. IP access points shall be centrally administrable from the host system.
Peer to Peer connectivity shall be possible on IP access points. The system shall have
universal ports for line / Trunk cards, wherein any peripheral card can be inserted in any
slot of the peripheral shelf, thereby enhancing the flexibility of the configuration.
18.2.2 Central Processing Unit
The Central Processing Unit of the EPABX shall be a 32 bit RISC based Microprocessor
with in skin Serial Port, USB Port & Ethernet Port (Connectivity of IP integration) for
traffic management. The CPU incorporates a built-in Device Registration Server (DRS)
for Registration and Authentication of IP terminals. Main system software should be
Linux operating system.
18.2.3 Storage Media
The system shall provide state of the art Flash EPROM for higher reliability and fast
booting.
18.2.4 Trunks
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) The offered exchange shall be an ISDN
ready switch. The system platform shall ready for ISDN & only the necessary ISDN BRI
& PRI Cards(Basic Rate Interface & Primary Rate Interface) need to be added for
functionality. The system shall be capable of accepting at least 02PRI cards and also
different types of signals for 2W/4W E&M Signalling. The system shall support level DID
on Tie Line Trunks. The system shall support level DID on Tie Line Trunks. The system
shall be equipped with Hardware/modules required for SIM cards functionality through
CO lines.
18.2.5 Operating System
The operating system of EPABX should reliable or proprietary make and be protected
against loss / alteration of Memory due to power failure / unauthorized command or due
to any other faulty condition.
18.2.6 CTI Applications
The offered system shall support Computer Supported Telephone Applications (CSTA)
in order to facilitate integration of LAN & IVRS. The offered system shall support CTI
applications (Computer Telephony Integration) for features like Screen Pop up through
CLI or DNIS (Dialled Number Identification Service). CTI shall support for all 3rd Party
CTI solutions also. The system should also support PC based phone in which incoming
call, outgoing calls, CLI and other features should be visible.

18.2.7 Caller Line Identification (CLI) on Analog Extensions.
The offered system shall have the capability to offer CLI on Analog Extensions for all
internal calls. The system shall also offer CLI on Analog Trunks. The CLI shall provide
Name & Number on the Display of the Analog Extension. This feature has become
mandatory & is treated as a security feature.
It should also support CLI based routing of calls.
18.2.8 Conference
It shall be possible for extension user to initiate upto 2 conferences of maximum 32

party each with any combination of internal stations & outside circuits to talk to each
other at the same time on the conference circuit. The conference call facility initialized
by one of the extension users or by an attendant should be able to opt out on that
conference without breakup of ongoing conference (Unsupervised Conference).It should
also support Split in conference, Barge in Conference and meet me conference facility
also in which outside callers(at least 4 no) should be able to join conference by entering
password without any manual intervention.
18.2.9 LAN Connectivity

The system shall support 10/100 Mbps LAN connectivity.
18.2.10 Voice Over IP

The system shall support Voice over IP (VoIP) applications with additional hardware.
The system shall support integrated IP gateway. It should be able to support up to 200
IP Extensions.(If any license cost is applicable please add in the cost).
18.2.11 Music On Hold

The system shall support in built Music on hold. It shall also be able to interface with
an external music device.
18.2.12 Paging & Wireless Connectivity

The offered system shall support integrated IP based DECT solution. The system shall
also have an in built interface to integrate with the external public paging system.
18.2.13 Message Wait Indication (for Voice Mail)

The system shall have facility for lighting a Message Waiting Lamp provided on Digital
Key Phones & Analog Extensions Telephone Instruments in case of a Voice Mail
Message.
18.2.14 Networking
The offered system shall be capable of networking with other exchanges using
signalling interfaces like E&M, ISDN BRI / PRI, IP Trunking, SIP Trunks etc. The
documentary support for SIP trunk and SIP extensions must be shown.
18.2.15 Diagnostic & Enhanced Maintenance Facility

The system shall have in built Diagnostic features such as detection of faulty intercom
/ lines. The offered system shall have remote maintenance facility over IP. The system
should have built in Web-Pro Server for Web Maintenance Remotely.

(II) OPERATOR CONSOLE
The offered exchange shall be capable of supporting upto 4 Numbers of Operator

Consoles. The operator should be able to monitor the status of trunks / extensions &
should be capable of attending / holding atleast 16 trunk calls at one time. The offered
console should be KTS & DSS based & should be equipped for monitoring status of
extensions. The Operator Console should have Dual Color LED Indication for
differentiating between the used & self used lines. Following Facilities shall be
available.:-
Status Display for all Trunk lines & Extensions.

168x55 dot matrix LCD Screen
Visual Display of Calling & Called Station.
Key Pad Dialing.
Interface for Head set Operations.
Busy Override
Subscriber Identity.
Call Querying
Call Splitting
Trunk to Trunk access / Transfer
Trunk to Co Transfer
Transfer to trunk call to other console.
Breaking into busy extension with an interruption tone.
Serial Calling abbreviated dialing
External Line Hold.
Call Parking
Selective pickup of calls on hold.
Indication of waiting calls.
Camp on Busy
Routing of calls
Night Service
Un screened call transfer
(III) IP TELEPHONE SETS
The IP telephone sets should have minimum below mention requirement;
1 Display should have minimum 60 mm x 26 mm (Monochrome)

2 Should have minimum 5 buttons with dual LEDs
3 Should have Minimum 3 Soft keys
Should have Permanently-labeled feature buttons: Speaker, Mute, Volume, Headset,
4 Contacts, Home, History, Message, Phone
5 Should have Permanently-labeled Navigation Cluster (Up/Down, Left/Right, OK)
Should have Minimum 24 administrative buttons and up to 8 lines displayed
6 simultaneously with green / red LEDs
7 Should have Full duplex speakerphone
8 Should have Two message waiting indicators
9 Should support USB application
10 Should have Bluetooth and DECT headset support with additional adapter

11 Should have Wall-mount option and dual-position stand

12 Should have Ethernet line interface
13 Standards-based codec support: G.711, G.726, G.729A/B, G.722
(IV) Analog Telephone Sets
The analog IP telephone sets should have minimum below mention requirement;
1. Caller ID Display
2. DTMF keypad
3. Real Time Clock with Year
4. Hands free speaker
5. Date and Month display
6. Feature keys, last number redial key, flash and mute, Volume (+) and (-)
7. Redial Memory
8. Power supplied by the EPABX System
(V) Main Distribution Frame

The offered system shall be provided with MDF & IDF having LSA-Plus
disconnection module, back mounting frame & wire manager on good
quality power coated MS box with lock & keys. The MDF should be
equipped with IPMs on all outdoor circuits to protect exchange/cards from
surge voltage & current. The system shall be provided with integrated
system modules.
(VI) 19 42 U Floor Mount Rack800(W) x 2000(H) x 1000(D)
The rack should minimum have below requirement, but no be limited to the
following specs;
1. Front Glass and Rear perforated doors, 78% perforation, PU Gasket.

2. Side Panel, 1.5mm with PU Gasket
3. Full Height 19" Angle
4. Top and bottom cover
5. Power Distribution Unit : 02 Nos. with locking arrangement to avoid loose contact.
((5 sockets 6/16 Amp with 1 No. MCB & 01 No. Indicator)
6. Fan Tray with 4 Fan with finger guard
7. Heavy duty castors 750 KG load bearing capacity with levelling feet.
8. Earthing Kit
9. Vertical cable mangers on both sides
10. Horizontal cable managers
11. Rack should be certified according to ISO 9001/14001/18001 and UL listed
(VII) 19 6 U Wall Mount Rack

The rack should minimum have below requirement, but no be limited to the
following specs;
1. Dimensions 48 cm (19") 6 U Rack in 630 mm section complete

2. Power Distribution Board 01 Nos. AC Distribution Box
(5 sockets 6/16 Amp with 1 No. MCB & 01 No.
Indicator)
3. Cable entry cable entry provision at top and bottom,

4. Accessories Cable Manager, Cooling fan & hardware
5. Door Tough tinted glass door with lock
6. Certification Rack should be certified according to ISO
9001/14001/18001 and UL listed
(VIII) Cat-6 UTP Data Cable

The cables should minimum have below requirement, but no be limited to the
following specs;
Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6,

1 Type TIA / EIA 568-C.2 & ISO/IEC 11801
2 Conductors 23 AWG solid bare copper
3 Insulation Polyethylene
4 Jacket LSZH sheath
Pair Separator Cross-member (+) fluted Spline.
5 Approvals UL/ ETL verified to TIA / EIA Cat 6
6 Frequency tested up to Minimum 250 MHz
7 Cable Outer Diameter 0.23 inch +/- 5%
8 Delay Skew 45ns MAX.
9 Bend Radius 4 * Cable Diameter
10 Impedance 100 Ohms + / - 15 ohms, 1 to 600 MHz
11 UL/NEC Ratings CMR Rated
12 Mutual Capacitance 5.6 NF MAX /100 Mtr.
13 Conductor Resistance 66.58 Ohms Max / KM
14 Propagation Delay 536 ns/100 Mtrs. MAX @ 250 Mhz
15 Fire Rating IEC 60332-1
(IX) Armoured PIJF Telephone Cable

The Vendor should provide 5 Pair/10 Pair/20 Pair/50 pair armoured PIJF
telephone cable for as per TEC specifications.
(X) 6 Core Optic Fibre Cable

The cables should minimum have below requirement, but no be limited to the
following specs;
1 Cable Type 6 core, Single mode, 10G, Armoured, loose-tube, Gel Filled
2 Fiber type 9.125 micron
3 No. of cores 6
4 Cable Construction BELLCORE GR 20 / IEC 794-1
5 Fiber Attenuation
@1310nm <=0.45 dB / KM
@1550nm <=0.35 dB / KM
The cable shall have sufficient strength to withstand a load
6 Tensile Rating
of 9.8 x w x 1.3 Newton.

7 Maximum Crush resistance 3500 N or better

8 Operating Temperature -20 Degree C to +70 Degree C
9 Armor Corrugated Steel tape Armor
10 ROHS ROHS Compliant
11 Outer Jacket FRLSZH
(XI) HDPE Duct

The Vendor should provide 40/33 dia Pre-lubricated HDPE duct for full
protection of Optic Fibre Cable as per TEC specifications.
(XII) 24 Port Cat-6 UTP Jack Panel

Category CAT 6
Marking/labels Slide-In labels for media identification
Standards Meets and exceeds the performance requirements as
specified in EIA/TIA 568 A and ISO 11801 standards
Cable Manager Required along with the patch panel
Connectors Insulation displacement connectors
Performance Should Exceed TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Category6
Specifications
Current Rating 1.7 Amps
Contact Resistance 15m max
Insulation Resistance 500 M
(XIII) CAT-6 UTP Jack

PCB based, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6,
1 Type TIA /EIA 568-C.2 and ISO/IEC 11801
2 Modular Jack 750 mating cycles
3 Wire terminal 200 termination cycles
Integrated bend-limiting strain-relief unit for cable entry
Without dust cover
4 Accessories
Support cable pair termination process on the jacks at
90 degree angle.
Bidder should have a mechanism to maintain the quality of
the termination ir-respective of the skill level of the
termination staff.
5 Housing Polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated.
6 110 Blocks polycarbonate, 94V-0 rated
7 Approvals (a) UL Listed / CSA Approved
(b) ETL verified to TIA / EIA Cat 6
8 ROHS Compliance ROHS/ELV Complaint

(XIV) MAINTENANCE FREE EARTHING AND BONDING SYSTEM

1. Scope
This document covers earthing & bonding system to be adopted for signaling equipments
with solid state components which are more susceptible to damage due to surges,
transients and over voltages being encountered in the system due to lightning, sub-station
switching etc. These signalling equipments include Electronic Interlocking, Integrated
Power supply equipment, Digital Axle counter, Data logger etc.
2. References
IS 3043 : Code of practice for earthing

ANSI/UL 467 : Grounding & bonding equipment
IEEE 80 : IEEE guide for Safety in AC sub-station grounding
IEEE 837 : Standard for qualifying permanent connections used in sub-station grounding
IEC 62305 : Protection against lightning
3. Importance of Earthing
The installation and maintenance of an effective low resistance earthing system is

essential due to the following
Efficiently dissipate heavy fault currents and electrical surges, both in magnitude
and duration, to protect equipment being damaged so as to minimize down time,
service interruption and replacement cost.
Provide a stable reference for electrical and RF circuits at the installation to
minimize noise during normal operation.
Protection of personnel who work within the area from dangerous electric shock
caused due to step potential or touch potential.
4. Characteristics of good Earthing system
Excellent electrical conductivity
- Low resistance and electrical impedance.

- Conductors of sufficient dimensions capable of withstanding high fault currents
with no evidence of fusing or mechanical deterioration.
- Lower earth resistance ensures that energy is dissipated into the ground in the
safest possible manner.
- Lower the earth circuit impedance, the more likely that high frequency lightning
impulses will flow through the ground electrode path, in preference to any other
path.
High corrosion resistance

The choice of the material for grounding conductors, electrodes and connections
is vital as most of the grounding system will be buried in the earth mass for many
years. Copper is by far the most common material used. In addition to its
inherent high conductivity, copper is usually cathodic with respect to other metals
in association with grounding sites, which means that it is less likely to corrode in
most environments.
Mechanically robust and reliable.

5. Location for Earth

Low lying areas close to the building or equipment are good for locating Earth
Electrodes.
The location can be close to any existing water bodies or water points but not
naturally well-drained.
Dry sand, lime stone, granite and any stony ground should be avoided.
Earthing electrode should not be installed on high bank or made-up soil.
6. Acceptable Earth Resistance value
The acceptable Earth Resistance at earth busbar shall not be more than 1 ohm.
7. Components of Earthing & Bonding system
The components of Earthing & Bonding system are-
Earth electrode, Earth enhancement material, Earth pit, Equi-potential earth

busbar, connecting cable & tape/strip and all other associated accessories.
8. Design of Earthing & Bonding system
8.1 Earth Electrode

The earth electrode shall be made of high tensile low carbon steel circular rods,
molecularly bonded with copper on outer surface to meet the requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 467-2007 or latest. Such copper bonded steel
cored rod is preferred due to its overall combination of strength, corrosion
resistance, low resistance path to earth and cost effectiveness.
The earth electrode shall be UL listed and of minimum 17.0mm diameter and
minimum 3.0mtrs. long.
The minimum copper bonding thickness shall be of 250 microns.
Marking: UL marking, Manufacturers name or trade name, length, diameter,
catalogue number must be punched on every earth electrode.
Earth electrode can be visually inspected, checked for dimensions and thickness
of copper coating using micron gauge. The supplier shall arrange for such
inspection at the time of supply, if so desired.
8.2 Earth Enhancement material

Earth enhancement material is a superior conductive material that improves
earthing effectiveness, especially in areas of poor conductivity (rocky ground,
areas of moisture variation, sandy soils etc.). It improves conductivity of the earth
electrode and ground contact area. It shall have following characteristics-
shall mainly consist of Graphite and Portland cement. Bentonite content shall be
negligible.
shall have high conductivity, improves earths absorbing power and humidity
retention capability.
shall be non-corrosive in nature having low water solubility but highly
hygroscopic.
shall have resistivity of less than 0.2 ohms-meter. Resistivity shall be tested by
making a 20cm. cube of the material and checking resistance of the cube at the
ends. The supplier shall arrange for such testing at the time of supply, if so
desired. Necessary certificate from National/ International lab for the resistivity
shall also be submitted.
shall be suitable for installation in dry form or in a slurry form.

shall not depend on the continuous presence of water to maintain its
conductivity.
shall be permanent & maintenance free and in its set form, maintains constant
earth resistance with time.
shall be thermally stable between -100 C to +600 C ambient temperatures.
shall not dissolve, decompose or leach out with time.
shall not require periodic charging treatment nor replacement and maintenance.
shall be suitable for any kind of electrode and all kinds of soils of different
resistivity.
shall not pollute the soil or local water table and meets environmental friendly
requirements for landfill.
shall not be explosive.
shall not cause burns, irritation to eye, skin etc.
Marking: The Earth enhancement material shall be supplied in sealed, moisture
proof bags. These bags shall be marked with Manufacturers name or trade
name, quantity etc.
8.3 Backfill material
The excavated soil is suitable as a backfill but should be sieved to remove any
large stones and placed around the electrode taking care to ensure that it is well
compacted. Material like sand, salt, coke breeze, cinders and ash shall not be
used because of its acidic and corrosive nature.
8.4 Earth Pit
8.4.1 Construction of unit earth pit: Refer typical installation drawing

no.SDO/RDSO/E&B/001.
A hole of 100mm to 125mm dia shall be augured /dug to a depth of about 2.8
meters.
The earth electrode shall be placed into this hole.
It will be penetrated into the soil by gently driving on the top of the rod. Here
natural soil is assumed to be available at the bottom of the electrode so that
min. 150 mm of the electrode shall be inserted in the natural soil.
Earth enhancement material (minimum approx. 30-35 kg) shall be filled into the
augured/dug hole in slurry form and allowed to set. After the material gets set,
the diameter of the composite structure (earth electrode + earth enhancement
material) shall be of minimum 100mm dia covering entire length of the hole.
Remaining portion of the hole shall be covered by backfill soil, which is taken
out during auguring /digging.
A copper strip of 150mmX25mmX6mm shall be exothermically welded to main
earth electrode for taking the connection to the main equi-potential earth busbar
in the equipment room and to other earth pits, if any.
Exothermic weld material shall be UL listed and tested as per provisions of
IEEE 837 by NABL/ ILAC member labs.
The main earth pit shall be located as near to the main equi-potential earth
busbar in the equipment room as possible.
8.4.2 Construction of loop Earth by providing multiple earth pits
At certain locations, it may not be possible to achieve earth resistance of 1ohm

with one earth electrode /pit due to higher soil resistivity. In such cases, provision
of loop earth consisting of more than one earth pit shall be done. The number of
pits required shall be decided based on the resistance achieved for the earth pits
already installed. The procedure mentioned above for one earth pit shall be
repeated for other earth pits.
The distance between two successive earth electrodes shall be min. 3mtrs. and
max. upto twice the length of the earth electrode i.e. 6 mtrs. approx.
These earth pits shall then be inter linked using 25X2 mm. copper tape to form a
loop using exothermic welding technique.
The interconnecting tape shall be buried at depth not less than 500mm below the
ground level. This interconnecting tape shall also be covered with earth
enhancing compound.
8.4.3 Measurement of Earth resistance
The earth resistance shall be measured at the Main Equi-potential Earth Busbar
(MEEB) with all the earth pits interconnected using Fall of Potential method as
per para 37 of IS: 3043.
8.4.4 Inspection Chamber
A 300X300X300 mm (inside dimension) concrete box with smooth cement

plaster finish shall be provided on the top of the pit. A concrete lid, painted black,
approx. 50 mm. thick with pulling hooks, shall be provided to cover the earth pit.
Care shall be taken regarding level of the floor surrounding the earth so that the
connector is not too deep in the masonry or projecting out of it.
On backside of the cover, date of the testing and average resistance value shall
be written with yellow paint on black background.
8.5 Equipotential Earth Busbar and its connection to equipments & Surge protection
devices in the Equipment room: Refer typical bonding connections drawing No.
SDO/RDSO/E&B/002.
8.5.1 Equipotential earth busbars
There shall be one equi-potential earth busbar for each of the equipment room i.e.
IPS/Battery charger room and EI/Relay room. The equi-potential earth busbars located
in individual rooms shall be termed as Sub equi-potential busbars (SEEB). The equi-
potential earth busbar located in the IPS /Battery charger room and directly connected
to Class B SPDs and the main earth pit shall be termed as Main equi-potential earth
busbar (MEEB).
The EEBs shall have pre-drilled holes of suitable size for termination of bonding
conductors. The EEBs shall be insulated from the building walls. Each EEB shall be
installed on the wall with low voltage insulator spacers of height 60mm. The insulators
used shall have suitable insulating and fire resistant properties for this application. The
EEBs shall be installed at the height of 0.5m from the room floor surface for ease of
installation & maintenance. All terminations on the EEBs shall be by using copper lugs
with spring washers.
8.5.2 Bonding Connections
To minimize the effect of circulating earth loops and to provide equi-potential bonding,
star type bonding connection is required. As such, each of the SEEBs installed in the
rooms shall be directly connected to MEEB using bonding conductors. Also,

equipment/racks in the room shall be directly connected to its SEEB. The bonding
conductors shall be bonded to their respective lugs by exothermic welding.
All connections i.e routing of bonding conductors from equipments to SEEB & from
SEEBs to MEEB shall be as short and as direct as possible with min. bends and
separated from other wiring. However, connection from SPD to MEEB shall be as short
as possible and preferably without any bend.
Materials and dimensions of bonding components for connection of individual
equipments with equi potential bus bar and earth electrode shall be as given below.
9. Drawing of earthing & bonding system

The complete layout with dimensions of the earthing & bonding system shall be
submitted by the supplier after commissioning.
10. Warranty
The supplier shall be responsible for complete supply, installation & commissioning of
the earthing & bonding system. The warranty of such system shall be 60 months from
date of commissioning. During this period, any failure of earthing system due to
improper materials & bad workmanship shall be attended free of cost by the supplier.
11. Maintenance of earthing & bonding system
The maintenance schedule should cover verification of earthing system conductors and
components, verification of electrical continuity, measurement of earth resistance, re-
fastening of components and conductors etc.

Note: - The contractor shall suggest minimum two makes out of the
approved list which he intends to use. Material where no
make/brand have been mentioned, ISI marked samples shall be
submitted by the contractor for approval of Engineer-In-charge.
Contractor shall seek approval of specific make from Engineer-
In-charge before commencement of work.

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS

FOR EXTERNAL
A ELECTRIFICATION WORK
1 HRC SWITCHES AND FUSES L&T/ SIEMENS/ SCHNEIDER/ GE
L&T- U-POWER-URN2.5GC/ SIEMENS- 3WL -
45B+E+Z+C+D+M/ MERLIN GERIN-NW
2 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS RANGE-6A+C
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT L&T-DSINE RANGE/MERLIN GERIN-NS
3 BREAKER RANGE/SIEMENS- VL
LT PANELS & LT BOARDS, BUS ABB/SCHNEIDER/CONQUERENT/ADVANCE
DUCT, FEEDER, PILLARS & PANELS ( DELHI )/ RISHA CONTROL /
4 OTHER PANELS SUGEL/SPC Electrotech Pvt. Ltd.
COPPER CONDUCTOR 660/1100 WORLDCAB/ RR KABELS/SKYTONE/LAPP
VOLT GRADE FRLS/PVC WIRES KABELS /GEMSCAB
ISI, FOR FDA, CCTV, PA AND
5 OTHER CONTROL CABLES
6 CABLE TRAY VENUS/ RICO/SPC (CTM Engineering)
PUSH BUTTON,INDICATING L&T/ SIEMENS/ SHENIEDER/ RASS
7 LIGHT SELECTOR SWITCHES CONTROL/ BCH/ VAISHNO
8 RELAYS L&T/ ALSTOM / CSPC/ SIEMENS
CAPACITORS ( MPPH or
9 equivalent ) & APFC RELAY L&T/ EPCOS/ NEPTUNE
L&T/ SCHNEIDER(MERLIN GERIN) / SIEMENS
10 CONTACTORS / ABB
MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT
11 BREAKER L&T/ SCHNEIDER(MERLIN GERIN)/ ABB
12 THIMBLES / LUGS DOWELLS/ ASIATIC/ ACTION
PVC CONDUIT & ACCESSORIES-
13 ISI MARKED POLYPACK/ ATUL/ PRECISION
14 MS & GI PIPE JINDAL-HISSAR/ SURYA PRAKASH/ AKG
15 HT PANEL SIEMENS/ABB/ SCHNEIDER /CROMPTON
16 TRANSFORMER CROMPTON/ RAYCHEM /ABB /ALSTOM
CUMMINS,KIRLOSKAR,ASHOK LEY LAND,
17 DG ENGINE GREAVES
18 ALTERNATOR STAMFORD, AVK, LEROY SOMER, CG

FIRE DETECTION & ALARM
19 SYSTEM COOPER/ BOSCH/ EDWARD/ NOTIFIER
20 MAIN FIRE PANEL COOPER/ BOSCH/ NOTIFIER
21 PA SYSTEM ATEIS/BOSCH/JBL/BRAHLER
VICON/ AMERICAN-DYNAMICS/
22 CCTV SYSTEM HONEYWELL/ BOSCH / SONY
SKYTONE/
23 HT CABLE UNIVERSAL/WORLDCAB/GEMSCAB
24 HT CABLE END TERMINATION CABSEAL,RAYCHEM (EPKT) or equivalent ISI
make with prior approval

OSRAM / PHILIPS/SURYA or equivalent ISI
25 LAMPS
make with prior approval
WEATHER PROOF JUNCTION
GEWISS/ HENSEL
26 BOXES
27 CONNECTORS / TERMINALS WAGO/ ELEMEX/ PHOENIX
4-PAIR UTP CABLE CAT-
ORTRONICS/ CLIPSAL/ SYSTIMAX/ DIGILINK/
6,PATCH PANEL INFORMATION
MOLEX
28 OUTLETS, PATCH CORDS
6-CORE MULTIMODE FIBERS,
JOINTS,PIGTAILS,CONNECTORS
MOLEX
29 , PATCH CORDS
L I U / DRAWER
30 MOLEX
31 CABINETS & RACKS APWPRESIDENT/ ORTRONICS/ RITTAL
32 SWITCHES & ROUTERS CISCO/ HP-PROCURVE/ NORTEL
UPS (10 kVA online UPS with
33 accessories) AROS/ DB POWER/ MG
SHREDER/CROMPTON/ BAJAJ/ PHILIPS/
34 HIGH MAST & STREET POLES UTKARSH/ SURYA / BPPP
LIGHT FIXTURES FOR HIGH
MAST & EXTERNAL SHREDER/CROMPTON / BAJAJ/ PHILIPS/
35 ILLUMINATION WIPRO/ SURYA
36 HT & LT CABLE JOINTING KIT ( CABSEAL,RAYCHEM (EPKT),M-SEAL or
ST. THROUGH JT.) equivalent ISI make with prior approval
37 SLIDING GATES CAME/ JSST/ MAGNETIC
38 BOOM BARRIER CAME/ JSST/ MAGNETIC
39 WIEGH BRIDGE AVERY/ STATWEIGH India Pvt Ltd.
DUROLINE or equivalent ISI make with prior
40 CORROGATED PVC PIPE
approval
B FOR INTERNAL
ELECTRIFICATION WORK
1 STEEL CONDUIT (ISI MARKED) BEC / AKG / ATUL
2 PVC INSULATED CU.
SKYTONE / FINOLEX / GRANDLAY /
CONDUCTOR 1100 V HOUSE
HAVELLS/ /KEI/WORLDCAB/ GEMSCAB
WIRING CABLE (ISI MARKED)
3 MODULAR TYPE SWITCHES AND
SOCKET OUTLETS - 6/16 A, FAN MK / LEGRAND / CRABTREE / WIPRO
REGULATORS (NORTH WEST)
4 SINGLE PHASE/THREE PHASE
INDUSTRIAL TYPE SOCKET SCHNEIDER (MG) / LEGRAND / HAGER / BCH
OUTLET / WIPRO (NORTH WEST) / HAVELLS
5 M.V. CUBICLE BOARDS C&S / MADHU ELECTRICALS / UNIQUE
POWER CONTROL / ADVANCE POWER /
SUGEL/RISHA CONTROL

6 LEGRAND / INDO ASIAN / ADHUNIK /

MCB DB (PREWIRED TYPE)
SIEMENS / HAVELLS
7 HAGER / SCHNEIDER (MG) / LEGRAND
MINIATURE CIRCUIT CREAKER
(LEXIC) / SIEMENS / STANDARD / L&T /
(MCB)
HAVELLS / INDO ASIAN
8 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT SIEMENS (VL) / ABB (ISOMAX) / SCHNEIDER
BREAKER (MCCB) (COMPACT NS) / L&T (D-SINE)
9
AMMETERS, VOLTMETERS, CT's CONZERVE / AE / TRINITY / L&T / MECO
10 CABLE GLAND COMET / COMEX / LOTUS / SIEMENS / HMI
11 PVC INSULATED PVC
SKYTONE / FINOLEX / GRANDLAY /
SHEATHED AL. CONDUCTOR 1.1 HAVELLS / WORLDCAB / RRKABEL / LAPP
KV GRADE ARMOURED CABLE & KABEL/EKTA/SPEER/KEI
WIRE
12 PHILIPS / GE / BAJAJ / CROMPTON /
LIGHT FITTINGS
DECON/WIPRO/ SURYA
13 MS CONDUIT ACSSORIES SHARMA / RAMA / MK
PHENOLAMIC LAMINATED
HYLAM / FORMICA / GREEN LAM
14 SHEET (WHITE) ISI
15 Split AC Hitachi, O-General, Daikin
16 Hand drier Euronics,Orchids
NOTE: FOR THE MATERIALS WHOSE MAKES ARE NOT SPECIFIED ABOVE NEEDS
PRIOR APPROVAL FROM ENGINEER- IN-CHARGE BEFORE USE
Make of Material For Telephone Connectivity:
S. Description of Items Make

N.
1 IP based ISDN EPABX system Avaya / Alcatel / CISCO / NEC /
Siemens / Tadiran Telecom
2 PC Based operator console system
3 IP Telephone set having atleast 10 one
touch programmable keys
4 Analog telephone set Avaya /Alcatel /NEC /Beetel

5 1000 pair Krone MDF with accessories Krone Type or Similar
6 200 pair Krone IDF with accessories

11 42U Rack along with all associated Comrack /Dynamic /APW / HCL /
accessories Rittal
12 6U wall mount rack along with all

associated accessories
13 Armoured polyethylene jelly field Finolex/Delton/CMI

telephone cable
a) 5 Pair/0.5sqmm/0.63sqmm
b) 10 Pair/0.5sqmm/0.63sqmm
c) 20 Pair/0.5sqmm
d) 50 Pair/0.5sqmm
e) 200 Pair/0.5sqmm
14 4 pair CAT-6 UTP cable Schneider/Nexans/Amp/
Finolex/Systimax
15 Optical fibre cable Finolex/Schneider/Sterlite/Delton/

Birla
16 40/33 mm dia PLB HDPE Duct Ganpati/Duraline/Pioneer/Berlia/
Veervision/Appollo
17 Cat-6 modular RJ-45 I/O jack with face D-Link / Digilink / Nexans / Systimax
plate & Gang box. / Amp
18 RJ-11 telephone jack with face plate & D-Link /Digilink /Nexans/ Systimax/
Gang box. Amp
19 24 Port Jack Panel HP/D-Link/Digilink/ CISCO

20 Wireless access point. HP/D-Link/Digilink/ CISCO
21 Cat-6 UTP patch cord (2 Mtrs). D-Link/Digilink/ Tyco/Amp
22 Cat-6 UTP patch cord (1 Mtrs).
23 24 Port Switch HP/Cisco/Avaya/Extreme
24 3 KVA Online UPS and other Elnova/Emerson/ APC
associated accessories.
NOTE: FOR THE MATERIALS WHOSE MAKES ARE NOT SPECIFIED ABOVE
NEEDS PRIOR APPROVAL FROM ENGINEER- IN-CHARGE BEFORE USE.

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS (CIVIL WORK)

S. No. Description of Material Name of Approved Make
1 Bitumen 60/70 Indian oil, Hindustan Petroleum,

Bharat Petroleum, Essar Oil Ltd.
2 Emulsion Hindustan coal, Essar oil,Indian oil
3 Cement (43,OPC) ACC, Vikram, Ultratech, Prism, Birla
Cement, Shree Cement, Grasim,
JP, Laffarge, Dalmia
4 White Cement J.K WHITE, BIRLA WHITE
5 Reinforcement (TMT) TATA, SAIL, Rashtriya Ispat Nagam
Ltd., Jindal, Shyam steel
6 Structural Steel TATA, SAIL, Rashtriya Ispat Nagam
Ltd, Jindal, Shyam steel
7 G I Sheet TATA, SAIL, Jindal
8 Waterproofing Compound CICO, PIDILITE, STP, FOSROC,
Sikka
9 Aluminium Section for INDAL, HINDAL, JINDAL,
Doors, Windows Ventilators HINDALCO
10 Aluminium Doors, Windows EARL BEHARI, Everest.
Fitting
11 Mortice lock Godrej, Link
12 Door Closer/Floor Spring DOORKING, EVERITE, HARDWYN
13 Prelaminated particle board Novapan, Bhutan board, Nepal
board
14 Flush Door Swastik (Kitply), GREENPLY,
DURO, CENTURY
15 Clear Glass/Float Glass Modi, ASIAHI, Saint Gobain, Atul
16 Mirror Glass Saint Gobain, Modi, Indo ASIAHI
17 Glazed Tiles 1st Quality of Kajaria,
Jonhson(i)Ltd, Somany, Orient,
18 Ceramic Tiles 1st Quality Kajaria, Spartec,
Somany, Orient, Johanson
19 Vitrified Tiles BELL, Naveen diamonite of
Murudeshwar Ceramic Ltd,
Granimite of Restile Ceramic Ltd,
Orient, Johanson
20 C PVC pipe & fittings Supreme
21 Synthetic Enamel Paints ICI, Berger Paint, Asian Paint,
Nerolac
22 Waterproofing Cement Paint Snowcem India make only.
23 Plastic Emulsion Paint ICI, Berger Paint, Asian Paint,
Nerolac
24 Oil bond Distamper ICI, Berger Paint, Asian Paint,
Narolac

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIALS (CIVIL WORK)

25 Gun Metal Valves/Brass ball Leader, Zolotto, Sant, C&R

valves
26 Gate Valve GM ,Alto, Zolotto
27 GI Pipes TATA, Jindal Hissar, Parkash
28 GI Pipe fittings HB, UNIK Brand ,R Brand
29 Water storage Tank Sintax, Patton,
30 Viterous chinaware Sanitary Neycer , Parryware, Hindware
31 Plastic seat Cover Commander, Gem, Viking
32 CP Fitting . Parko,Marc ,Ess Ess, Jal
33 PVC Connector pipe/ Waste Prayage, Kohinoor, Viking
pipe
34 PTMT Fittings Prayage only.
35 Sink stainless steel Symphony, Prayag, Jindal,
Diamond
36 Stone Ware Pipes Perfect, Burn or equvalent
37 Pump & Motor Kirloskar, KSB, Crompton Greaves
38 Road Marking Paint Nerolac brand No 452/002 and
Asian Paint APCOTRAK WEB
39 Pre Engineered TATA BLUE SCOPE STEEL /
Building/Shed BUTLER BUILDING SYSTEMS,
KIRBY ENGINEERING,
Saxena Marine Tech Pvt. Ltd.,
Supertech (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
Trident Metal Arch
OR Equivalent
40 Aluminium Composite Oropanel,(GLAZETECH Industries
Panels (P) Ltd.)
Note: Any other material to be incorporated in the work not

covered in above mentioned list shall be of ISI certified
reputed manufacturer as approved by Engineer-in-
Charge

(Water Supply/ Sanitary/ Plumbing Installation & Fire fighting).

1 Gun Metal Valves/Brass ball Leader, Zolotto, Sant, C&R
valves


(Water Supply/ Sanitary/ Plumbing Installation & Fire fighting).

2 CI Sluice valve and check Leader, Zolotto, Sant, C&R
valves/ butterfly valves
3 S.F.R.C Manhole covers K.K. Manhole and Grating Co.
4 Stoneware pipes & Gully traps Perfect Potteries, Burn Potteries,
Hind
5 CI Manhole covers & frames BC, RIF, NECO
6 Gate Valve GM, Alto Zolotto
7 Gunmetal valves Leader, Zolotto, Sant
8 Butterfly valves C&R, Cravelry & Ray Pvt. Ltd.
(Calcutta)
9 CI/SS Pipes Kesoram, IISCO,RIF
10 GI Pipes TATA, Jindal Hissar
11 GI Pipe fittings HB, UNIK Brand , R Brand
12 Water storage Tank Sintax, Patton
13
14 Viterous China Sanitary Neycer , Parryware, Hindware
15 Plastic seat Cover Commander, Gem, Viking
16 CP Fitting Bibcock, PilIer cock, Parko, Marc ,Ess Ess, Jal
Angular stopcock
17 PVC Connector pipe/Waste pipe Prayage, Kohinoor, Viking,
HIGHTENSION SWITCHGEARS
PVT. LTD., CALCUTTA
18 Sink STAINLESS STEEL Symphony, Prayag Jindal
20 Stone Ware Pipes Perfect, Burn
21 Fire Extinguishers Fireage, Eversafe, Minimax
22 Fire Fighting Equipments Vijay, NEWAGE, Minimax
23 Pump & Motor Kilosker, KSB, Cromption Greaves
Note:
Any other material to be incorporated in the work not
covered in above mentioned list shall be of ISI certified
reputed manufacturer as approved by Engineer-in-Charge

ANNEXURE - H
LIST OF TEST APPARATUS LIKELY TO BE REQUIRED /

PROVIDED AT SITE LABORATORY
List of Minimum Equipment to be provided in the field Testing Laboratory by the

contractor at his own cost.
1. Sieve Analysis : Sets of I.S. and B.S sieves comprising of sizes 125 mm,
90 mm, 65 mm, 63 mm, 60 mm, 53 mm, 45 mm, 40 mm, 26.5 mm, 25 mm,
22.4 mm, 20 mm, 13.2 mm, 12.5 mm, 11.2 mm, 10 mm, 5.6 mm, 4.75 mm,
2.8 mm, 2.36 mm, 2 mm, 1.18 mm, 900 micron, 600 micron, 425 micron,
300 micron, 150 micron, 90 micron and 75 micron.
2 Sieve shaker capable of 200 mm and 300 mm dia sieves, manually operated
with timing switch assembly.
3. Liquid limit and plastic limit apparatus. As per IS:2720 (Part v) .
4. Compaction test apparatus for I.S. heavy compaction.
5. Field Density Test sand replacement apparatus and core cutter. As

per IS: 2720 (Part xxviii)
5a. Apparatus for determining Angularity number (Elongation & Flakiness

index). As per IS: 2386 (Part i)
6. Aggregate Impact test machine. As per IS:5640
7. Los angles abrasion test machine. As per IS:2386 (Part iv) (Optional)
8. Specific Gravity test for aggregate by Basket method.

Enamel trays (for efflorescence test for bricks)
(i) 300 mm x 250 mm x 40 mm - 2 nos.

(ii) Circular plates of 250 mm dia - 4 nos.
9. Marshall stability and flow value test apparatus.
10. Tray for Prime coat & tack coat.
11. Bitumen content test apparatus.
12. Core Cutting machine.
13. Penetrometer.
14. Softening Point Apparatus

15. Slump test :

a) Slump cones b) Slump rods 3/8 dia. 24 long bullet pointed
c) Steel plates 24x24 d) Steel scales
16. 200 tonne compression testing machine, electrical-cum manually operated.
17. Other miscellaneous items :

a) Oven Electrically operated, thermostatically controlled, range upto
200C, sensitivity 1C
b) Water bath electrically and thermostatically controlled with adjustable
shelves, sensitivity 1C.
c) Concrete Cube testing machine with moulds for concrete 150 mm x
150 mm x 150 mm with Base 24 Nos. plate as per IS: 516
d) Porcelain bowls.
e) Electronic/digital Balance
i) 20 kg Capacity with 1 grams accuracy
ii) 2 kg Capacity with 0.1 gram accuracy
f) Pan balances.
g) Graduate glass cylinders of 200 C.C. and 500 C.C. capacity.
h) Glass measuring jar.
i) Beakers, Towels, glass plates etc.
18. Steel tapes 3m, 5m and 30m (two no. each)

i) Vernier Calipers and Micrometer Screw 25mm gauge.
ii) Foot rule, Wire gauge (circular type) disc. and Plumb bob.
iii) Spirit minimum 30 cms long with 3 bubbles for horizontal / vertical
measurement.
iv) Rebound hammer for testing concrete. and Dynamic penetrometer.
v) Magnifying glass.
vi) Screw driver 30 cms long.
vii) Ball pen hammer, 100 gms.
viii) Plastic bags for taking samples.
ix) Glass Beaker 100 cc
x) Thermometers.
a) Mercury-in-glass thermometer range 0 to 250 C( 6 Nos)
b) Mercury-in-steel thermometer with 30 cm stem, range upto 300 C
(1 Nos)
c) Digital thermometer (2 Nos.)
xi) Kerosene or Gas stove or, electric hot plate.
xii) First aid Box
19. For Control of Profile and Surface Evenness
1. Digital/ Auto Level complete with all accessories (2 Set)

2. Total Station with all accessories (1 Set)
3. 3 meter straight edge and measuring wedge (2 Set)

The laboratory set-up must be complete including a set of reference

standards, adequately staffed and operational to the satisfaction to the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of adequately

experience and qualified laboratory staff, in sufficient number to be able to
meet all testing requirement to the approval of the Engineer, and for the
supply of all transportation of staff, testing equipment and sample
necessary to allow the testing to be performed in a time scale compatible
with the needs of the site.
Contractor shall arrange to maintain the laboratory in satisfactory manner

and will carry stocks of spare equipment and laboratory consumables until
the issue of Taking over Certificate.
In addition to the above , the Contractor shall arrange any other equipment
for carrying out testing required for quality control as per the specifications.

Specification of Prime Cost Items
1501 SCOPE
This Section covers the provision of accommodation for the Engineers
supervisory staff. This accommodation shall include the necessary houses and
quarters for employees, and the provision of all the necessary services.
1502 HOUSING
(a) Rented accommodation: The Contractor shall provide suitable rented
houses, approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, as per the following broad
comforts, in the nearest town to the site location :
i) The Contractor shall provide three furnished houses for the entire contract
period for the Engineers employees, One house of approx. 120m2 area,
for the Project In charge, one house of approx. 90m2 area and house of
approx. 75m2 area for the other employees.
ii) Each house shall have adequate bedrooms, a living /dining-room,
bathroom and kitchen. Each house shall have a clear height from floor to
ceiling of at least 2.74m and floors shall be of concrete or other suitable
material.
iii) The provisions of such accommodation shall be paid under definition of
Provisional Sum as indicated in Clause 8.0 of Additional Special
Conditions. Payment shall be made under item reference B.O.Q Item No.
5.1 (Schedule V), rented accommodation.
Each house shall be provided with the following :

i) A bath and shower with drain and inside flush toilet.
ii) A wash basin with drain pipe.
iii) A kitchen-sink unit with basin and draining boards and a cupboard with
shelves.
iv) Cold-water pipes from a suitable source to the bath, shower, wash
basin, toilet and sink units, complete with taps where required.
v) Electric lights in all rooms and passages, with plug points in the kitchen,
living-room and all bedrooms. The house shall be fully wired and
connected to a 220/250 volt AC power source.
vi) Good-quality locking arrangements on all doors.
The terms of any lease for such accommodation shall be subject to the
Engineer-in-Charges approval and shall contain provisions, where the Owner
agrees, for an extension of the lease on pre-agreed terms during any extended
time for completion of the Contract, as well as provision for the lease to be taken
over by the Engineer or another Contractor in the event of default by or
insolvency of the Contractor.
The terms of any lease for rented accommodation the Contractor shall pay the
electricity charges, water charges, maintenance charges (if any), monthly during
the entire period of the Contract or till such time, when the Engineer-in-charge no
longer requires them.

Notwithstanding the Engineer-in-Charges approval of the conditions of the

lease, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing the
accommodation for the full period required and for suitable substitute
accommodation should the alternative accommodation be no longer available.
The houses on being released shall revert to the Contractor.
1503 PROVISION OF RENTED VEHICLES

The Contractor shall, if so ordered, supply rented/owned vehicles (not more than
two years old) and maintain them for the use of the Engineer and his staff. The
average usage/running of vehicle shall be 2400 km (approx.)
The vehicles to be provided shall be Mahindra Scorpio / Tata Safari /

Chevrolet Tavera or equivalent. The Engineer shall approve all the vehicle(s)
prior to supply. They should all be of a light colour, fitted with radial tyres, alarms
and immobilisers. The vehicle(s) shall be air-conditioned.
The vehicle(s) shall be covered by full comprehensive insurance and registered

for immediate use. Prior to delivery of the rented vehicle(s) and within 7 days of
receipt of the Letter of Acceptance , the Contractor shall provide equivalent
alternative vehicle(s) for the use of the Engineer and his staff, until such time as
the aforementioned rented/owned vehicle(s) is/are made available. No additional
payment will be made for this arrangement. The driver(s) supplied by the
contractor shall be experienced in driving the type of vehicle supplied, and shall
speak and understand the English language.
Unless otherwise specified, the vehicles shall be either rented/owned by the

Contractor and be licensed and comprehensively insured by the Contractor for
use on the public highway within the country by any licensed driver authorised by
the Engineer together with authorised passengers and the carriage of goods and
samples. Vehicle(s) may be driven by the Engineers supervisory staff or the
driver (s) provided by the Contractor or other personnel (authorised to do so by
the Engineer). The Contractor shall provide sufficient insurance cover to allow,
vehicles to be driven by more than one person.
The Contractor shall provide fuel, oil, maintenance including replacing defective
parts, tyres and the like, whenever required, in conformity with the vehicle
manufacturers recommendations or as may be necessary as aforementioned
until release by the Engineer. Ownership of the vehicle(s) shall revert to the
Contractor on completion of the Works or when no longer required by the
Engineer.
The vehicle(s) shall be checked to ensure that they are recording kilometres
correctly and if the variation is more than 5% then the kilometres travelled each
month shall be adjusted.
The Contractor shall provide a replacement for any vehicle by a similar vehicle
after it has completed 1,00,000 km if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such vehicle
cannot be maintained in a satisfactory condition.

The Contractor shall provide competent and licensed drivers approved by the
Engineer for the vehicles indicated above. Sufficient drivers shall be available at
night and at weekends whenever work is being carried out on site.
1504 GENERAL
(a) At the time when the Contract is awarded, the Engineer shall furnish the
Contractor with full details, in writing, regarding the number and type of all
housing units required, The Contractor shall not rent any housing on the basis of
what is specified or scheduled without written confirmation by the Engineer.
(b) Housing supplied by the Contractor shall be ready for use within four weeks
of the date of such instruction, but the Contractor may not proceed with the
permanent Works before the required offices and laboratories have been erected
by him. If the houses for the Engineers site personnel are not ready for
occupation when the permanent Works are commenced, the Contractor shall
provide suitable temporary board and lodging at his own cost. If any further
accommodation is required during the currency of the Contract, the Engineer
shall inform the Contractor at least one months before such additional
accommodation is to be provided.
(c) The Ownership of all offices, housing, and Motor Vehicles provided by the
Contractor as prime cost items shall, when they are no longer required by the
Engineer, revert to the Contractor upon written advice of the Engineer and shall
be removed from the Site.
(d) The Contractor shall ensure that all accommodation complies with the
appropriate statutory provisions operative in the area concerned.
1505 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Prime cost (P.C.) items
The schedule of Quantities may contain prime cost (P.C.) items, so designated,
which are entered as a preliminary allowance to cover the cost of work,
materials, goods and services to be provided by a nominated subcontractor, or
the cost of articles or goods to be purchased by the Contractor in execution of a
written order by the Engineer, who may specify a particular source of supply or
brand of article.
No expenditure or appointment of a subcontractor in respect of a P.C. item will
be authorized unless upon the written instructions of the Engineer. The amount
authorized by the Engineer shall be entirely at his discretion and may be more,
equal to or less than the amount entered in the schedule of Quantities.
Payment for a prime cost item shall be as follows:
(i) The amount actually paid by the Contractor to the subcontractor or
supplier, as the case may be, in execution of the Engineers written
order, plus
(ii) A percentage, as tendered by the Contractor, of the amount in (i)
above to cover all his charges and profits, or a percentage as provided
for.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any further payments or to a fee,

commission, rebate, discount or similar payment or consideration from the
supplier or subcontractor and shall disclose and subtract such amounts from the
amount claimed under (i) above.
Spec. Ite Description Payment Unit
Ref. m
1502 5.1 Provision of rented residential accommodation, as desired by
the Engineer
(a) Providing rented This is a prime cost item.
accommodation for Payment to the
Engineers staff including Contractor under this
electricity, water supply item shall be made as
as specified till end of the the amount actually paid
contract or when no by the Contractor to the
longer required by the subcontractor or
Engineer. supplier, as the case
may be, in execution of
the Engineers written Provision
order. al Sum
(b) Contractors attendance A percentage, as %
on items 5.1 (a) tendered by the
Contractor to cover all
his charges, overheads
and profit will be paid as
specified in sub-clause
(ii) above.
1503 5.2 Motor vehicles
(a) Provision of This is a prime cost item. Provision
rented/owned Motor Payment to the al Sum
Vehicles (type of vehicle Contractor under this
as specified) item shall be made as
The tendered rate shall the amount actually paid
include full compensation by the Contractor to the
for supply, delivery, subcontractor or
insurance, licensing, supplier, as the case
running costs such as may be, in execution of
fuel / drivers salary / the Engineers written
maintenance. order.
(b) Contractors attendance A percentage, as %
on items 5.2 (a) tendered by the
Contractor to cover all
his charges, overheads
and profit will be paid as
specified in sub-clause
(ii) above.

SECTION-6
DRAWINGS
SECTION 6
TENDER DRAWINGS
List of Drawings for Tender
DRAWING TITLE DRAWING NO.
1 Layout Plan RITES/AP/BIR/Arch/Layout plan(PH-I)-01
GENERAL DRGS
2 Chain Link Fencing RITES/AP/BIR/Gen-02/01
3 Boundary wall detail RITES/AP/BIR/Gen-02/boundary wall/01
ROAD DRGS
4 Schematic Plan RITES/AP/BIR/R&P/Schematic plan
5 L-section of road no-1 RITES/AP/BIR/R&P/LS-R1/01
6 Cross-Section-Road 1 RITES/AP/BIR/R&P/CS-R1/01
7 Typical Pavement sections RITES/AP/BIR/R&P/pav road/01
ARCHITECTURAL DRGS
8 Entrance Gate RITES/AP/ BIR/ARCH-01/Ent.gate/01
9 Admin. Building RITES/AP/BIR/Arch-01/admin bldg.-01
10 Admin. Building RITES/AP/BIR/Arch-01/admin bldg-.02
11 Custom Service Building RITES/AP/BIR/Arch.-01/CSB/01
12 Custom Service Building RITES/AP/BIR/Arch.-01/CSB/02
13 Dispensary RITES/AP/BIR/Arch.-01/dispensary/01
14 Dormitory RITES/AP/BIR/ARCH-01/Dormitory/01
15 Quarantine building block RITES/AP/BIR/Arch.-01/Quarantine bldg /01
16 Security barrack RITES/AP/BIR/Arch.-01/security barrack /01

17 Toilet block- in process area RITES/AP/BIR/Arch.-01/p.toilet-01 /01
18 Warehouse Arrv RITES/AP/bir/Arch.-02/Ware. Arrival/-01-03
19 Warehouse Dep. RITES/AP/bir/Arch.-02/Ware.Dep/01-02
ELECTRICAL DRGS
EXTERNAL CABLE ROUTING
LAYOUT FOR BUILDING
20 CONNECTIVITY FROM ESS RITES/AP/BIR/Ext. Cable Plan/E-01
21 PA System layout RITES/AP/BIR/EX. PA SYSTEM /E-01
22 EXTERNAL CCTV layout PLAN RITES/AP/BIR/EXTERNAL CCTV /E-01
EXTERNAL LIGHTING LAYOUT

23 FROM FEEDER PILLAR RITES/AP/BIR/EXTERNALLIGHTING /E-01
EXTERNAL HUME PIPE LAYOUT

24 PLAN RITES/AP/BIR/EXTERNAL HUME PIPE LAYOUT /E-01
25 Electric sub station RITES/AP/BIR/ELECTRIC SUBSTATION /E-01
SERVICES DRGS
26 Drainage Layout RITES/AP/BIR/EX..SERVICE/DRAINAGE
27 Water supply& Garden Hydrant Layout RITES/AP/BIR/EX..SERVICE/W. SUPPLY&GH
28 Sewerage Layout RITES/AP/BIR/EX..SERVICE/SEWERAGE
29 Fire Fighting Layout RITES/AP/BIR/EX..SERVICE/FIRE FIGHTING
STRUCTURAL DRGS
30 Admin bldg- FOUNDATION PLAN RITES/AP/bir/ST-01/admin bldg./01

31 -Admin bldg PLINTH BEAM PLAN RITES/AP/bir/ST-01/admin bldg./02
32 Admin bldg -ROOF BEAM PLAN RITES/AP/bir/ST-01/admin bldg./03
33 Admin bldg - BEAM DETAIL RITES/AP/bir/ST-01/admin bldg./04


2 Technical Bid

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

2 Technical Bid

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

MINISTRY OF EXTERNAL AFFAIRS,

DEVELOPMENT OF INTEGRATED CHECK POST

TENDER NOTICE NO: RITES/AP/ICP/BIRATNAGAR/TENDER/2015/ 01

(A Govt. of India Enterprise)

DEVELOPMENT OF INTEGRATED CHECK POST

TENDER NOTICE NO: RITES/AP/ICP/ BIRATNAGAR/TENDER/2015/ 01

Tender Document issued to

_______________________________ (Name and Address of Tenderer)

(A Govt. of India Enterprise)

S. No. Details Page

PART 2 SCHEDULE A - BILL OF QUANTITIES

Guidelines for filling up Bill of 001

PART - 3 General Conditions of Contract *

Before Issue : After Receipt :

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

NOTICE INVITING TENDER AND INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

1.2 Estimated Cost of Work

1.3 Time for Completion

1.4 Brief Scope of Work

Before Issue : After Receipt :

This tender package is a part of overall Integrated Check-Post (ICP)

Salient Features of ICP at Biratnagar Nepal

Common Administrative Building

KEY BUILDING FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS

S. Buildings Area (in No. of Floor Total Height

1 Admn Building (Common) 1324 Double 3.8 13

Total Area (Buildings) 3984

S. Buildings Area (in No. of Floor Total Height

B) SHEDS & OTHER MISC. STRUCTURES (DESIGN & BUILD)

11 Warehouse & Refrigerated 1800 Single 7 Pre-

Total Area (Sheds) 8048

Total Area in sqm (Buildings & Sheds) 12032

1.5 Availability of Site

respect, have to be completed in subsequent 18 (eighteen) months

2.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA TO BE SATISFIED

2.1 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied are given at Annexure I

2.2 The Qualification Criteria to be satisfied will depend on the category of

2.4 In this Tender Joint Venture is allowed.

In case Joint Venture is allowed the following will apply:

a) If JV is successful in the Bid, the Contract will be awarded in the name of

b) Bid submitted by a Joint Venture of two firms only as Partners/Members

i) A copy of Joint Venture MOU/Agreement duly notarized so as to

The Bid and, in case of a successful Bid, the Agreement

Before Issue : After Receipt :

submitting Power of Attorney signed by legally authorized

ii) Power of Attorney in favour of the Partner-in-charge/Lead Member

2.5 The documents to be furnished by the Bidder to prove that he is satisfying

3.0 FORMAT AND CHECK LIST FOR SUBMISSION OF INFORMATION ON

3.1 Other than Joint Ventures

Before Issue : After Receipt :

3.3 Joint ventures (For Normal Works) : Deleted

4.0 CONTENTS OF TENDER DOCUMENT

PART 1 :- Technical Bid Packet

Section 1 Notice Inviting Tender and Instructions to Tenderers.

PART 2 :- Financial Bid Packet

PART 3:- General Conditions of Contract

4.2 General Conditions of Contract (Compilation of Sections 7 to 11) with

5.0 ISSUE OF TENDER DOCUMENT

5.1 A complete set of Tender Document (Technical and Financial Bid)

Before Issue : After Receipt :

5.3 Tender Documents including drawings can also be downloaded from

5.4 Tender Documents downloaded from RITES website shall be considered

5.5 Clarifications on Tender Documents

A prospective Tenderer requiring any clarification on the Tender